Jake and team, thanks so much for prepared remarks. Looks like we have folks from all over today. Denver, Long Island, Louisiana, Orlando, Atlanta, Maryland. Uh Kelsey, I know you had asked if this video will be sent to your email. Absolutely. We’ll be sure to send it directly to uh the email that you use to register. So, it will go out to all registrants today. Uh feel free to drop any and all questions in chat. We’ll definitely work through them. Um but Jake, thrilled to have you on board today and walk through all the questions. Sometimes I’ll group like kind as we go through here. Uh but this is your time. We want to be sure that uh this is a space where you can ask any and all questions if you should decide to invest or not and arrive. So thrilled to have you all here today. Jake, in prepared remarks towards the end, we walked through historical returns like what we’re seeing to date for all the offerings that we have on arrived. Um and I know we have a active investor who’s had a tough experience. So I’d love to address uh what our historical returns are and then how that can differ for performance in uh a an investor’s account depending on what they’ve invested in and when. Yeah. So the returns that you get on arrived are are ultimately going to depend on how the performance of the underlying asset does um for what you invest in. So when you invest in you know the single family home residential asset category you know generally those properties as a whole are averaging you know a three and a half to four or so um percent dividend and then you earn the appreciation as well and the appreciation is going to be highly dependent on you know what point you bought in. If you bought properties one year ago it’s probably going to have less appreciation than properties that you bought into four years ago. Um, but the thing to remember is that, you know, you only earn the returns of that particular house if you’re investing in the individual properties. So that might mean that you end up investing in a property that rents above our forecast and has, you know, the tenants renew their lease several times, there’s no vacancy, and doesn’t have much repair maintenance. And on a property like that, you’re going to have much higher dividends because there’s much more cash flow being generated from that property. On the flip side, if you just threw a dart and we’re going to pick, you know, make one investment, you might end up getting the flip side and getting the property that has, you know, a tenant that doesn’t pay their rent because they lost their job and then moves out in the middle of winter and there’s a hard time releasing it. And if there’s no income, there’s no, you know, cash for us to be able to pay out those dividends. So, the the way to kind of mitigate that risk is through diversification. It’s kind of the same idea as not, you know, having all your eggs in one basket. Um, the same way you wouldn’t invest in stocks and just only buy into one stock. you know most people buy into you know the S&P 500 where you get kind of the market level returns because the you get the benefit of diversification across a bunch of different companies. So similarly when you invest on arrive you know it’s helpful to invest in you know multiple different individual properties to diversify away some of the risk of any one property doing poorly or you can invest in things like the single family fund which are kind of already diversified because it’s a fund that owns 50 properties. So within the single family fund, if you know, one or two properties isn’t rented, it’s really not that big of a deal because those two properties are such a small percentage of the overall fund. So without looking into that that one investor’s portfolio, it’s hard to say exactly what happened. But the the returns overall are going to depend on what you’ve invested. And remember that we go through different cycles as well. Our properties that were purchased in 2021 and 2022 have seen a ton of appreciation. our properties that were purchased in 2023 2024 are doing okay so far and the ones that have been purchased in the last year or two are starting off really strongly so far. So you want to diversify not just across you know which properties but also across time. You know, it’s similar to if you think back to the the Great Recession. You know, if you only invested in 2007, you know, of course you were going to have poor returns because a market crash happened right before. But if you were investing a little bit in 2005, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, well, all of a sudden look back now after a decade and you’ll have actually have pretty good returns because you kind of bought as the market was going up and as the market was going down because it’s, you know, virtually impossible for anybody to know exactly what’s going to happen in the future. But we really like the single family asset class in particular because over the long term over 40 50 60 year um time periods we see consistent appreciation of about 4% nationally and oftentimes higher in some of the markets that we’re buying properties in. So my my general you know thoughts for folks is to you know make sure you diversify and make sure that you only invest in funds that you’re willing to have kind of stay in real estate for a bit. You know, real estate is not an asset class that you can invest in and then trade out of and trade back into and kind of go back and forth, back and forth. It’s definitely something that performs best when you invest and then kind of take a step back and let it sit there for a number of years. Fantastic, Jake. Thanks so much for walking through it. And I I believe there was another um comment, but I’m not seeing it now from this active investor where they had stated illiquidity. And I just wanted I know we touched on liquidity. Uh Ryan didn’t prepared remarks, but Jake, I’d love to double down on what liquidity options are available given you were just mentioning that and Jerry asked how do I sell? Um so maybe we walk through the options that we have for individual properties. I can share some performance data and then uh what we can do for funds as well. Yeah. So there’s there’s all [clears throat] of the investments on arrive have a path to be able to liquidate. The path that you take depends on what you invest in. So for the funds, the single family fund and the real estate income fund, we have what’s called a redemption program. So all you have to do is submit your request to redeem shares and then it gets batched into a queue and we process them once a quarter. When that redemption happens, it’ll happen at whatever the current share price of that fund is. So if you invest in a fund now and you you wait three years and then you decide to redeem you submit this request your your um transaction the price you sell at will be the price of the fund in three years. So I’d say this to mean that you kind of you capture the appreciation that happens. Um there is an early withdrawal penalty for redeeming before the three-year mark of 1%. After 3 years it’s 0%. So again, as far as investing, you know, for the long term in real estate, if you put money into the funds and you wait a couple of years, you can then do a redemption and take that money out with the appreciation for no penalty. Um, that redemption program is specific to just the funds. For the individual properties, we have a secondary market. And the secondary market is runs once per month, you know, generally around the first week of the month. And it’s a peer-to-peer marketplace. So it’s an opportunity where you can sell your shares to other arrived investors or you can buy shares from other arrived investors. And so because of that the price at which transactions happen on the secondary market is going to differ for everybody because like the stock market it depends on what is the market for each individual property and what prices are people willing to sell at which prices are people willing to buy at. So on the secondary market we provide all sorts of information about you know what the current yield is, what the yield is at certain list prices, what the historical trade uh amounts are, what the current order book is. You can see where other buyers and sellers are pricing their trades. And then we have an algorithm that will automatically kind of match buyers and sellers again just like the stock market. That is a little bit more complex to use and it runs a little bit more frequently. Like I said, runs monthly. So the the good news is with both of these programs, you do have the opportunity to be able to liquidate. The redemption program runs a little bit less frequently, four times per year, and the secondary market is a little bit more frequent at 12 times per year. And again, you don’t necessarily need to know any of these or need to use any of them right now. Um it’s important just to say that, you know, you have the ability to liquidate and you have the ability to sell your shares and exit the investment at any point. Um, let me know if there’s any follow-ups on how those work. Again, for for you guys right now, the the more interesting opportunity is that you can actually, you know, eventually be able to go buy shares on the secondary market and buy shares of all the past properties that we’ve had that may not be available right now. That is something that you should definitely get into after you, you know, the first couple months. Kind of dip your toes in the water, get used to arrive, understand how everything works, and then that option will become available for you. Fantastic. All right. Um, and Jerry, it looks like you’re looking to liquidate the Gerald, which is great feedback. Uh, within once you log in, you’ll go to your portfolio. From there, you should see all positions and then single family. You’ll be able to see your investment. But if you have any questions at all, always feel free to email me at supporterrive.com or use that chat function in the bottom right hand corner of your platform. Typically on online at 9:00 a.m. So, if you’ve already written in, fantastic. We will definitely get back to you uh as soon as this webinar is over. and we can figure out your dates there. So, more than happy to help. Um, and few stats on secondary market as a whole. This is as of Q2 2026. We had 474 offerings trading. So, all properties, we’ve had uh over 11K investors that have participated, 181k orders placed, and 9.7 million matched. Now that has increased since we had our secondary market uh open in August as well. So this was from earlier. Um and then we have another one co opening up on September 11th as well. And to Jake’s point, all investments across arrived are intended to be held for at least 6 months. So we do not have an option to liquidate prior to that six-month hold um for any investments on arrived and then those hold periods that Jake walked through for anticipated. But let us know if there’s any other questions on liquidity. Uh folks have their hard-earned funds and we want to make sure that you know your options when you’re choosing where to park those funds. So very much appreciate the questions. All right, moving back over to the queue here. A great one from Patrick. Very timely. Do any of these investments qualify for 1031 exchange? The investments [clears throat] you see in the Arrive platform do not, but we are actually in the middle of launching a 1031 exchange program. Um, so I’ll send you an email after this, Patrick, but the long and short is that we’ve been helping folks to, you know, sell their old property and then most importantly, we’ve been helping folks to acquire their new property and manage it for them. And the 1031s have um I’m going to keep it short because I know there’s a lot of folks that this won’t apply for on the call, but the 1031s have a ton of tax benefits. It’s just really tricky to execute because there’s some really tight IRS deadlines. We’ve got everything set up because we’re buying properties every day. Um, and so we’ve now started this program where we’re actually helping investors to facilitate a 1031 so they can exit, you know, actually actively actively managing a property but still retain equity in real estate um, and be able to kind of benefit from, you know, the cash flow and appreciation. So, I’ll shoot you an email right after this, Patrick. I’d love to just hear a little bit more about your situation and see if it might apply to you. Absolutely. Very timely. Um, and I sent over a link to our 1031 landing page if you would like to take a peek um, prior to chatting with Jake. All right. Okay, I can take this one quickly from Al. How do I withdraw money tied to my bank account to invest? Great question. So, funds actually come directly from uh your connected bank account when you invest. So, there’s no need to deposit funds into your arrived cash balance. The arrived cash balance is primarily where uh your dividends will go that uh and you can let them build up over time. You can withdraw them or you can apply them towards a new investment when you go to invest. So, let us know if there’s any questions there. But when you go to make an investment, you will see your connected bank account there as well. All right, moving back over. Ooh, a good one in here. What percentage or fee does arrive charge for providing this investment service? Great question. So, fees are going to depend a little bit on which asset you’re investing in. Within an asset class, the fees are all consistent. Um, so if you’re looking at the single family individual properties, it’s going to be the same fees for all of them, but the fees there are going to differ a little bit from the single family fund or from the real estate income fund. The there’s generally two types of fees that we charge. There’s an upfront sourcing fee. So, it’s a onetime fee that goes to us for the work in identifying and acquiring the the asset and bringing it onto the arrive platform. After that, then there’s a recurring assets under management fee, which is what we charge for all of the ongoing management, tax reporting, information provided, um, and facilitation of the investment. And that fee is generally a percentage of the the amount that you invest. Both of those fees are going to be highlighted on each individual properties page. So, if you go to the financials tab, you’ll be able to see the breakdown for that asset class. And that FAQ that CR sent has a lot of good information as well that goes into all the specific numbers and details around each specific one. But that’s generally the high level overview is there’s a larger upfront sourcing fee. It’s a onetime fee. It’s already baked into how much money we’re raising for an investment. So if you go to invest $1,000, that is going to include that sourcing fee in it. You don’t get hit with like a taxes and fees section at the end. And then that recurring assets under management fee is just paid out of the cash flow that the investments generate. So, as we, you know, collect rent from tenants and pay expenses on the property, we pay the arrived asset management fee and then what’s left gets distributed out to investors. That way, you’re not on the hook for any, you know, subscription costs. You don’t have to put more money in. If you say, “Hey, I only want to put in $100 and then that’s all I’m going to do.” You don’t you’re not on the hook to put in any more money than that. Um, I think that was all I was going to have on fees. Let me know if there’s any other specific questions. Um, I can never keep all the numbers straight these days with how many different products we have. So, that FAQ and then the financials tab on each offering page is going to be the best place to look to have all that information. Absolutely. Awesome. Thanks so much for walking through it, Jake. I can take this one quickly from Al. I don’t see any other questions in the queue, so keep them coming. Uh, we’re happy to answer any and all. Al had asked, “Does arrive have a phone number to physically talk to somebody at arrived?” It’s a great question. We pre previously offered a phone number, but it wasn’t uh manned 24/7. So, folks had longer than expected uh response times. So, the best way to reach our team is email supportive.com or use the chat function in the bottom righthand corner of our platform. And then we have these webinars once a week. It’s Tuesdays at 9:00 a.m. uh that we have existing investors jump into to have questions. But I would say in general our response times on email and chat are rather fast. For context, we do have an AI chat directly on the intercom or on our chat that’s in the bottom righth hand corner of our platform. You can ask for a human at any time and get out of them. Um I know sometimes those can be frustrating. So our goal has been to always be human first. Uh that’s just the first line of defense if there’s any questions that can come directly from our FAQ. So, let us know if there’s any other questions there, Al. Uh, happy to walk through it um and answer any others. Jake, we’re well into Q3 here. Uh, what would you say that your most exciting uh project that you’re working on right now? Um, I’m I’m working on a lot of our 1031 stuff, but I’m also really excited about the recurring investments uh feature that our team has coming up. So right now if you want to build up you know a large portfolio in you know the real estate income fund and you don’t have the capital to do it all at once it generally means you have to come back you know pretty regularly to keep putting in more money and so we’re excited about this recurring investments feature where you can set up an auto invest so that way you can just say hey I want to invest you know $100 a month and then kind of set it and forget it come back in a year or two and we’ll automatically withdraw the extra cash invest it into the fund and that’ll allow you to kind of compound your returns because you can actually start to you take the dividends that you’re earning, reinvest those to buy more shares, which of course then gets you even more dividends the next month to be able to buy more shares. So, it’s been a uh frequent request for the last couple of years, even though it’s pretty easy to go and click through to make a new investment, it does get a little tiring after you’ve done it for, you know, two, three, four years. So, it’s a um a big feature that our team’s been working hard on and we’re excited to be having that come out this fall. Absolutely. Well, Jake, you’ve been integral in building every single uh product that we’ve had on arrive today. So, your fingerprints are on each and every offering, and it’s exciting to see 1031 off the ground. Um, and now building recurring investment. I know that’s been one of the top feature requests that we’ve had from investors to date. So, very excited and looking forward to that one going live. Uh, it just adds to what we all are about and our DNA of being a passive investment. So, goes right in line with making this as easy as possible. Not getting those phone calls at 2 a.m. with a leaky toilet or a refrigerator going out. Um, just being able to let your investment work for you. Uh, one quick one from Kelsey and then I think we’ll wrap our virtual doors here unless any other questions. What’s the minimum investment? What is the minimum investment amount you can invest? The minimum in all offerings on arrived unless otherwise noted is $100. So the goal is to be as accessible as possible. The max investment per individual property is 9.8% of the equity available. That is so we intend to maintain real estate investment trust um status within those offerings. Now for the fund investments, we also mirror that max but it’s much larger given the funds are a lot larger than the individual properties. So no max in the number of properties you can invest in. Um, oftent times or like I shouldn’t say oftentimes, periodically if we have a property that is selling quickly, we will put a smaller max on that. So you could see $500 uh $500 max, $200 max, and that is just to give more folks the opportunity to invest in that property. Um, that is not extremely often. Just calling it out in case you seen that. All right, Jake, I believe you walked through returns, but um and so Kelsey, it’ll be in our um in the recording, but Jake, maybe we do could you do like a basic dollar amount, like maybe a $100 investment and what that return could look like? Um it’ll vary with funds and individual properties. Yeah, the the high level is the single family residential investments tend to have about a 4% dividend yield and then, you know, maybe about a 3 to 5% per year in appreciation, but that’s going to kind of depend on the individual property, the market you invest in. Um, and it’s not, you know, tends doesn’t tend to be very linear. So, you have some years where the market’s flat and some years where there’s a ton of appreciation. So, the single family investments end up being about kind of the seven to n% return or so per year. um with about half of that coming from dividends and about half of that coming from appreciation. The real estate income fund tends to be about 8% um and that’s all dividend. So the real estate income fund is investing in a bucket of loans. Loans don’t appreciate, you know, they just get paid back at the the their par value, you know, the the principal amount. So the the real estate income fund is only generating income, but it does generate pretty high income at about 8% per year. um that’s probably enough to kind of get you started again again the you know the um single families it that’s are kind of the averages. So there’s going to be some properties in some markets that have you know lower returns or lower dividend yields others that will have higher ones. Um that’s just kind of the the averages for the overall group if you look at all you know 500 sub properties. Fantastic. Awesome. Kelsey that said thanks for addressing my question and for the explanation Jake. So thanks for walking through it. Great question Kelsey. Um, I think we cruised through all the ones that I see today. So, keep me honest in the chat if I’ve missed any. Uh, Jake, any closing remarks before we shut our virtual doors today. That’s all I’ve got. Thanks all for coming and asking good questions and looking forward to investing with you. Absolutely. Well, Jake, thanks so much for your time as always. Uh, very much looking forward to what’s to come, what we built today. For all the folks that spent 43 minutes on your Tuesday morning and afternoon, thank you. Fantastic engagement. Uh we so appreciate having the opportunity to walk through any questions that you have and if any which typically happen uh come after this webinar you can always reach out to supportive.com. You can use our chat function in the bottom righthand corner of our platform. We’re live on all social channels. The one that’s most community based would be our Reddit. Uh but again the email and chat are best for any u questions about your account or arrived as a whole. So happy investing and I hope you all have a great rest of your day. Thanks folks. Talk to you later. I
Author: davenkross2026
-
08/30/2026 – Content Growth Engine
All right. All right. All right. What’s happening everybody? Hope everyone’s doing well. I had to go to a new location last moment because our internet was not working at our first location. We are uh not at the normal place. Of course, I’m, you know, traveling international. So, does happen sometimes. With that being said, uh where’s everybody calling in from? Go ahead and comment in the chat. We’re still getting ready on our side. Uh but uh let’s go ahead and uh uh comment in the chat where we’re calling in from. So I’ll I’ll scroll up a little bit. We’ve got uh Misty from Colorado. Um Natal from California. Nick from Ohio. Brett from Pennsylvania. Cassandra from Buffalo. Olivia from New Hampshire. Kathy from Virginia. Ryan from San Diego. I love San Diego. That’s one of my favorite cities. Rachel from Texas. Of course, it’s pretty expensive, but yeah, it’s a great city. Rachel from Texas. Brandy from Florida. Chad from Maryland. Uh says, “Greetings.” Greetings, Chad. Um happy uh you know, good evening to most of you. Probably going to be good morning to a few of you out there and uh maybe good middle of the night to a few of you as well. Rick from Austin, Texas. also like Austin. William, Arlington, Texas. Jenna from Ocean Isle Beach, North Carolina. James from Arizona. Karen from Arizona. Uh Misty from Colorado. Jennifer from Missouri. Angie from Colorado. Bonita from Mississippi. Alexis from Connecticut. Michael from Augusta, Georgia. Natal San Diego. Jonathan Oregon. Uh Lori says, “Hi, North Carolina in the house.” Awesome. Justin Ottawa, Ontario. Uh, Philip Arkansas, Natil San Diego, Brian from Hawaii, Lucille, Hey Georgia, Kyle from Michigan, Jason from Orlando, uh, Peter from uh, I’m not even going to attempt that one, but Macedonia or Macedonia. I always like I always thought it was Macedonia growing up, but then later on someone told me it’s Macedonia. Karen from Arizona, Altia from Baltimore. Awesome, guys. Okay, next question that I have for you is it’s it’s evening for most of you here. I see there’s a few people middle of the night like the uh Macedonian uh Peter here. Um with that being said, what is the number one reason why you showed up to this live training today? Go ahead and comment in the chat what the number one reason is that you showed up to this live training here today.
Okay.
Um, Troy says to fire my boss. Okay. I love it. I love it. Okay. Christy, Dollars, Penny, passive income. Ann to help me find my niche. Randy, you were talking about basics. Love it. Love it. Craig, additional income. Philip, curiosity. Uh, Stuart from Thailand. Awesome. I think I’m actually going to be going to Thailand here in a few months for a business conference. Mary, learn to earn money smart, not hard. Mario, cash flow. Rodney, text that reminded me. Lupe, uh, can anybody hear anything? Because I can’t. I’m on mute. Anyone else having uh issues hearing? I think you should all be good, right? Clark, get intel. Kelly, tell our business social media profiles on YouTube. Got it. Craig, to make money. Eric, convert my skill to income. Susan, learn learn how to make money on YouTube. So, I see that we’ve got like people working uh like professionals working here. We also have business owners here. And this does work. This system does work for either uh of you, right? So, it works whether you’re a professional trying to start things or it works whether you’re a business owner because really just focuses on getting traffic, right? So, it really doesn’t matter what you know side income or business you’re doing. If you’re getting more traffic to that, like a ton of traffic, uh obviously good things are going to happen. And YouTube traffic is the best traffic on the internet. So, good stuff. Susan, learn how to make money on YouTube. Magros, need more money. Will will to make money. Michael got laid off. Curious about what I can do next. Jonathan, income from a YouTube channel. Ben, make my YouTube channel profitable. Mary, help with the niche. Kevin, to monetize my niche. Kyle, improve my family’s life. Love it. Jason, uh, tired of being fired. Uh, that rhymes and also I like it. Good stuff. Brett, making money on YouTube. Laurel, uh, checking out your approach, Chris. Uh, it sounds like a good time to learn something new, Alia. I understand that you’re the best. Learn more about you. Awesome. Okay, one more question, guys. And I’m I’m still getting set up on the side here. We’re almost ready, but one more question. What is the number one reason that you haven’t started yet? Right? because you know clearly you YouTube is is such an a great opportunity and the and the business models we’re going to teach you today is such a great opportunity but what is the number one reason that you haven’t gotten started yet or you’re stuck right now. So comment that in the chat and we always uh we always like to uh keep these in mind uh when we’re making future stuff and also I’ll if I see something specifically I’ll try to reference it later on in the presentation. So, we’ve got uh fear of failure. It seems too complicated. I don’t know what value I can provide. Okay, we’re going to help you pick your niche. It’s definitely not complicated. Um definitely understand the fear of failure, but you’re going to understand uh later on that it makes total sense. Need direction, Emily. Fear of professional repercussions. See, that’s an interesting one cuz I had that same exact fear. No one even discovered my YouTube channel, even messaged me about it or anything until I was like well over 100,000 subscribers. I don’t even think the old people I work with e even now know about my YouTube channel. I like barely anybody’s even messaged me about it. I’ve had a few friends from like college and stuff messaged me about it. Like I just don’t tell anybody. And then if you don’t tell anybody, like who’s going to find out, you know? Um Rick ADHD paralysis. I also have ADHD. I’ve been diagnosed twice with it. Uh so this is um uh I’m actually going to talk about that a little bit later on, but uh this is one of the things that can definitely help a lot with that because um you can always just switch your niche later on, right? You can you can switch what you sell later on as well. So it’s great for people who have that. Um don’t know how or what. Got it. I have time now and you are inspiring me. Awesome, Joel. Love to hear it. Malagos, just don’t know where to start or even how to start. James, need info. EA, just need to carve out time. Kyle, struggling with ambition. Uh, Ben, I have started but I can’t get traction. Brandy, not sure how to get started or where to start. Joy, afraid to fail. Uh, Donna, finding the right niche. Courtney, the lack of knowledge and where to start. Um, and Favor, don’t know how or where to start from. Got it. Okay. And then Penny, looking for the right opportunity. Um, Patrick, I wanted to get camera equipment first and Mike’s. Jillian, I have no idea what to do. Timothy, need to find my niche. Benedict, don’t know how. Jeremiah, fear. CW, don’t know my niche. Jamal, fear and don’t know what to do. Lisa, I thought I was too old to try something new. I’m going to show you example after example of people in their 50s, 60s, even somebody in their 70s getting results here. So, uh, definitely uh, not too old. In fact, being older actually helps because you’re starting towards the finish line because you actually have something that you can teach other people. That’s what we’ve noticed over and over again. Like the clients that get success the easiest are actually the older old older uh clients. Lisa, I thought I was too old to try something new. Alfred, clarity on the niche. Uhuru busy with other jobs. Got it. Okay, guys. Let’s go ahead and jump in. Let’s go ahead and jump in. Um let me just get set up really quick.
Yeah, I’ve already busted it. All right, so let’s go ahead and share the screen here. And I think you guys should be able to uh see my screen. It should say how to grow and make money on YouTube in 2026 without fancy gear, without techy stuff, and without spending hours on each video, provided you use this hybrid model and follow one simple rule. All right, let’s get into it, guys. So, first of all, why are you here today, guys? Go ahead and do the thumbs up thing. Um, it should be the emoji on the bottom right if you’re excited about one of these things. And the first one is going to be views. So, do the thumbs up thing if you’re excited about getting views.
And by the way, guys, I last moment I I I I had to like evacuate and get uh close to a place that has internet cuz I didn’t have internet and so I’m in a I’m in a random place right now. So, I’m I’m really glad I was able to do that. I I woke up early. Good thing I did wake up early. Uh awesome. So, a lot of people want views, but how about this next one here? Um how about making money? do the thumbs up reaction with for that one or just any emoji that you want for making money. All right, awesome. So, I can tell that you guys actually watch my content because that’s like my whole message, right? My whole message is nobody cares about views. You need to get the right views. Views where you’re actually helping people solve their problems and therefore uh you’re giving value to them and therefore you are going to get compensated for that value in many different ways. One of which can be just you directly selling something to them obviously, right? Okay, awesome. But how about this third one? And that is having an impact. Basically creating a business that you can be proud of and helping a lot of people. So go ahead and do that one. All right. Awesome. Yeah, I’m seeing a lot of different ones. Confetti, hearts, uh of uh all kinds of different ones here. Good stuff. Clapping. Good stuff. Awesome. Awesome. All right. So, you guys are definitely the types of people that I want to work with because our goal is to basically create a bunch of creators that help other people solve their problems. And that’s, you know, an incredible thing when it comes to alternative education and solving the world’s problems a lot faster. So, that’s awesome. Okay. Now, before we start, let me be straight with you. I’ve got two jobs today. Job one is to teach you the best YouTube lesson that you’ve ever gotten free right here with no catch. Job two, at the end, I’m going to offer you a way to work with us directly, our coaching program. This is where my team and I handhold you to grow and make money on YouTube, just like the 1,000 plus clients that we have winning inside right now. And for a few people out there, if they’re business owners, we can actually just do done for you work as well. But I’ll be honest, it is not cheap. It’s expensive. It’s very expensive. So, here’s the deal. If I don’t give you the best lesson today, do not book a call. Don’t be giving me a dollar. Okay? But if I do, if I actually change how you see this, then you owe it to yourself to take a look. And if the paid thing isn’t for you, totally fine. Stay anyways. Learn everything. It is yours for free. So if that sounds fair, drop deal in the chat. Okay, drop deal in the chat if that sounds fair. Awesome. Okay, we got lots and lots of people dropping deal in the chat. I’m going to try to stay up with the chat, but you guys are super super fast. But awesome. Okay. And by the way, we are giving away free stuff at this workshop. At the very end, you will get a chance to walk away with the niche validator pro, both the chatbt or the claude AI version, whichever you like to use. And this is the newest version yet. It’s a massive upgrade over anything that we put out before it. And you’ll also get a chance for $64,497 worth of bonuses, but only for those who stay until the end offer. Okay? And we even have a secret bonus as well at the end. So, type staying if you’re going to be staying to the end for the niche validator pro. Awesome. Good stuff. Good stuff. And by the way, guys, before we start, I’m going to ask you to type things in the chat the whole way through. And here’s why. Right? This is the forgetting curve. It’s been studied for over 140 years at this point. If you just sit and listen, roughly half of what I say is going to be gone within the hour. And 2/3 is going to be gone by tomorrow. Okay? Now, the same guy who discovered the forgetting curve also discovered the fix for it, which is active recall. Every time you pull something back out of your head, the line resets so that you can retain more information as we go. So, every time I say type it, that’s not me being cute. That’s repetition. You’re resetting your curve and you’re going to get more out of this training. So, do that 20 times tonight and you walk out with knowledge in your head instead of that knowledge being gone by breakfast. Okay? So, type locked in if you’re with me. Okay? typed locked in in the chat if you’re with me. Awesome. Awesome. Good stuff. Good stuff. Now, look at this. A new study just came out on how Americans are actually spending their day. YouTube 1 hour and 46 minutes. Live TV, which has been dominant for basically the last 50 plus years, 1 hour and 31 minutes. YouTube passed up television outright. And look at the number under it. 23% of Americans now watch YouTube mainly on their actual TV set. So the big screen in the living room. I wonder how many of you are actually watching this this live training on your TV. I’m curious. Comment in the chat if you are. So the television didn’t die, right? Uh it’s still sitting right there. What changed is who fills it. Okay. But here’s what I want you to catch. A whole generation grew up being told that the dream was to get on TV, to get discovered, to get picked, to get a slot. And that dream is dead. And that’s the best news that you’ll hear all day because the screen is still on. It’s just playing stuff made by regular people now. A camera, an idea with no studio behind them. So, nobody’s picking anyone anymore, right? The TV is already on and waiting for something to play. The only question is whether any of it is yours, right? You used to have to have a gatekeeper that tells you you can be on TV or not. Now you don’t have to. Right? So that’s exactly what I’m going to show you how to do today is to pick yourself instead of being picked by somebody else. Now, one thing I always like to say is this is a maze. You start here at the top and you’re and you finish here at the bottom. And your goal is to get to the finish as fast as you possibly can, whatever that goal is. And most creators start with good intentions and then they fall into the maze. They end up burnt out, overthinking, stuck in analysis paralysis with zero views and zero income, and then they just give up. But actually, most people don’t start in the first place, right? So, if you’re here watching this right now, you are already ahead of the majority of people. So, type burnt out if you felt this or not yet if you haven’t even started yet. Okay? Type burnt out if you felt this in the chat or not yet if you haven’t started yet.
Okay? Got it. Got it. Okay. Good stuff. Good stuff. Okay. We’ve got Jay, Susan, Beverly, S, uh, Sil, uh, Karen, James, Amber, Sheriff, Brianna, Karen, Karen again, Michael, Cameron, Timothy. Awesome. All right. Now, additionally, one thing I like to say about this maze part, guy, is any uh this maze part here, guys, is anything you’ve heard about YouTube outside of what I teach, chances are it’s probably you entering this maze. Okay? Because most people go into the maze and then they get lost and they put their hands up and they’re like, “Mazekeeper, come and get me.” Okay? And getting lost in the maze is focusing on all the stuff that does not matter. Like all the YouTube coaches that have entire channels about reviewing YouTube gear when that makes like 1% of a difference in your success, the chances of success for your channel. And that’s the maze, right? that’s the reason why you don’t get results because you’re focusing on all of these things that do not matter when in reality you could just focus on the few things that actually matter and actually get you results. But let’s just say hypothetically you go into the maze and you just navigate it perfectly. Let’s say you’re an absolute pro. Here is the fastest way that you could get from start to finish just like this. Okay, so I’ll kind of outline it here really quick. Just like that. And that’s making zero mistakes. But actually, it’s not the fastest because there’s another way. It’s faster, easier, and safer. And you’re basically just going around the maze just like this. Okay, pretty clever, right? But this isn’t even the fastest route because we uh all learned from a young age that the fastest way to go from point A to point B is a straight line. What if I showed you a way to do just that? Skip the maze completely and you literally just go from start to finish straight to the results. So, type straight line in the chat if you want to skip all the shenanigans, all the stuff that does not matter that people spend almost all their time with uh and actually just go straight uh on a straight line straight to the results. Type that in the chat. Awesome. Awesome. Beverly, Chris, Penny, Rachel, Favor, Oscar, uh Ephanu, Jana, Joel, Lynn, Doug, John, Sherah, James, Michelle, Michael. Awesome. Okay. And one thing I want to say about this part right here, just going back for a second, guys, is a lot of other YouTube advice out there, I don’t think they’re purposely trying to give you bad advice. At least in most cases, they’re not purposely trying to give you bad advice, right? A lot of them give good advice, but they give good advice for like a gaming channel or a prank channel or something like that because there’s a bunch of different types of YouTube channels, but I’m going to be talking about the type of YouTube channel that is the easiest to get results with. And it’s the type of YouTube channel that you can pivot to anything else later on down the line. And it’s also the type that you can pair with any type of side hustle, any type of business that you’re doing. And that’s why when it comes to winning on YouTube, I have the straight line for you today so you can get there the easiest, quickest, safest, and most comfortable way possible. And specifically, you are going to gain access to the hottest opportunity to exist in the content creation business. Now, these are the newest stats that just came out. And before they said that YouTube and the content creator ecosystem in general was going to be about $1 trillion by 2034. But then just 6 months later, they updated it and they said it was going to be worth $1.6 trillion the entire market by 2034, which is an astronomically higher number. It’s huge, absolutely huge number. And then by 2035, it’s going to be 2 trillion, right? So it’s growing way faster than even the experts expected, right? The projections are just going up and up so much faster than even the experts expected, right? So, and look at this going up while so many other things are going down, right? It’s harder than ever to get a job. There’s so many industries that are being disrupted. Meanwhile, content creation is just going up and up and that is a sign. And this is one of the biggest opportunities that I want you to get access to when it comes to content creation. And I want you to do it while bypassing all the traps, the gotchas, the limitations, and the barriers to entry that otherwise would lock you out, forcing to stand on the sideline as you watch generational wealth pass you by, helpless to do anything about it. And you will definitely want to take advantage of what’s happening right now in the creator economy because you are in the perfect place and time to start. And mind you, YouTube pays out billions every year, but it’s not going to lifestyle vloggers and entertainment channels anymore. So, type money in the chat if you want a piece of this $2 trillion pie. Type money in the chat. Okay, awesome. Good stuff. We got Sherry, Janet, uh, Sebash, Bonita, Christine, Patrick, Andrew, Cat, uh, Raph, or Rafe, Tammy, John, Ann, Denise, Brandy, Brandon, Sherah. Awesome. And today, you’ll be handed the key to unlock the prison cell that is keeping you trapped and away from the YouTube growth that you’ve been wanting for a very long time. And seriously, we’ve helped online businesses of course, but also coaches, freelancers, job seekers, stay at home parents, nineto-fers, grandpas, grandmas, agency owners, service providers, digital product sellers, failed YouTubers, YouTubers getting views but struggling with monetization, successful YouTubers who are crushing it but want to crush it even harder. Uh people that own software companies or SAS, location specific businesses like realtors. We even have a commercial real estate guy who’s like one of the biggest commercial real estate guys in Houston uh in our program. Um uh also like dental cosmetic clinics as well as just like a lot of different uh medical related clinics in general, financial advisors, etc., etc., right? Uh people doing paid ads that want to stop doing paid ads, people doing paid ads that want to make their paid marketing two times more effective by having a YouTube presence. And even physical brick-and-mortar business owners and even people with disabilities do this. I’m going to show you an example here in a bit. And this works for almost any niche, and almost any situation because we designed this type of YouTube channel to be flexible so that you can go in so many different directions. And the good news is you don’t need to be a YouTuber or an influencer to win on YouTube. But to get there, I’m going to be exposing the dark side of YouTube and creators who are now slaves to the platform. Here’s an example. Boogie2988. Now, I am not trying to make fun of him at all. I actually respect him a lot for revealing his public income, but he’s got about 4 million subs, and he revealed on a podcast tour last year that he’s only making about $44,000 a year, which is less than the average income for an American. and he is one of hundreds of thousands of creators who are promised success through views, but views do not automatically equal money. Okay? Meanwhile, I work with people who get 500 views per video. They’re making over $10 million a year on YouTube. And there’s but there’s most people out there that are big on YouTube are not like that at all. Right? Most people who get a lot of views don’t make a lot of money because they’re doing things wrong. They’re not using this method that I’m going to teach you today. So, type got it if you get that. Views do not automatically equal money. Okay? Type got it in the chat. All right. D, Jennifer, Charles, Jay, Tammy, Sherry, Lisa, Tiffany, Maryanne, Flo, Lynn, uh, Chris, Nurie, Brad, Kurt, Becky, Charles, John, Lisa, Carol, Sunny, Bill, Christy, Brianna, Awesome, Matthew, uh, Sharon.
Uh, and by the way, we’re going to get to your questions later, guys. So, uh, don’t worry about it. We’ll get to your questions later. Uh, but anyways, you know, seriously, I know there’s a lot of people in this crowd that are frustrated, burnt out, stuck because you were promised a gold mine and yet you found nothing. You’ve been uploading videos or you’re frustrated or you’re frustrated because you you can’t even get started uploading videos because you’ve been told that you need to buy this this camera first, you need to have a really fancy set with really good lighting or that gear first, you need to be really good at editing or you need to be really good at storytelling or any of those types of things, right? but you basically found nothing but regret. So, let’s talk about who this is for. This is for you if you’re a total beginner who wants to finally start and not burn out. And by the way, go ahead and drop your profession in the chat. I’m curious what all of you do for a living because an example of a total beginner is my brother Zach, right? He was a complete beginner uh in his 50s, not techsavvy at all. Uh never made a video in his life and never made a dollar outside of his career. Okay? and he was in the trades for about 30 years, specifically HVAC. So, we’ll talk about him here in a moment, but we’ve got Olivia, a 3D computer animator, IT, retired RN, service technician. Uh Penny’s a notary public. Colton is a dentist. They have lots of dentists and healthcare professionals in the uh the program. Doc is a data analyst. Uh Wendy is a teacher. Kathy is retired. Rachel is a lab tech. Cassie teacher. Susan many things. Mark consultant. Tracy medic, Roberto IT. Uh Kathy, insurance agent. Miriam musician. Joel is a pharmacist. I was also a pharmacist as well. And one of my bosses was named Joel. That’d be funny if my boss is actually watching this right now. My old boss. Hey Joel, if it’s you. Michael, uh HR director. Michael, consultant. Chris, sales rep. Billy, team sales. Sean, nothing. Heidi, immigration adviser. Christy, IT. Jamie, dog trainer. Natalie, accountant. Uh, Philip, art teacher. Julianne, transformation coach. FNU teacher. Uh, Kevin, retired. Uh, Al, artist. Emily, human resources. Sean, iron worker. Brenda, physical therapist. Barbara, cooking. Lynn, SAS creator, Magro, social, uh, services. D, an attorney. Lauren, uh, mental health. Awesome. Awesome. Good stuff. Okay. Uh, so I’m so confident in this system that I literally used it on my brother who’s in his 50s and who isn’t techsavvy and he’s never made a video in his life. And first of all, for context, I use the system to start a new channel every single year. And the reason I do that is because I want to make sure that I’m updated on what the algorithm is like for a new channel. But last year, I decided, you know what? I’m just going to make a channel for my brother instead because he basically came to me and he said, “Shane, I’m 50 years old. My body’s starting to wear out, and I need to figure out how to make money without wearing out my body.” Now, he’s in the trades, right? and he thought I was going to recommend a remote job or some type of certification or some sort of cushy office job, something like that. And I was just like, “No, you should just start a YouTube channel.” And he was really surprised. He’s like, “Oh, well, I’m not tech-savvy. I’m not good on camera. I’ve never even made a video in my life. I’m in my 50s. No one wants to listen to a 50-year-old.” All these excuses started popping up in his head for why he couldn’t do it. And I just told him, “Just trust me, bro. Just do it. Just do what I tell you. Use our system and it’s going to work for you.” And the very first video that he posted blew up and got over 800,000 views. Less than one month later, 29 days later to be exact, he made $214 in a single day. That’s a $78,000 year run rate. So he went from zero to a full-time income in less than one month. So yeah, it works for beginners even with no tech experience. And by the way, update on Zach to finish out his first year on YouTube. He had an over $18,000 month. Plus, you know, he’s making money from other stuff besides uh just AdSense alone, affiliate commissions, etc., etc. So, he’s not just making money from AdSense. And that’s one thing that we’re going to talk about. AdSense is not the only monetization method on YouTube. There are lots of other ways where you can make more money. Sometimes you can make a hundred times more than what you make from AdSense. Now, this is also for you if you’re a faceless creator, you want to use YouTube automation, right? So, there’s a very specific type of faceless channel that we recommend if you want to go faceless. And I actually started off faceless myself, but this was many, many years ago. And typically, we do recommend actually showing your face. But either way, you can do a hybrid personal brand where you don’t show your face, uh, but it’s still a personal brand, and we’ll show you exactly how to do that. So, uh, by the way, type face or faceless in the chat, whichever one you prefer. I want to see how many of you are in each bucket. So, type face or faceless in the chat. Okay. All right. Got a good good mixture here. Good mixture here. A lot of people want to show their face. A lot of people would prefer to start off faceless. Uh both. Okay, got it. Uh yeah. Yeah, I’m seeing a really good mix. It looks like it’s like 50/50, maybe a little bit more on the face side, which is good. Okay, so let me give you an example of how to actually do this because we don’t recommend doing this in any other way. There there’s most ways that people recommend doing faceless content does not work at all. It’s probably going to get you banned or demonetized. even if it does work, it’s going to be very easy for other people to copy you and you’re going to be competing with people from like India or something, right? So, don’t do it in the way that 99% of people tell you to do it. Here’s a way to actually do it. So, here’s an example. Whiz was one of our clients. When Whiz first started his YouTube channel, it was a totally faceless channel and he actually scaled his business to seven figures a year just being faceless. Then, he did a face reveal and now he’s making multiple seven figures a year. Now the point is he said that almost all of his clients watched his YouTube channel and either directly or indirectly he got almost all of his clients from YouTube. So they might have originated from other sources but then they watched his YouTube channel and that’s what helped prospects make the decision to buy from him. Now he runs an agency and he did make the decision to reveal his face later on but he built his faceless channel in a very specific way where you can do that because again he used the hybrid personal brand method which means you have a lot of options in the future and we’ll get into how to do that later on. Okay. Um, so if you’re making a faceless or a YouTube automation channel, you need to listen to this. Okay? It’s very, very important that you do this the right way. Uh, if you don’t do it the right way, you know, you’re probably not going to have any success. Even if you do have success, you’re probably going to get banned or demonetized, which literally zero people in that we’ve ever worked with have ever gotten, you know, banned or demonetized. U, but even if you don’t get banned or demonetized, it’s going to be very easy for literally anybody in the world to copy you if you don’t do it the right way. Uh, so you got to do it this way. Okay. Um, yeah. So, if you don’t do it the right way, you’re going to have a ceiling in terms of how much money you can make, and you’re also not going to have options in the future. So, this is also for you if you’re a business owner, freelancer, or coach who wants inbound clients without paid ads. So, type clients in the chat if that’s you. Type clients if you want inbound clients without having to do paid ads. Let’s see.
Uh, al also agency owner, obviously, like anybody who gets clients. Okay, lot of people here want clients. Excellent. Excellent. Excellent. This works especially well with those types of business models. So, Heidi, Olivia, Chris, Brandon, Den, Virginia, Stan, Cameron, Chris, Ann, uh, Sakal, Chris, a lot of Chris’s today. David, Jesse, Tracy, Sean, Casey, Kirsten, Christopher, Sally, Christine, uh, Chris’s and Christines, uh, Jason, Kyle, Dan. Awesome. Okay. So, an example of that would be Davis. So, Davis actually had multiple different businesses. Um, and he had a portfolio of companies. So, Davis’s sales basically went up by 400% after working with us. And after working with me, he made over 100K per month with the business that we were working on specifically. And basically, Davis owned a portfolio of companies. And he was just uh he was spending about 20 hours a week on just one of his companies and one YouTube channel. Right? So, if you do YouTube the wrong way, you’re going to be spending tons of time doing stuff that does not matter. And that’s exactly what was happening with Davis. Um, and that’s obviously not sustainable, especially when you have multiple companies. But eventually, he outsourced everything on his channel to the point where he’s not even recording the videos anymore. So, he went from 20 hours a week to zero hours a week, right? He spends literally zero hours a week on his channel because he hired somebody else to record the videos for him. So, uh, and this is even though he has multiple channels and for multiple different companies and he’s spending zero hours a week on it. Now, we do typically recommend that you still record yourself because there’s just a lot of advantages to that. But especially if you’re a business owner, you can actually just hire somebody else to do the editing and all that stuff for you and you can get it down to as little as 2 hours a month doing that. We show you exactly how to build out that system. So, if you’re a business owner, you’re super busy, you’ve got a portfolio, you can actually have other people record the videos for you and you can just have a system that takes care of everything else with just two hours a month. That’s it. You record for 2 hours a month. Everything else gets taken care of. And we help people with that as well. This is also for you if you want to network so you can land high-paying jobs, find career opportunities, or become an authority in your niche by standing out with your YouTube channel. So, type authority in the chat if that’s you. If you want better opportunities or to become an authority in your niche, a lot of people don’t really understand the power of being an authority in your niche, right? It is unbelievably powerful. So, Billy understands it. Allan understands it. Ike, Matthew, Chad, Miriam, Phillip, Shawn, Kathleen, Chris, Roosevelt, Den, Jesse, Marian, uh Tammy. Okay, so let me give you a really good example of uh networking and becoming an authority. So Josh basically just started making really useful videos on his channel for people in the IT and cyber security industry. And he talked about how to get better jobs, which certifications are good to take, what skills to learn that are valuable in the job market, etc., etc. and he was able to go from making less than $1,000 a month with his channel to actually getting offers from Fortune50 companies, including companies that are a part of Fang, Facebook, Apple, Amazon, Netflix, and Google. And these are some of the biggest and most prestigious companies in the world where it is literally harder to get into a fang company than it is to get into Harvard or Yale. And usually you have to apply to these jobs, but the companies were reaching out to him. So he got an offer from several different fang companies and ended up going with one of them for his dream job where he got to travel the world. He lived in Japan. He was working a remote job making multiple six figures a year. But then the YouTube channel just kept going. 5,000 a month, 10,000 a month, 30,000 a month, and eventually he scaled it all the way to $186,000 a month using my strategies. And of course, he quit his dream job at that point because it just didn’t make sense for him uh in his life at that point. Right now, I like his example because it goes over every single stage. just getting started as a beginner using it to become an authority in his niche for networking or to get his dream job starting a side hustle making a little bit of money on the side starting a full-time business making 10 to 30k per month and then scaling his business right so he went through all five stages that we can help people with and the one that I want to highlight here is becoming an authority and networking because when like it’s very obvious the direct benefits of YouTube right the direct benefits are you can make a ton of money from it but the indirect benefits are probably even better right the intangible benefits. The ability to become an authority in your niche and network and have people know who you are. It’s been unbelievable opportunity for me. I’ve gotten opportunities to speak at masterminds uh that people typically uh have to pay $50,000 for. I got in for free. I’ve gotten opportunities to speak on stages uh that people usually don’t get opportunities for. I’ve I’ve gotten to meet people that I never would have gotten to meet. Even a bill I’ I’ve even met billionaires at this point, right? Um I’ve got to invest in a business. I be, you know, they they gave me equity in the business and I never would have uh gotten that opportunity if it wasn’t for my YouTube channel and I even got on their board of adviserss, right? All these things would have never happened if it wasn’t for my YouTube channel. So, the indirect benefits are arguably even more valuable than the direct benefits. But you might be thinking, Shane, if it’s that easy, then why do most people fail? Well, it’s because they believe in these myths. One, you need to be an influencer and, you know, do Tik Tok dances and weird stuff like that, right? You don’t. Two, you have to show your face and have a fancy camera and have perfect lighting and a perfect set and, you know, perfect editing, right? Three, it takes 40 hours to create one video. And four, you have to endure the process because it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube. And these are some of the biggest myths that people believe in that cause them to fail. Now, the last one specifically, the reason that most people think it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube is because they think that they need a big channel that has lots of subscribers and lots of views to make money. If you choose the right niche, you do not need a big channel. And guys, go ahead and type a the number of the myth that you believed in 1 2 3 or four in the chat, and I will look at the chat here in a little bit. Right, let’s let’s see here. Scroll down. All right. I’m seeing a lot of ones and uh a lot of fours. A lot of ones and a lot of fours. So, a lot of people are saying all of them as well. Uh okay. A lot of ones and a lot of fours. Good. Good. Good. Okay. Nice, nice. Yep. A lot of ones and a lot of fours. Okay. Uh but yeah, um good good to know that guys. And just as an example, when I started my second channel, Shane Humus, the content growth engine, we actually made over $30,000 in the first month starting that channel. We’re going to go over the exact numbers here in a little bit. And a lot of that money was made before we even got to 1,000 subscribers as well. So, these are the myths that people believe in that stopped them from having success on YouTube. But in reality, one of the biggest reasons that you failed is because before today, you lacked the leverage to invade the soon-to-be trillion dollar opportunity. and I’m going to help you mine this opportunity so that we can grow rich together fast. First though, who am I? My name is Shane. I’m an ex-harist. I have a 1.6 million subscriber YouTube channel. You can see it down here. And uh I’ve helped over 20 businesses get to 100K per month on YouTube from complete scratch, right? So, that they were making no money from the business and they were, you know, like not on YouTube at all. And I taught them how to start a business and get on YouTube and help them get to 100K per month. I’ve helped countless other people who already had businesses and they wanted to grow on YouTube or already had YouTube channels and they wanted to monetize it or they were just complete beginners and I helped them get to a full-time income or even just a uh like a second income uh on the side of their job, right? So, it’s probably triple that amount now, right? And I’m also industry recognized as an expert on growing and making money from YouTube for businesses, right? And treating YouTube like a business. Now, here’s a company that I worked with and they liked working with me so much course careers that I actually got equity in the company. That’s the one that I was talking about before because they gave that much value to the company and we were help able to help them over 30x the amount of money that they made. With that being said, this is a startup and I usually like to work with individuals and one of the reasons I like to work with individuals is because you guys remind me of myself. So, let’s go ahead and get into my story very quickly. This is me working as a pharmacist for 15 hour shifts during the pandemic. uh very burnt out. Um and before this I came from a very poor background. I lived in section 8 housing. I lived in trailer parks. I was even homeless at one point. Uh this is the exact Salvation Army that I lived in for about 6 months in Lawrence, Kansas. And uh I didn’t want to be poor anymore. So I did what society told me to do. I went to college. I got the highest level of college. I got a doctorate and I became a pharmacist. Right? So I had to take out a lot of money in student loan debt. I went over $300,000 in student loan debt to make this happen. And the thing is, when I was poor, I had a lot of time, but I didn’t have any money. And so, I couldn’t really do anything besides play video games, watch TV, or whatever, right? But when I became middle class working as a pharmacist, I didn’t have both time and money, right? Because I was spending all of my time working and all of my money paying down my student loan debt. And so, it’s kind of an out of the frying pan and into the fryer type moment. And it was really a terrible situation because I started as a pharmacist right before the pandemic hit. And just to emphasize how bad this was, we got robbed three times in a six-month period. So overall, I can’t describe how stressed out, how depressed, how anxious I was in this situation. And like many people out there, I started wondering, wait a minute, is the stuff that society told me to do actually good idea? Maybe I made a mistake. And this is the exact video of uh of us getting robbed uh one of the three times. And because of that, I tried just about every side hustle out there to make money. Shopify, drop shipping, Amazon FBA, SMMA, coaching, consulting, courses, digital products, real estate, white labeling, SEO, flipping websites, flipping physical products, etc., etc. Here’s one of them that I tried. It’s called the booty kit. I know, little bit embarrassing, right? But a little bit funny. Uh, but it’s basically an at home workout thing uh workout thing so that you can work out your booty while you’re at home, right? And I pretty much failed at almost all of them, right? I had a little bit of success here and there, but nothing sustainable. I couldn’t really make any of them sustainable. And a lot of it has to do with me having ADHD and just always trying a bunch of different things, kind of always having shiny object syndrome. But as you can see, my bank account was constantly very close to $0. But YouTube was different than all of these other side hustles. See, all the side hustles that I tried, they actually work, but they only work if you have traffic, aka views. If you don’t have views, it’s kind of like trying to sell something. uh without anybody knowing you exist. It’s like without having a store, right? If nobody knows you exist, it’s almost impossible for them to buy something from you and it’s almost impossible for you to sell something, right? And so I realized one that I really enjoyed YouTube, but two, I realized that I could make any of these other business models work if I just focused on YouTube and getting views. And because of that, I gave YouTube another shot. So, type views in the chat if that makes sense, right? None of the none of these work without views. Now remember, it’s not just any views, but it’s the right views. Okay, the right views is what you want. But type views in the chat cuz we already established that we know that we need to get the right views. Okay, awesome. Mario, Gina, Zelica, Bart, Jason, Kathy, Christopher, Kevin, Reena, Joel, Kathy, Rob, Joe, Paul, Heather, Jonathan, Margaret, Nancy, Lynn, Joel, uh, Satis. Awesome. Okay. And after I tried it again, you know, at that time I was basically living in a house full of seven guys to save money. And one of the guys I ended up meeting, uh, he basically moved from Lebanon and he was an immigrant and his name was Sam. And he started a wedding photography business and he barely even knew English, uh, when he first started the business. And he basically started this YouTube channel where he was making about 10 to$20,000 a month from less than 10,000 subscriber YouTube channel and his wedding photography business. He was basically he had to do this wedding photography business to make money because he couldn’t legally work as as like an employee. So he basically had to start a business. And uh he was doing wedding photography in Las Vegas and on the West Coast. And before this, you know, I’d even spent some time in LA. I’d met influencers that didn’t have any money. And I was like uh but they had a lot of views, right? So they had lots of views, lots of subscribers, but they didn’t have any money. That part needs to be fixed. And I was like, “How are you?” I was like, “Sam, how are you making so much money from YouTube even though you have a small channel?” And he showed me what a proper monetization method looks like. And he showed me how I can monetize a channel without having that many views. And he initially taught me how to make money from a small channel, like 10 to 20,000 subscribers. But I took it to the next level to the point where there are some channels that we work with that only have a few thousand subscribers and they’re making seven figures a year. I’m going to show you some examples later on because there are some niches where you’re talking to an affluent audience and you can get a couple hundred views and make over $10,000 from a video. Now, some people think that I’m exaggerating when I say you can get a couple hundred views and make $10,000 from a video. So, let me show you Carla, right? So, one of our clients, Carla, made a video uh from a small channel. She only has about 1500 subscribers or so. And she made a video that got a couple hundred views and it landed her a six-figure contract worth $106,000. And you can see it right here. Right. So, I’m not exaggerating when when I say this. In fact, I’m a lot of the time I I’m actually underexaggerating if anything. So, this is where I found the secret formula of YouTube success where everyone else was not talking about it. And so, basically, I started posting videos. And just to put this in perspective, I have gotten a lot of views, right? 6 million, 1.2 million, uh, 1.7 million, 4.3 million views. I know how to play the views game with the best of them. But this video right here, the most useless agrees, this was my first ever breakout video. And it got over 4 million views. But in its whole lifetime, it’s made about $30,000, about $31,000 from AdSense because it wasn’t making money outside of AdSense. And I’ve had several videos just last week, for instance, that got less than 10,000 views, but made $40 to $50,000 from all income streams. And there are several videos with less than 10,000 views that make as much or more than that video. Right? So, uh, this happens all the time. just last week for instance, you know, uh because listen, it is way easier for me to recreate this video right here. For me to make many, many types of videos that are like this than it is for me to recreate this video. It’s actually quite difficult to get 4.3 million views. And notice as well that this video got 4.3 million views and it was posted 6 years ago and it got and it made $31,000. This one got 8.8K views. It was posted 6 months ago and it made $48,000. So, by the time this video gets to the 6-year mark, it’s probably going to have made like uh double or maybe even triple the amount of money uh that this one has made, right? Or than how much it’s made right now. Okay? So, and this is because this video is just going to sit there um you know, you you make the video one time and it’s like a little soldier whose only goal is to go out, get you views, get you subscribers, and make you money for the rest of its life. And these videos do get views even years later, even over a decade later. We have a video that we posted 6 years ago, almost 7 years ago now, that it got us a client last year and it was a it was a six-figure client. And I have, you know, people that we’ve worked with in community that have been posting on YouTube for over 10 years and their old videos still get views, right? So, that is one of the beautiful things about this. This is as close to passive income as you’re possibly going to get. Passive income doesn’t really exist because you always have to work actively to make passive income, but this is as close to passive income as you can get when you actually post the videos. Now, um, yeah, that’s that’s really the secret, right? So, listen, it’s way easier for me to reproduce a video that got like 8,000 views and made $48,000 than it is for me to reproduce a video that got 4 million views but only made $30,000. So, tech more if you’d want to get less views but make more money. Okay? Because one other thing while while you guys are typing this is the truth is guys, there’s only so many eyeballs in the world, right? YouTube already has two billion monthly active users and there’s just only so many eyeballs in the world, right? And so, uh, you don’t want to play the game where you have to get millions of views a month to make a full-time income. You want to be playing a game where you’re solving a specific problem for a specific type of person, which we’re going to get into later on, so that you don’t have to get millions of views to make money, right? So, a lot of people type more. Allan, Penny, John, Miriam, uh, Sakal, uh, Fabian, John, Mike, David, uh, Kimberly, Rachel, Brenda, Daniel, Alberta, or Albert, Albert. Awesome. And just to show you guys proof, here’s how much I made about two plus years ago. So, this was uh, I believe three Septeers ago, I made about $283,000. So, we’re about to start September. So, this is, you know, just kind of showing you guys September for that reason, right? Then uh this last September uh or sorry, two Septeers ago, I made about $325,000. Then this last September, I made about $1 million. Okay? And I’m not trying to say this to make people jealous. I’m just showing you the receipts so that you know that I know what I’m talking about because there’s a lot of YouTube coaches out there that are just coaches, coaching coaches. They’ve never actually start a successful channel themselves. and they’re basically cosplaying as successful YouTubers and they’re teaching you how to be successful at YouTube when they’ve never actually started a successful YouTube channel or YouTube business outside of just teaching YouTube, right? But me, I actually started a successful YouTube channel before I started teaching other people how to do it. And the craziest thing is I did all of this while being able to travel the world and only having to work 4 hours a week. So here’s a picture of me in Tokyo at the famous Shabuya Crossing Square. Here’s a picture of me in Singapore. And then here’s me in the San Juan Islands just off of Vancouver, British Columbia, uh, Canada, right? And we were whale watching, orca watching specifically that day. And, uh, yeah, and the whole time I only had to work about 4 hours a week. Now, just to be very clear, I choose to work more than that sometimes because I genuinely enjoy YouTube and I enjoy helping people with YouTube. So, I choose to work more than that, but I only have to work 4 hours a week. And in many cases, I’ve actually gone as much as two months at a time without working at all. Okay? Spending zero hours on my business. So, I have an online business where I don’t have to have any inerson employees or anything like that. I can travel the world. I can do whatever I want. And my business just keeps going up and up. Um, now, by the way, guys, uh, type 4 hours if you want a business that only needs 4 hours a week. And I noticed that some people were asking if this is, uh, pre-recorded. It is not pre-recorded. Okay? Here’s a picture of me putting up uh, two fingers, three fingers, four fingers. like I I don’t know what else you want me to do. If you’re wondering why it says Monday, August 31st, it’s because I’m um on the opposite side of the world as you. I’m traveling right now, right? I’m I’m in Asian time zone right now. So, if that’s if that’s why you think it’s pre-recorded, it’s not. Um yeah, Kyle says it’s not recording. He’s been calling out names since the beginning. Yeah, it’s not pre-recorded. I understand why you guys think uh that, you know, there’s a lot of AI and a lot of, you know, shenanigans going on. We we don’t do pre-recorded uh live trainings, at least not at this time. If we did, we would tell you that it’s pre-recorded. Okay. Um so, yes, 4 hours. Charlie, an Oscar, Kathy, Barbara, D, Karen, Susan, uh Gabriella, Flo, uh Brandon, Michael, Nicole. Awesome. Good stuff. Good stuff. So, I reached out to Oh, yeah. So, so yeah, basically um uh something kept bothering me, right? Because I got the life that I dreamed of, but once in a while I would create a video and post it on YouTube and I was just, you know, telling people what I was doing and what was working for me with my particular type of channel, which was all about just helping people solve their problems. Because I was seeing YouTube advice online and I would watch it and I’d be like, hm, I don’t really think this works for most people. Maybe it would work for a gaming channel, but it wouldn’t work for most channels. And so I decided once every six months, once every year, I would post a video about what I was doing on YouTube and what was working for me. And every time I do that, I would get comments, emails, DMs. Everybody would be reaching out to me being like, “Hey Shane, can you coach me? Hey Shane, can you help me grow my YouTube channel?” And I turned them all down because I was just too busy or I just didn’t really want to do coaching. Or I thought maybe it works for my niche, but it doesn’t work for other people’s niches. So I turned them down, but I felt bad about it and I shrugged it off for years until one day I decided, you know what, I’m going to do it. So I I reached out to a bunch of those people who had reached out to me and I decided to do a cohort where I worked with a bunch of them and it was a very diverse set of people. There was a professional truck driver for 28 years, a fresh graduate engineering student, a current graduate engineering student, an Amazon FBA business owner, a coach, a freelancer, a failed YouTuber, a successful YouTuber who is crushing it but wanted to crush it harder, a content creator for 11 years who wanted to shift over to YouTube, a tech salesperson, a girl in cyber security, a coach, an agency owner, an online service provider, a fitness student to finance guy, a physical business owner, etc., etc., just on and on. The point is, they were all different. Some had YouTube experience, others had zero knowledge of how YouTube works. And then we applied the exact same format that I found to be working on my channel. So, same YouTube format, same proven way of making thumbnails, titles, and intros, same strategy for coming up with winning money video ideas. And of course, a little bit of tweaking because uh you know, every single niche is a little bit different. There are a lot of underlying principles, but they all do need a little bit of tweaking. And the crazy thing is every single one of them blew up. And the best part is they all got their version of rich by helping people live better lives. And that’s the thing that made me feel so happy because I can only have so much impact with my channel, but I got to help other people have impact with their channels. And so I was basically spreading my impact to so many other people. And then they were able to impact hundreds of millions with their YouTube channels, right? And they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives, right? And this is the moment that I realized that I had found my passion, right? I had actually found uh my reason for being on this planet because again I can only impact so many people with just one channel or even just with a handful of channels. There’s only so many, you know, videos I can record, but I can help other people impact like, you know, the millions of different niches that are out there and help people solve those problems, right? So, type impact in the chat if you want to have an impact, guys. Type impact in the chat. Okay?
Okay, I’m scrolling down. You guys are commenting so much it’s hard for me to scroll down fast. Okay. Um, James, Oliver, an Kenneth, Steven or Stefan, uh, Carrie, Karen, Romulo, uh, William, Nabila, Diane, Douglas, Darla, John, Raph, uh, Jeremiah, Den, Carmen, Charlie, Jack. Good stuff. Good stuff. Okay. So, um yeah.
Now, uh like I said before, they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives. And the reason for that is because I taught them how to make a very specific type of content, which is educational niche content. And the channels that are winning today are educational niche channels. In fact, educational channels make 10 to 20 times more money. And there are more opportunities for every 1,000 views than any other type of content. And in fact, in the first month that we launched my second channel, we were able to make about $1,736 per 1,000 views. So it got $24,000 views in the first month right off the bat and made about $42,000. So that’s $1,736 per 1,000 views. And to put that in perspective, entertainment channels in general make about $1 to $3 per 1,000 views. So if I had started an entertainment channel, I would have made somewhere between $24 to $73, right? So $1 to $3 per 1,000 views times $24,000 that’d be about $24 to $73. So definitely would not have been as good of a month, right, with entertainment content now. The next type of content is kind of like mass market education content, right? Typical typical education channel. So this would be something like Mark Robber, Veritasium, something like that, right? And that type of channel is 10 times better than entertainment still, right? So, that type of channel makes about 10 times more money, about $20 per 1,000 views. And so, if you do that $20, that would be $24,000 views times $20. That would have been about $484 in that first month with the same amount of views. Now, that’s a heck of a lot better, but it’s still not a full-time income, and it’s it’s barely even a side hustle, right, at that point with $484. But with my niche authority channel, 24,000 views, $1,736 per 10,000 views, and it made $42,000 in the first month. Now, just to be clear, we actually got this channel to about $4,000 per 1,000 views. So, this was just the first month. Um, you know, right off the bat, it’s, you know, it’s going to get a little bit less, but we got it to about $4,000 per 1,000 views. And we have clients that are doing $10,000 per 1,000 views. We even have clients that are doing $30,000 per 1,000 views. It does depend on your niche and like how, you know, how small it is, for instance, and and how big the problem is that you’re helping them with, right? And so, yeah, with education content, right off the bat, you’re making about 10 times more money than entertainment content. But there’s a better type of educational content, which is niche educational content, where you are properly monetizing your channel. Now, you can do mass market education channel and properly monetize your content. You can still make a heck of a lot more money than this. For instance, on my main channel, Shane Hummus, I kind of just make whatever I want on that channel, right? I don’t necessarily, you know, I started off niche, uh, which is something you absolutely should do, but at some point when I got enough subscribers, I just pivoted and I evolved and I just kind of make whatever content I want. I probably would make more money if I just talked about one thing, but at this point, it’s not about the money. It’s about, you know, doing whatever I want and helping people, right? So, that channel makes more or less about $400 per 1,000 views on average. So, it still makes a ton of money, but you can make way more money if you do niche educational content. That’s what I recommend that people start off with is just talking about a very niche subject and doing that first. And I’m going to get into that here in a moment because you don’t always have to stay with a niche subject if you set up your channel with the hybrid personal brand method, which is something that we’ll talk about here in a bit. So, let me give you some examples of niche educational content and the power of this type of content. So, this is the organic chemistry tutor. He makes about $ 36 to $100,000 a month on this channel just from AdSense alone according to views. Okay, so that’s just from AdSense alone. Now, if you do that, $10 to $20 per 10,000 views. Now, just to be clear, guys, AdSense, just so everybody knows, AdSense are the ads that pop up on a channel and you as the creator get paid 55% of the revenue from those ads. Just just to be clear, just in case people don’t know. Okay, so he’s making $36 to $100,000 a month just from AdSense alone. But AdSense is a very very small slice of the total monetization pie. There’s other ways where you can make way more money than what you can make from AdSense. So again, just applying that, you know, $20 per 1,000 views, in fact, let’s be conservative and say $10 to $20 per 1,000 views. Uh if he was making $10 per 1,000 views, he’d be making about $136,000 a month. And $20 per 1,000 views, he’d be making $273,000 a month. So the coolest thing about all of this is that he hadn’t posted a video in 62 days and 16 hours at the time that we took this screenshot, right? So he basically posts a video like once every two months. Sometimes he goes like 5 months at a time without even posting a video. And that is because he has been uploading these videos for a very long time and he has a catalog of videos and he is earning passive income from those videos. So each video like I said before is like a little soldier that just goes out and makes him money forever. It’s basically like buying a little piece of digital real estate. And whenever somebody looks up something related to organic chemistry or chemistry or just tutoring in general, one of his videos are likely going to pop up and he’s going to get that view and he’s going to make money from it, right? Which is absolutely insane. So, like I said before, there is no such thing as passive income. It doesn’t exist, but this is the closest that you’re going to get to passive income because obviously you have to actively make the videos first, but then once you have a big portfolio of videos, uh they’re going to uh be passively making you money for a very long time. Now, here’s another one. Scotty Kilmer. He’s in his 70s and he’s been making content uh helping people save money on their cars for a long time now. One thing that’s great about him, he is quite entertaining. So, when I say that you should make educational content, I am not saying by any means that you cannot be entertaining, right? You could definitely be entertaining. Scotty Kilmer is hilarious if you’ve ever watched him, right? But he basically made $24 million from YouTube, right? This is an article where a news station interviewed him and he made $24 million from YouTube. And he said that he made more money from YouTube in one month than he saved in 40 years as a mechanic. Okay. Uh and uh basically what he does is he just helps people pick the right cars, maintain their cars, fix their cars, and help with the different car related products and services. And that’s his whole channel. And basically this stuff is dead simple for him. Okay? And that’s one thing that I want to point out with the organic chemistry tutor as well. This stuff is dead simple for him. He is just talking about stuff that he was already tutoring people on and he did the same thing but he recorded it with a camera and he posted it online. Now this is the craziest story of all. Physics Walla he came from a small village in India and his first videos were in his parents’ basement and you can see how bad they are. Blurred face looks like it was recorded with a potato. The lighting is really bad. You can’t even see the whiteboard etc etc. But it didn’t matter. He started making these videos about these standardized tests in India and the standardized tests are incredibly important for your future. It’s kind of like the ACT and the SAT in the US. And he just made videos about these certifications and these standardized tests. And at first he was just talking about physics. And then he expanded to other stuff. So let’s just put this in perspective how specific this is. Physics India standardized tests only. Very specific how he was tutoring people. And he started making these videos and he kept going. And then he launched a company that’s now worth $5.2 billion from his YouTube channel called Physics Wallup. So it’s an educational app and it’s now worth $5.2 billion. And it all started in his parents’ basement just making physics videos. And he is probably richer than Mr. Beast. Mr. Beast has actually gone on record saying that he actually loses money uh from his uh YouTube channel, right? Because he’s basically just trying to get as many views as possible. Uh so, you know, Mr. Beast’s companies may have a high valuation, but it would also be very difficult for him to actually sell those companies because they’re so tied to his personal brand because he makes entertainment content. Whereas when you make educational content, you can actually sell the companies tied to your personal brand because at the end of the day, you’re just helping people solve problems. And so you you can make a company that helps them solve that problem. Then you can sell that company, right? Whereas people would not be buying, you know, the feastables if it wasn’t for Mr. Beast. You know what I mean? And that is the power of educational content because you are solving people’s problems. So type no excuses in the chat. If physics wallet just killed your my setup isn’t good enough excuse, right? because he started with an absolute potato of a camera in India in his parents’ basement. Um, and he started a $5.2 billion company from that. Right now, of course, I know that most people here are not going to want to start a $5.2 billion company. This is an outlier example. Uh, but I’m going to show you a bunch of much more like achievable examples later on. So, no excuses. Jamie, Jason, Mike, Ria, Michael, Jana, uh, Living Scroll Enterprises, uh, Kim, Colton, Stan, Cameron, Joel, Doc, Robin, Kristen, Heather, Chris, uh, Devin, Larry, Daniel, David, David, Mark. Awesome. Good stuff, guys. Good stuff. Okay, so now I’m going to hand you the formula for how to do all of this. And there is a secret formula. And these are the most important things. So, if I don’t talk about it, it’s probably because it’s not important. With that being said, I will be answering questions at the end if you have any more questions. So, type formula in the chat if you want the formula. Okay. Take a little drink of coffee while you guys are typing.
Okay. Linen Cloth, Chip, Daniel, uh, John, Patrick, Jonathan, uh, Al, Miles, Sherry, Jason, Patricia, Cameron, Shara, Sherah. Awesome. I try to get the names right, guys. If I get them wrong, I do apologize. I do my best. So, first thing is you need a niche hypothesis statement. Now, generally speaking, there are three overall like kind of big niches out there um that are the most profitable niches, okay? And that is health, wealth, and relationships. Okay, with that being said, there’s a lot of other niches outside of that. And you can make money in all of those niches as well. But generally speaking, if you’re confused about what niche to go into, you should be looking into health, wealth, or relationships. And the reason for that is because almost everybody in the entire world has a problem in one or more of those three areas. And then you need to go ahead and make what’s known as a niche hypothesis statement. So what you want to do is you want to pick a niche. And by the way, guys, while we’re doing this, go ahead and comment what you think your niche is, right? Just comment your niche in the comment section. Try not to say health, wealth or relationships. Um, try to try to go down from that if possible. Yeah, like finance or something like that. Perfect. Perfect. Uh, hobbyist singers. I have no idea. Being kind formula. Uh, Sakal says wealth. Uh, Favor says money. Jamal, finance. Chris, sales. Kevin, tech. Uh, Jason, no idea. Verta grief. Nancy listening to Melissa don’t know. Andrew automotive. You fitness. Jillian, mine hits all three. Uh, FNU, health. Rachel, food science. Uh, Sio DK. Mike AI. Amber, no idea or plan yet. Noah DNA. John, real estate. Scott, human performance. Chris Santaore. That’s okay. That’s a I haven’t heard that one before, Chris. That’s a good one. Uh, Doc, sabotaging uh self-sabotage. Tracy, WordPress development. Stan, food service, Mark. Lyall, wealth. Okay. Uh, and I know a lot of you are probably going to end up saying one or two word answers when you comment to your niche, which is exactly what happened. But, and I don’t blame you for that, okay? But that’s incorrect. And let me show you why. The niche hypothesis statement goes like this. You select a market or what would uh a lot of people would traditionally call a niche, but I like to call it a market. And then you pick one specific problem that that market has. And you need to pick a specific problem, right? because they might have 20 different problems or 200 or 2,000 different problems, but you don’t want to solve all of their problems, right? That’s what a lot of people try to do and that’s one of the reasons why their YouTube channels and their businesses fail. Okay? So, you just want to solve one big problem for them. Okay? Particularly a painful problem if possible. Okay? So, you pick one problem that the market has, right? So, the market is X. The problem is going to be Y. And then you find a solution for that problem. Okay? And that is going to be your niche. So, it’s going to look like this. I help X do Y or I help X overcome Y. And the Z part, don’t even worry about that right now. Z is something that we can do later on. But the important part is that you establish that there’s a market of people and they have a problem that isn’t being solved very well. Okay? And you’re going to help them solve that problem. And that is the foundation of how markets work. Markets are all about solving problems efficiently. And if you want to give value and receive money by giving that value, then you really just want to focus on solving as many problems for people in your market as possible, which is what YouTube allows you to do in mass. So, type understand if you understand why a one-word niche or a two or three-word niche isn’t a niche. You need a market of people and a specific problem that you’re helping that market solve. Type understand in the chat if you understand that.
Gotta open up more.
Okay. Okay, that’s good. Raph, understand. Graham, understand. Leslie, Lynen, Cloth, Allan, FNU, Brianna, Ken, uh, Lyall, Gabriella, Sil, uh, May, Michael, Alia, Pete, Lynn, Charles, Margaret. Okay. Awesome. Awesome. Okay. Okay. So, let me give you a few examples of how to do this. Now, I’m going to use the accounting market specifically, uh, because for some reason, I’ve worked with so many accountants, okay? Um, so I’m going to use the accounting market, right? So, I’m going to show you a bunch of different levels. And all these people, by the way, are either people that are my clients, I’ve worked with them, or they’re business owners that I’ve met that are crushing it on YouTube. So, at the very first level is just teaching students basic accounting concepts. So, that’s more of a mass market channel, but it’s teaching people basic accounting concepts. So, it’s kind of like the organic chemistry tutor, but for accounting. Okay, so this person is making really good money, probably pretty close to seven figures a year, and they’ve been doing it for a very long time, and they’re making really good money. And people who are interested in this market might be interested in a video like what is a P&L? Now, let’s go to the second level, which is accounting specifically for existing accounting students or someone who just graduated with an accounting degree. So, they got an accounting degree and they are trying to pass standardized tests or pass certifications. So, that would be like physics walla for accounting, right? because he was helping people pass standardized tests and certifications. So, physics swallow but for accounting and in the US typically instead of India. Uh so that’s the second one and I know for a fact that this niche is making multiple seven figures a year and people who are in this market would be interested in a video like how to become a CPA. Now by the way guys I’m going to go over five. I could do 50. I could do 500. I might be able to do 5,000 just in the accounting market alone, but I’m going over these five just for the sake of time and also because I literally have met every single one of these people, right? Okay. So, third level, helping people land their first ever entry-level accounting job. And that’s another business owner that I know and they are making multiple seven figures a year. Okay. So, who’s in the market there? People who just graduated with an accounting degree and they’re trying to get their first ever entry-level job. That’s the market. And that is different than all of these other ones, right? It’s totally different content than all these other ones. People who are trying to refresh their knowledge in accounting do not necessarily want to get an accounting job, right? So, it’s totally different content and people who are in this market would be interested in video like how to land a bookkeeping job. Then we’ve got the fourth level which is the people who are already accountants and they’re making $50 to $100,000 per year and they want to become what’s known as a financial controller. Now, this is one of my clients as well. He helps people who are already accountants making 50 to $100,000 per year become a financial controller who can make 200 or even up to $300,000 a year. So totally different types of content when you’re targeting that audience, right? These this is a pretty sophisticated audience and they’re already accountants. And so people who are in this market might be interested in a video like how to become a financial controller or what are the highest paying finance and accounting jobs etc etc. And then finally the fifth level which is basically helping businesses hire accountants. So hiring and placing accountants in businesses. So in that particular case it’s either accounting businesses or big businesses that need accountants and they are actually trying to hire or place really good accountants uh in their business. So even though you’re talking about accounting topics, it’s still a completely different audience and the type of content that you’re going to make is going to be completely different for all those different ones. Right? So, I hope you understand why it’s so important to have a niche hypothesis statement, even though it’s all the same niche, right? It’s all the accounting niche, right? Because if I would have asked you before you watched this, before I taught you this, uh, if you were in one of those niches, hey, what’s your niche? You probably would have said, oh, it’s accounting, right? Just like all these people, for instance, that commented their niche, they probably said something relatively short like plants education or marriage relationship or teaching, etc. And that’s why you need to have a niche hypothesis statement. If you don’t know your niche hypothesis statement, you have lost from the beginning. It is so important to have a proper niche hypothesis statement. Now, did you find that valuable? Give a thumbs up if you thought that was valuable and type value in the chat, right? And do it especially if you want the niche validator GPT that we’re giving out here in a short while. That’s going to help you find your niche hypothesis statement. Okay. Awesome. Awesome. See lots of thumbs up. Let me scroll down here. Takes me a while to scroll down. Uh, awesome. Value, value, value. Philip, Kevin, Gabriella, Salvador, KY, Sylvia, Roosevelt, Suzanne, Timothy, Kit, John, Joshua, Sarah, Michael, uh, Jamie, Darla, Cara, uh, Becky, Margaret, Chris, uh, Robert, good stuff. Karen, awesome. Okay, so now I’m going to be handing you the blue pill to make you invincible as a creator because once you have your niche down, you’re already better than most people. But you need more than that, okay? you need what’s known as a hybrid personal brand because you probably know what personal branding is. But when you mix personal branding with the correct niche and our YouTube automation AI system, you’re going to have what’s known as a hybrid personal brand. Now, one thing you need to understand is I just told you that you have to have a niche hypothesis statement. But I’m going to say something that’s probably going to confuse you a little bit, and that is you are the niche. So many people get this wrong. They think their niche is what makes them successful as an educational channel content creator. But when you have a hybrid personal brand, you are the niche. So yes, you are going to start extremely niche with the iHel X2Y. But once you get traction, when you build your channel in the correct way where you’re building a hybrid personal brand, you can then easily pivot to something else. So type I am the niche in the chat if you get it. Hey, I am the niche. Right? You’re going to start off niche, but you’re going to build your channel in such a way where you can easily pivot to something else later on down the line. Susan knows that I am the niche. Sean, Jason, Marian, John, Raul, uh, Nick, Mike, Brandon, Kathy, uh, Nablia, Cassandra, Desiree, Penny, Miriam, Beverly, Billy, Lynn, Brian, Raina, Doc, Andrew. Good stuff. Okay, so let me show you an example. Alex Ramoszi. A lot of you probably know who Alexi is. When he first started posting on YouTube about four or five years ago, his niche hypothesis statement was, I help gyms do marketing and sales, right? And now he could talk about anything. Now obviously he’s really well known for his business stuff with all the different types of businesses, but now he can talk about his unconventional diet. This is why you’re not happy. He talks about his book launches. He talks about how to stop wasting time. And yeah, I mean now he can talk about just about anything that he wants. But he started niche. And if he tried to talk about anything that he wanted from the very beginning, he probably wouldn’t have had nearly as much success as he has right now. He started off being the king of a puddle. Then he became the king of a small pond. Then the king of a lake and then a river and then the sea and then the ocean, right? And you want to start off as the king or queen of a small uh pond first or a small puddle first. Okay? You got to start small. You need to start niche, but don’t make your channel in such a way where you can’t expand it. And that’s how we teach people to do it with the hybrid personal brand method. And if you look at almost all of the biggest educational YouTubers in the world, they almost all started niche. So the big mistake that people make is they try to copy the big educational YouTubers not knowing that they did that after they started off niche. They expanded after they started off being the king or queen of a small puddle. Right? So this is how we teach people to do it with the hybrid personal brand method. Because when you create a hybrid personal brand, there are so many different ways you can monetize your channel and there’s so many different directions that you can go both in terms of the content and the topics as well as how you actually make money with your channel. So, AdSense, affiliate marketing, sponsorships, job opportunities, networking, memberships, SAS, high ticket offers. Alex Roszi open up basically like an investment fund, right? He has a portfolio of companies that he invests in and he gets his deal flow from YouTube. So, he’s making money from eight and nine figure business owners and making millions of dollars from each one all the way down to doing a SAS that costs a few dollars a month. You can do memberships, you can do courses, digital products, and so many other things, even physical products, right? The point is all of these different business models work when you have a hybrid personal brand traffic and you have distribution. Uh people that actually know, like, and trust you watching your YouTube channel because you built it with the hybrid personal brand method and you’ve helped them solve a bunch of their problems so they see you as an authority. And not only that, you can even sell the brand or step down as the face of the brand in some cases. So comment which one is your favorite by the way out of all of these different ways of monetizing. Which one is your favorite? Comment that in the chat. AdSense, affiliate marketing, sponsorships, job opportunities, memberships or SAS, and high ticket offers. I’m curious. Let’s see. Okay, I see a uh AdSense, all I see a lot of all AdSense, and that’s actually really smart. You can actually stack different monetization opportunities, which is exactly what we do as well. Um, but you know, usually you’ll start off with probably just one or two of them. Uh, AdSense, AdSense, high ticket offer, AdSense, sponsorships, all affiliate marketing, high ticket offers, affiliate, AdSense, SAS, AdSense, um, sponsorships. Jason, uh, says, “Don’t know.” Andrew, AdSense, Sherah, have no idea. Kimberly, all Cara, job opportunities. Uh, Zengian AdSense. Marcus, all of them. Kirsten, membership. Brett, sponsorships. John, no idea. Claire, SAS, Verta, sponsorship. Anthony AdSense, Daniel all Larry all, uh, Al all, u, Daniel Job Ops. Okay, very cool. Very cool. All right, so let me just give you an example of that. So Doug Demiro uh, launched this website called carsandbids.com. Now, if you don’t know who he is, he’s basically a big car reviewer on YouTube. He’s been doing it for like well over 10 years now. And during the pandemic, uh, no, before the pandemic, everybody when they wanted to go to a car auction, they would just go to a in-person car auction, right? But during, uh, and so online car auctions were barely even a thing. I mean, there’s like a tiny percentage of people that were doing it, but it barely even a thing. I mean, most people wanted to actually see the car before they buy it, right? But during the pandemic, you couldn’t go to in-person car auctions. And so, what Doug Demiro did is he launched this website called carsandbids.com. And then he launched it from his YouTube channel, of course, and then he ended up selling the website for $80 million. Okay? And the reason he was able to do that is because of the fact that he built his channel with the hybrid personal brand method. Do you think that Doug Demiro when he first started this channel knew that his big break, the big thing that was going to make him $80 million was a online car auction website? Of course he didn’t. He had no idea that was going to be the big break, right? So this is a secret way of building your channel that makes it so much easier to take advantage of opportunities in the future and to do whatever you want to do in the future because none of us can predict the future, right? But what we can do is build a channel that can evolve as things change over time. Uh as the market evolves, as the ways that you make money evolve, as you evolve as a human being, right? You want your channel to be able to evolve with you because you might have different interests 5 years from now than you do right now. You might be more lifestyle focused 5 years from now than you are right now. You want your channel and your business to be able to grow and evolve as you evolve, right? So, you can build a channel that can do that so that it has the ultimate advantage, which is it can evolve as the market changes, right? Can it can adapt to changing circumstances. And just a kind of a quick note on this, one of the biggest reasons that businesses fail historically is because of the fact that they simply just can’t adapt. That’s it. But with a YouTube channel, it’s one of the very rare and very few types of businesses that can adapt to anything that uh that happens in the market, right? If you build it the right way, only if you build it with the hybrid personal brand method. So, it’s basically invincible. It’s going to be one of those animals that is just very adaptable and it’s around for like 400 million years like sharks, crocodiles, and you know, human beings are very adaptable as well. And if you think this only applies to big educational channels, well, you’re just wrong. Here’s some examples of our clients. This worked for WE. So Waqen was 18 years old when he first started working with him and he was a freshman in college and he was making all kinds of random content on study skills, productivity content, all kinds of different stuff like that and he was making content on engineering as well because he was basically a business and engineering double major. So he was very busy but he wasn’t really making any money, right? And we basically sat down, we hashed out his niche, we made his niche hypothesis statement and it became very clear that he should help foreign exchange students get into elite universities in the US. Why? because he was a foreign exchange student that got into an elite university in the US. So, we really dialed in his offer and the very first month that he launched or very close to the very first month, he made about $80,000. Okay? So, he actually got so many client requests that he was oversubscribed. He had to stop making YouTube videos and weightless customers trying to buy his program because he just had too many people who wanted to work with him immediately. So, this is a pretty good place to be as an 18-year-old business owner, right? and we joked around that he was making more money than the president of his university, which he was, which is pretty crazy to think about as a freshman in college, as a teenager. Now, here’s another example. Richard, we helped him go from making almost no money whatsoever on YouTube and also being one of the busiest clients I’ve ever worked with. He was a product manager at a Fortune50 company and he was basically working like 60, 80 hours a week. He had a brand new baby. He had lots of investments like real estate, investment, properties, etc., etc. Just very, very busy guy, right? All kinds of different stuff like that. Just very busy guy. and he was basically able to grow his channel to $12,000 in a single month despite the fact that he could only work about two hours a month. So yeah, I’m very proud of this case study because it was quite difficult to get him results because he could only work a couple hours a month. Um but yeah, we we made it happen, right? Cuz this system is built for that. It’s really amazing. Now, type 2 hours in the chat if you can find two hours a month to do this. So type two hours in the chat. Now, we typically do recommend for the average person to set aside about 4 hours a week, but in extreme circumstances, you can make it work even with 2 hours a month. It did take him a few months, though. Okay, a lot of people typed in two hours. Tracy, Brandy, Joel, Kathleen, Dave, Daniel, uh, Misty, Susan, Raul, Beverly, uh, Zulica, uh, Raina, John, Sherry, Leah, Sakal, Wendy, Mike, Virginia, Scott. Awesome. Here’s another example. guy. Now, this one is a really cool story. So, Guy is actually disabled and his goal before he worked with us was just to make a couple extra thousand a month. Basically, one to $2,000 extra dollars a month because he’s close to retirement and that would significantly improve his quality of life. It would basically make it to where he doesn’t have to worry about going out to dinner. Uh he could do trips and it would significantly improve his quality of life during retirement. So, he’s disabled and he has what’s known as tenitus, which is constant ringing in the ears. And this is something that a lot of veterans have. My dad has it as well. He’s a veteran and it is very debilitating, right? And so he made this channel where his goal was just to make a couple extra thousand dollars a month in retirement and to help other people who have tenitus. So life gave him lemons with with tenitus, but he turned those lemons into lemonade. And he was able to make about $1,500 a month with less than 500 subscribers, 446 to be exact. And this was a brand deal for $1,500 a month. So he’s now getting close to like 10,000 subscribers. So he’s crushing it now. He’s making way more money than that. But the whole point is before he even got to 500 subscribers, never mind a,000 subscribers, he was already making uh he already met his goal. He was already making1 to $2,000 a month, $1,500 a month to be exact, right? So, if you don’t think that you can make money with a small channel, you absolutely can. And uh he did it right. And he did it by which is amazing. Literally just turning his disability into a way to help other people and make money. So, one simple rule, guys, to make this happen, start simple and scale fast. You do not need to show your face all the time if you don’t want to. A fancy camera, fancy editing, a million-dollar studio, high production quality, or top tier video editing skills. And you definitely do not need to make highly entertaining content. Here’s what you do need, and these are the most important things by far. Viral video ideas. This is the most important thing after dialing in your niche, of course. Um, and when I say viral video ideas, I’m talking about getting the right views, not just lots of views, but the right views. Um, then you need titles and thumbnails to get clicks. Then you need an effective intro for video retention. And then you need to just deliver value to your audience. And that is a lot easier to do than you think. Now, let’s talk about the most important out of all those things, and that is the viral video ideas. So, I got this from Carl Icon. He’s in the finance industry, and basically, he would find businesses that were making a ton of money despite being ran terribly. And I took that idea from the finance industry because I think some of the smartest people in the world work in finance and I applied it to YouTube. So, type I can’t icon in the chat if you want to know more about the icon method. I a see how many people spell it right. Okay, we got had a few people see uh say I I n um and I as well. It’s all good though. Uh, Mike, John, Misty, Sean, Chris, Doc, Mark, Marian, Nick, Graham, Michael, Ryan, Glenn, Lisa, Andrew, Joel, uh, Kathy, Sylvia, Mark, Wendy, Jesse, uh, Brandon. Okay, very cool. All right, let’s let’s learn the icon method. So, I was the first person to ever do this, right? So, what I did is I found YouTube videos that had a lot of views despite not having that many subscribers. And that’s important, okay? It’s important that they don’t have that many subscribers, okay? Because if they have a big channel, they have a big audience and that audience is going to watch anything that they put out, right? So, they had a lot of views despite having a small channel and despite the video itself being either mediocre or preferably bad. Okay, that’s also very important. You don’t want the video to be some kind of masterpiece. So, just as an example, this guy right here, you can see his face is blurry. The door is in better focus in the background than his face is. Uh, it looks like it was recorded with a potato. both the audio and the video. The audio is not very uh good as well. And he was drunkenly ranting for 25 minutes about college degrees. And yet the video got 760,000 views even though he had a tiny channel. In fact, he probably got most of these subscribers, these 10,000 subscribers from this exact video. Right? So, and even though the video was objectively bad. Okay, so this was the thumbnail, by the way. This it’s just a still shot from the video. That’s obviously not good, right? Then what you do is you steal the idea of the video and you make a better version of the video. So the worst the most worthless college majors, you could just change the keyword a bit or just keep the same keyword and boom, the most useless degrees. That’s what I did. The point is you just keep the title very similar. It needs to have the same value proposition as the original video. You change it slightly, make a better video, and boom, that’s what happens. So I made a better video with almost the same title, right? The most useless degrees versus the most worthless college majors, very similar. I made a better thumbnail, a better video, and it blew up and got millions of views. And this is what I’ve been doing now for the last 6 years now, guys. This is my secret. The icon method is the most powerful way to do it. Now, there’s a bit more to it than that, but that is the gist. So, once you get these down and you join our program, finding video ideas will never be an issue for you ever again. And once you get this down, giving the value, quite literally, your videos will do all the work for you. So, type nice in the chat. If you thought the icon method was valuable, type nice in the chat. Nice. Lara, Jennifer, Susan, Sharon, Ann, Stephanie, T, Tracy, Stephanie, Penny, Charles, Heather, Tina, Leslie, Brett, Christy, Daniel, Douglas, Gabriel, uh, Sherry, Larry, uh, Al, Sarah, Jenna, AK, Awesome. Now, let’s talk about what it takes for you to be a part of this YouTube gold mine. Type ready in the chat if you’re ready to hear what it takes. Type ready in the chat. All right. Raul, Miriam, Joel, Olivia, 7, Alexis, uh, with an S, Michael, Desiree, Ray, Sylvia, Mario, Jason, Mike, Gabriel, Jonathan, Stan, Joel, uh, David, uh, Gary, Jerry, Forest, Sean, Miguel. Awesome. and specifically uh make this happen with no daily uploads if you don’t want to, no complicated editing, without having to show your face all the time, with no expensive gear or software, no burnout or guesswork, no algorithm chasing, and no spending months without making money. Instead, you’ll get an on-demand content plan tailored to you, a hybrid model that works with or without your face, proven video templates, plus AI assisted scripts, automated systems for publishing and repurposing, a one day per month content workflow, scalable monetization from day one, and top tier coaching behind sevenigure YouTube brands. Introducing the content growth engine. This is the easiest and fastest way to grow a cash printing YouTube channel, even if you’re not an influencer. So, click the link in the chat to get access to this early because there’s a few bonuses that we’re only giving to people who get this early access to and you will have a higher chance of getting the bonuses if you actually book a call now. Or you can type in go.shenhemis.com uh/coaching or scan the QR code with your phone. So, here’s what you’re going to get access to instead of cg. And by the way, guys, we’re going to go over these bonuses right here. Um, uh, if you know somebody who’d be great at this, um,
yeah. So, we’re going to go over these bonuses right here. We we’ll talk about that here in a minute, but if you know somebody who’d be great at this, share this with them, your cousin, a family member, a friend, uh, and you’ll get all these bonuses as well as them. Uh, but some of them you don’t even need to join the program to get. So, send them this link and because we teach them how to do it right away instead of spinning their wheels for years. And we’ve literally had two sisters join, for instance. And I just interviewed one of them last week. Farah and her other sister. We’re probably going to be interviewing her as well because we literally got both sisters great results and they’re both making pretty close to full-time incomes. One of them’s definitely full-time income. The other one is uh uh very close and it’s because one of them saw it and they sent it to the other one. So yeah, send this to them as well. And by the way, who is booking a call right now? Go ahead and comment in the chat if you’re booking a call because we have a special bonus for you. And also, you guys should only book one call, right? one person, one email, and one call. Okay, booking two doesn’t get you anything extra. The bonuses are tied to you, not how many calls that you book. And a uh second booking does is take a all the second booking does is take a slot away from someone else here on this workshop. And we almost always run out of slots. So, please don’t do that. And our team cancels duplications anyways. So, you might even lose the time that you actually wanted. So, if you accidentally booked twice, keep the time that you like and cancel the other one. Okay. Now guys, the last time we did this, we were fully booked and we couldn’t open up more slots even if we wanted to. So I suggest you book now while you can because once I drop these bonuses, people just swarm the calendar. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Now, first we are going to help you pick a profitable niche. We have a bunch of YouTube coaches with 100K subscriber plaques, the absolute best of the best that will help you find and pick the best niche. And that niche will be in between being the most profitable one uh where it’s sustainable, it’s profitable, but also something that you’re passionate about. Okay? Because we want something like passion is a part of being sustainable, right? Because you don’t want to do something that you’re hating because if you’re if you hate making the content, you’re not going to be able to maintain it. So something that you’re also passionate about. Next is the mindset section. So you might be having a hard time starting even though you know that you just have to make videos consistently to be successful on YouTube. And I get it, it sounds easy, but it’s hard to put your mind into making videos or having success on YouTube. And you probably would have started YouTube already or you would have had success on YouTube already if it was that easy, right? Even business owners face mindset issues. And this module helps with that, right? Uh this helps remove all the overthinking, all the imposter syndrome, and it helps you take action fast. And this is actually when I ask people, these first two are usually their favorite modules. And the niche selection, people are just obsessed with that one. But also the mindset section, right? Even though a lot of people don’t really think that they need the core foundations, uh, another thing that I’ll say about this is it’s going to help you understand that if you follow our system, success is inevitable. Right? If you follow the system, you will understand that when you go through this on a deep, logical, emotional, almost on a spiritual level, that if you follow the system, success is inevitable. For some people, like my brother, it was his very first video that he posted. For some people, it takes 5, 10, 15, 20 plus videos. But if you follow the system, success is inevitable. And you will understand that on a logical level when you go through this module. Number three, the content genesis system. This shows you how to find viral video ideas in your niche that will have a higher chance of getting views and going viral. And in my opinion, this is my favorite module because I think this is the most valuable one out of all of them. This is where the secret is right here. Finding the right video ideas. And guys, I just got word um the slots are almost gone. We only have a few left already. So I think we had a uh let me look. We had 37 spots open and we’ve already had 51 people submit. Okay, so so yeah, go to gosh.com/coaching. Click the link in the chat right now uh to secure your spot. Don’t wait on this. Next is the holy trifecta. This is where we go over how you can make your thumbnails, your titles, and your intros to package the viral video idea to have the highest chances of success for your video to get views. So all three need to be good. That’s important. But more importantly than that, they also need to be congruent with each other. They It’s kind of like an arrow, right? If all three are good, but they’re pointing in different directions, well, you’re not going to make any progress, right? But if all three are decent and they’re pointing in the same direction, you’re going to make way more progress. So, they need to be congruent with each other. And that’s something that a lot of people mess up on. Next is the script writing alchemy system where we help you write scripts with the help of AI to get your writing time down to less than 1 hour per video or in many cases way less than that. So, just as an example, my brother, who got his video to 800,000 views, his very first video, uh, only spent about 15 minutes on that script. In fact, it was less than 15 minutes. And we show you that exact same system, exactly how you can write highquality scripts that are not AI slop. They actually come from you. They sound like you and they and it’s your information uh, in less than 15 minutes. Next is the viral video creation system. This is where we actually turn things into a system. And this is what makes it uh possible to only work one or two hours a week on your YouTube channel and in some cases uh if you’re a very busy business owner, for instance, zero hours a week or just a couple hours a month. And this is done with systems and our own in-house AI that we only allow our clients to use. So the niche validator that we’re going to be dropping here in a minute is just a fraction of a sample of the power of the AI systems that we give to our clients. And we have systems for every problem that you could imagine on YouTube. And we’re going to give you a a taste of that here in a minute with the the niche uh validator AI. It’s it’s absolutely amazing. You’re going to love it. And lastly is the cash code system. This is where we actually make money uh out of the views that you’re getting, right? Even if you’re not getting a lot of views. And it’s very very important that you’re actually monetizing correctly. And yeah, guys, I think we might just have a few slots left. So, take those spots now. Go to go.shenomous.com/coaching. Click the link in the chat right now. And that’s just a taste of what’s inside of the community. You don’t just get one or two tools. You get the entire arsenal. Custom GPTs, cloud skills, all built for one thing, which is growing and monetizing your channel. And our clients are getting the updates in real time, and they are loving it. And the tools that we don’t build ourselves, we tell you exactly which ones are worth your time. Gemini, descript, pixels, and much more. So whether you run chatb or cloud, there’s a tool sitting here ready for you. No guessing, no piecing it together yourself. This is just a taste of what’s waiting inside. And actually out of curiosity guys, type in the chat which AI you actually prefer to use. Is it Chat GBT? Is it Claude? Is it Gemini? Is it uh you know Grock? Which which one do you prefer to use? I know there’s Jarvis as well, right? Okay. Claude. Yeah, most people are using Claude. Excellent. Yeah, Claude is the one that we recommend. Hermes is pretty good, too. We We like We like Hermes as well. Um but you can also just do something easily very similar to that with with Claude. Um, you don’t you don’t need to use Hermes, but uh, love it. Love it. Good stuff. Good stuff. Awesome. Grock is really good for news style content because they’re attached to Twitter X and the news comes out faster on Twitter X than anywhere else. So, yeah. Good stuff. Good stuff. Awesome. Cool. Plus, you’re going to get one-on-one coaching calls and a dedicated client success manager, one-on-one dedicated chat support with all of our coaches, multiple weekly group coaching sessions, access to an exclusive group of hybrid personal brand YouTubers, and access to the most powerful content creation AI systems on Earth. And this is just a peak inside of our private community, guys. Real wins coming in every single day. One member just hit 10,000 subscribers and 1 million views and grew 5x in a few months. Another finally landed their first 10 leads straight from YouTube. Another one just closed a $75,000 year contract inbound straight off the platform. Someone else made their first $10,000 from YouTube. Someone else 4xed their subscriber count in a single month. Another person crossed 5,000 subscribers. Um, and another person got 39,600 views on a brand new channel and got that channel to 800 subscribers and barely any time at all. So, this is not so this is not just a course that you buy and forget about, right? This is a community of people winning together every single day. And these are just a few examples. This is what our group looks like on any given day. So, if you want results like this, book a call with us now and we’ll look at where your channel’s at. Uh, see if you’re a good fit and map out what it would actually look like to get results like this. So, again, go to go.shenhome.com/coaching or click the link in the chat right now. And this is the exact system that’s responsible for 0 to 10k in just 18 days. Right? Here’s an example. Bro, I just hit my first 10K within 18 days of launch. I don’t even have 1k subs yet. This is nuts. Thank you, man. This is the system that’s responsible for these uh this is the system that’s responsible for these results as well. Take take a little bit of coffee here. My mouth is too dry. So, usually there’s a shaded uh uh this this is what a normal views graph looks like, right? So, usually there’s a shaded region right here. And this is what your typical performance looks like on a typical video. And this is what your your new video looks like, right? So, the the video that you’re showing uh when you’re looking at the YouTube studio, right? So, you’ll notice this shaded region. Now, I was looking at a client account and I saw that there was no shaded region on this client account and I was like, “What the heck is going on here?” And when I looked into it a little more deeply, what I found is that basically this client had been posting on YouTube for 8 years and they never had a single video pop off and get a lot of views, right? They never had a single 100,000 view video. All their videos were getting like maybe 1 to 3,000 views maximum, right, for 8 years of posting on YouTube. And then they worked with us and one of their very first videos with us popped off and got over 180,000 views. And this was so extreme that it actually confused the YouTube studio algorithm system and it either didn’t put the shaded region at all or the shaded region was so low that it actually blended in with the xaxis down here. So that is the power of our systems on YouTube guys. So uh this is another example. This is somebody who um uh started off a brand new YouTube channel. It was about a month a month and a half before we took this picture, this uh screenshot. And they got 354,000 views in the uh uh you know, month in uh 17,000 watch hours, 8,000 subscribers, $953 just from AdSense alone because of course you have to apply for the monetization program and get accepted before you get AdSense. And uh they were making money outside of just AdSense of course, but right away they were just getting crazy good results. Here’s another client. This person is what I would like to call a category king. We have a lot of category kings and category queens in our program. So, um this particular person is in a very large niche, a very large and well-known niche. And uh they’re making $50,000 just from AdSense alone. Uh getting over 8 million views, mostly long form views. And uh they are making 20 to $30 million a year with this particular YouTube channel. Again, from all monetization sources. So again, when I say that AdSense is just a small slice of the total pie, uh this person is making, you know, millions of dollars a month and AdSense is maybe like less than 5% of what they’re making. Um but one one thing I’ll also say about this is we do have a lot of anonymous clients. Some of our clients we get crazy good results for, but they don’t want to uh you know let other people know about their nation because they think that you know people might try to copy them or whatever. And uh this is one of those clients, but we have a lot of category kings and category queens. I’ll even show you another one here in a minute. Um, some some of them are in small niches, of course, but a lot of them are in medium niches and even big niches, too. Uh, this person right here closed four out of five call bookings at uh $997 for a 90-day program. In the fifth call, they actually ended up closing later on. This is a person who had never taken a sales call in their life. Now, if you’ve ever taken sales calls, you know that you’re probably only going to close about 20% when you first start, right? That’s pretty standard. It’s like 10 to 20%. This person closed 80% right off the bat, but then that fifth person, they actually closed them later on. So, it was really 100%. And that is because they were getting redhot leads from YouTube. They were just ready to buy already. So, they essentially didn’t even have to be a salesperson. They could just be a cashier because the person already knew, like, and trusted them. They came from YouTube. They already nurtured them. They already knew them. And it was almost like they were just checking out a product that they got at a grocery store. So, they were a cashier instead of a salesperson, right? And that doesn’t happen with pretty much any other platform. Now, by the way, guys, uh please check the times in September. Spots are running out fast. We did get a note that there weren’t any times. We did open up a few more times in uh few more slots uh in September. We probably won’t be able to open up any more of those, but yeah, go ahead and check that calendar again. Click the link in the chat um or or type in go.shenhus.com uh/coaching.
Bill transformed his YouTube channel’s impact among 177K subscribers and he’s now making over 30,000 plus dollars per month at the time of this testimonial. And basically, he said, “Shane helped me out with his keyword research, titles, and thumbnails, as well as turning my YouTube channel into a business.” So, he turned his YouTube channel from a liability, sucking up all of his time to a business that works for him while having a full-time job. Yep, dashboard is working. Sean was stuck making about $30,000 a month, and he scaled all the way up to over $500,000 a month. So, he’s another example of someone that we helped become a category king. He’s number one in the Amazon KDP niche, which is a pretty big niche on YouTube. So, he said, “Shane knows what he’s doing. He’s not another fake guru. His program goes beyond just tactics, teaching you how to build a personal brand and master the back-end systems that actually drive revenue.” Next is Cheryl. She helps people through spiritual awakenings, and before joining us, she was stuck under 50 subscribers for years with a great message, but no strategy. We gave her the system, the content strategy, the title and thumbnail frameworks, and the hands-on coaching, and she immediately grew to 9,000 plus subscribers and got monetized in months. One video hit 128,000 views and now she is landing brand deals. And this is what happens when you stop guessing and you start following our system. You go from spinning your wheels for years to actually making money and growing your channel.
Just like Jen here, who is a healthcare professional who recently joined our program before joining us. She was a complete beginner. She had no idea what to make, no experience with YouTube or making videos at all or making social media content at all. And in her own words, she said, “I hadn’t even dipped my toe into YouTube.” And now she has over 35,000 subscribers and her channel got over 4.2 million views already. And she was sitting in the exact same situation watching a live training just like you are right now just a few months ago. And uh now, you know, three of her videos have over 600,000 views. And I spoke with her last week. And she told me that she quit her job as a nurse because of her YouTube channel. And she’s now able to travel all over the US and even internationally in her camper van, which was always her dream. All thanks to us, right? Which is absolutely unreal. And again, this is what I live for, guys. I like to change people’s lives. And not only do I like to change people’s lives, but Nurse Jen is helping hundreds if not thousands of people out there as well with her niche, right? And it’s obvious. It’s common sense to her because she’s basically just telling people what she was already telling her patients on a day-to-day basis. Uh, but she’s just recording it on video and blasting it out to YouTube, right? And she also records her videos part-time while traveling in her camper van inside of the van itself, which is pretty cool, too. And this month, she said that she made $10,000 from AdSense alone. And these are numbers that creators chase for years, right? And she’s making money from other stuff as well. She’s got brand deals, sponsorships, affiliate marketing going on as well. But she attended the live training wondering if this is for her or not. But she took the leap of faith. She booked a call and this is the results, right? And she built it all of it, like I said, on what she already knew, which is healthcare navigation, which is something that is a big problem in the United States. And she helps people do that. So if you’re a healthcare professional or just a professional in general, this could be for you, right? Because what’s common sense to you, the stuff that you’re already talking about with your patients or your clients or your customers or you’re helping your co-workers with or you had to learn in order to get into the job already, stuff that’s common sense to you, stuff that you probably do on a day-to-day basis like softwares that you use for instance on a day-to-day basis that is not necessarily common sense to other people. And you can help them, you can educate them, help them solve that problem and get paid by doing it. Right? So this is what happens when you uh follow the system. So, I know all kinds of different people who work in the YouTube industry. I basically know all the different consultants, the coaches, the agencies, all the different people who offer products, etc., etc. And I’ll tell you kind of how this industry works, right? Usually, the highest paid people, the best of the best work with big corporations, right? And so, they’re going to be doing like seven figure contracts a year. And in many cases, working with these big companies, it’s at least a six-f figureure contract. Right? Now, the second highest tier of what you can offer is probably what’s called a build and release offer. And I have some friends that do this. and basically like like one of the very few people that are actually really good on YouTube besides myself that really know what they’re doing. And they charge $300,000 to do a build and release offer. And companies are happy to pay this because they know the power of YouTube and they want a piece of the pie. And this is basically where they work with like seven, eight, nine figure companies and they help build out their YouTube channel for the first 3 to 6 months. They hire everybody out for the channel. They build it out. They figure out exactly how the channel works and then they release it to them once everything is working and they’ve hired the team out to them. And they, like I said, usually charge about $300,000 to do that. Now, I myself have attended four masterminds that are $50,000. Last year, I was in two. This year, I’m in another two. And these are extremely valuable, and I learned tons of stuff from these masterminds, and I pass it down to you guys. So, there’s a lot of YouTube masterminds out there that are like $50,000. And it would easily cost you 35,000 mistakes if you were to try to do it on your own. And 25,000 is more than a fair investment to make to even get one of the knowledge contained in the content growth engine. but a special offer only for this workshop. When you book a call within the next 24 hours, we’re offering something that we’ve never offered before. Uh, and we’re going to talk about some bonuses that we’re giving out. And by the way, go to go.shenhum.com/coaching, click the link in the chat, or scan this QR code. Um, okay. Yeah. So, we I just got note, guys. We did uh we did open up a few Calendarly slots. Okay. Um, so yeah. Um, I’m not sure how many spots are left. I think we opened up like Yeah, we opened up maybe like 19 more spots, but we can’t really do any more than that after this, guys. So, yeah. So, go ahead, click that link in the chat. Um, uh, book the call by, you know, scanning the QR code, type in go.shm.com/coaching. Um, I don’t think we can open up any more spots after this. Um, but yeah, cuz we we totally we ran out of spots, but we but we open up a few more. Oh, by the way, if you were checking before, if you already clicked that link and you either couldn’t find a spot because it was fully like totally taken or there were a few spots but you just you like none of them were convenient for you, go ahead and click the link again because there might be a better spot for you. So, um yeah, but after that, I don’t think we can open up anymore, guys. So, go to go.shmas.com/coaching or click the link in the chat or you can scan this QR code. So, bonus one, and this is a big one. Um you get a one-on-one YouTube niche success call with me personally. Now, let me tell you why this matters. When I was starting out, I had a mentor named Sam. And he was doing YouTube for his wedding photography business. And Sam showed me how to actually make money on YouTube, even with a small channel. And that changed everything for me. That is when I started earning big. Not because I got lucky, but because someone who already figured it out showed me the ropes. And that one relationship changed the entire direction of my channel. And that is exactly what this call is. everything that I have learned building a channel to 1.5 million subs and over $10 million in revenue applied directly to your niche, your channel, and your situation. Now, this is worth $12,000 easily, but this is only for five of the first people who sign up within the next 24 hours. So, go to go.inous.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Um, if the dashboard’s not working, then make sure you send me the the real ones for the QBC. Um, but yeah, uh, click that link in the chat. And this is what the actual coaching looks like. I can already see people signing up, by the way, as I’m talking. So, definitely don’t wait on this one. Go to go.shmas.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus two is the 30 secondond video idea generator. This is easily worth $7500. Now, if you sat down to find winning ideas yourself, researching what’s working, checking view counts, studying channels, you are looking at weeks or probably even months of trial and error, and most people still will pick the wrong ideas. Okay? Hire someone to do it. a real content strategist who knows YouTube, you’re going to be paying $7,500 easily. So, we built a custom AI tool that finds proven video ideas for your niche in about 30 seconds. So, this is not generic AI spitting out random titles. It is built on the icon method. It finds what’s already working and it hands you a better version of it. The titles, the hooks, etc. The angles, all of it. And you get it both ways. Both a chat GBT version and a Claude skill. So, whatever AI you already use, you’re covered. And this is included as a bonus. So, go to go.shmos.com. cinemas.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And here’s what it actually looks like. And whether you’re using chatp or cloud, we built it for both. You give it a video that’s already performing. It reverse engineers why it works. And then it hands you five high converting titles and hooks for your channel. No guessing, no staring at a blank screen. The winning ideas are already out there. This tool just finds them for you. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus three is the winner thumbnail vault plus premium templates. This is worth $10,000. And this is my personal collection of thumbnails that actually get clicks, right? And not generic templates. These are real thumbnails that have generated millions of views and millions of dollars. So, you get to see exactly what works. The colors, the faces, the text, the layout, all of it broken down. And this isn’t just any thumbnail. Cuz remember, guys, we’re not just trying to get views. We’re trying to get the right views. So, you might make a thumbnail that gets a lot of views, but it actually doesn’t generate any money. But you can make another thumbnail that actually attracts the right people to your channel that that are actually going to generate money, right? So, uh, you can see exactly what works. Like I said, the colors, the faces, the text, the layout, all of it broken down. Most creators spend hours guessing what their thumbnail should look like. With this, you just model what’s already proven. If you hired a thumbnail consultant to put this together for you, you’re looking at 5K to 10K easily, but you get it as a bonus. So, go to go.shenhomes.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. This is what’s inside. You get the full guide, the psychology behind why certain thumbnails get clicks and others don’t, plus my personal library of top performing thumbnails. These are the ones that have generated millions of views and generated millions of dollars as well. And here are the actual templates, fully editable. Uh you click file, make a copy, and it’s yours. And you see those annotations on the right. That is me breaking down exactly why each thumbnail works, where the face goes, how big the text is, what colors pop, etc., etc. So, you’re not just getting templates, you’re learning the framework so that you can build your own. So, go to go.shenomomas.com/coaching. scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus four is the tube tech stack. This is the best gear and tools under $500. And this is worth $3,997 easily because I’ve seen people waste tens of thousands of dollars buying gear that they absolutely don’t need. So, one of the biggest excuses is uh that I hear one of the biggest excuses that I hear is I don’t know what equipment to buy. And then people either buy nothing and they never start or they waste tens of thousands of dollars on gear that they don’t need. So this is everything that you need to start and scale your YouTube channel all under $500. You don’t need a $3,000 camera. You don’t need a studio. You just need the right tools. And to be honest with you, you can start off just with your phone or even recording on your webcam uh on your laptop. That’s exactly what Nurse Jen does. She just literally records on her webcam on her laptop and her content does completely fine. Right? So you don’t even need to spend $500. But if you want our recommendations, these are going to be it. So go to go.shinomomas.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And by the way, these recommendations are designed to be extremely simple, right? Extremely simple to set up with technology. We can also literally have people hop on with you and help you uh uh set up the tech if you’re having any issues, right? So that’s one of the things we offer in the program. Um but yeah, hey guys, you will get the niche validator here in a bit, but these bonuses are for when you sign up to CGE. So yeah, go to go.shumbas.com. shane.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat and look at what’s inside. Recording essentials, software stack, research and optimization tools, content resources, complete starter setups, and the exact tools for making videos. Everything laid out. No guessing, no wasting money on the wrong stuff. This is the same gear list that we give to our clients on day one. The stuff that actually matters with nothing extra. So, go to go.shanimus.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus five is the Vibriter content creation AI Deluxe. This is worth $10,000 and this is the ultimate content creation tool. You tell it the goal of your video to inform, to entertain, to sell, and it turns your spoken ideas into a polished, attention-grabbing YouTube script. It captures your tone, your style, your voice so that it actually sounds like you. And just like the last one, you get it both ways, both catchy or claude, whatever you are to use. Now, if you hire a professional content team to do this, like a script writer, a content strategist, someone who understands YouTube, you’re paying $3 to $5,000 a month minimum. This does it all in seconds. So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And this is what it actually looks like. The same tool running in both chatbt and cloud. It walks you through niche validation, your audience, your format preference, dialing in exactly who you are, and then you tell it the goal of your video, and it writes the full script. a real YouTube script with hooks, structure, and a tone that matches your personality as well as your channel. So, go to go.json.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus six is the secret niche vault with live updates. This is worth $6,997 easily. This is the one that everyone asks me about, right? What niche should I start? What niches are making money right now? What niches are untapped? Right? I get these questions all the time. This vault answers all of that. This is a curated list of profitable YouTube niches that we update live. So, you’re not looking at niches that worked two years ago. You’re seeing what’s working right now. And most people spend weeks or even months trying to figure out their niche. Some never picked one and they never start. This skips all of that. You open the vault, you pick a niche, and you start. And because it’s updated live, you will always know where the money is moving next. So, go to go.shom.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Now, for those of you who stayed until the end, we made something special for you. This is the YouTube niche growth AI, and this one is different than all of the other bonuses. This is an AI tool that uh basically takes your niche uh that you came up with with the niche validator, your niche hypothesis statement, and it maps out exactly how to make money from it, right? Not just AdSense, we’re talking affiliate deals, digital products, coaching offers, sponsorships, the full picture. Because here’s the thing that most people get wrong. They pick a niche and then they hope the money situation figures itself out later. That is backwards. This tool shows you the money map before you even record your first video. So you know exactly what you’re building towards from day one. And like every tool that we give you, you get in both chat GPT and Claude whatever whatever you are to use, right? And this is going to help you estimate how much money you can make from these different monetization uh sources at different levels of your channels. Well, now here’s the catch. This bonus is worth $12,000 and you get it just for showing up to the call that you booked, right? That’s it. You book the call, you show up and you get it. So go to go.shinhomus.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. And the second you show up to the call that you booked, you get instant access on the spot. And whether you like chatbt or claude, you can use this either way. This is not some watered down freebie. It is the same tool that we use inside of the content growth engine. And it is yours for life. So go to go.json.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Next is the 90-day founders confidence guarantee. This is priceless. You’ve got 90 days. You follow the program, you do the work, you show up, and if it does not work for you, you get your money back. I am not asking you to trust me blindly. I am asking you to test it and see for yourself. Okay? So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. And now you can do it without risking anything. Right? I want you to feel like there’s no risk on your side. We have a very low refund rate. Uh we also did a survey where we asked people if they felt like they got a their ROI from the program. 91% of people said yes, we got an ROI from the program, right? Uh and this is in an industry where refund rates are usually like 7 to 15%. Our refund rate is far lower than that. And it’s also an industry where less than 10% of people even finish the courses that they buy, right? So 91% of people saying that they got an ROI versus typically less than 10% of people even finishing the courses that they buy. uh never mind even getting an ROI. And the reason that we have such insanely good results is because we made this incredibly easy. We set up an environment where success is easy. Okay? So, that’s what you want. You want success to be easy because if you’ve ever thought about something that you’ve gotten good at in your life before, chances are uh you got good at that thing because you were in the right environment, right? So whether it’s an instrument, a subject in school, uh some sort of skill, maybe a game for instance that you got really good at, chances are you were around a bunch of other people that were doing the exact same thing. Uh you had people that were less good than you that you could kind of mentor, people that were on your level, uh that you could have camaraderie with, maybe a little bit of competition with, people that were a little bit better than you that could maybe mentor you a little bit. And then of course you also had a coach at the top uh that could that could give you feedback or a mentor or a teacher or a professor or whatever. And that creates an environment that makes it easy for you to get results. And that’s exactly what we’ve done with this. And that’s why we’re so confident to give a 90-day founders confidence guarantee because we know that so many people are going to love the program. They’re going to love the people in the program. They’re going to get results and they’re not going to u take us up on the guarantee. So let’s add this up. Eight bonuses. Total value $62,497. Now remember bonus one, the one-on-one session with me personally. That is only for five of the first people who sign up today. Once those spots are gone, they’re gone. They are randomized, but you have a higher chance of actually getting the spot if you sign up now. So if you’re on this call right now, you’re still early. Okay? Uh once we send out the replay for this, like you know, tomorrow or the next day or whatever, we’re like we’re going to get a ton of spots filled up. But if you’re early, you have a higher chance of getting it. So sign up now, right? Uh, and bonus seven, the YouTube niche growth AI. You only get that if you book a call and actually show up to it. Okay, that’s it. Everything else is included completely free when you join. Now, this workshop special is only available for the next 24 hours. And after that, these bonuses go away. This exact package at this exact price with all eight bonuses. You will not see it again. And let me clear something up real quick because I get this question every single time. The 24 hours is for booking the call, not for attending it. Okay? So, if you book right now and the next open slot on my calendar is, you know, 3 days from now or 5 days from now, it doesn’t matter. As long as you book right now or book the call within the next 24 hours, you’re good to go. So, if you’ve been going back and forth on this, now is the time to move. Go to go.shenhus.com/coaching or scan the QR code right now. Book your free strategy call and we’ll figure out if we’re a good fit to work together or not. Worst case, you get on the call, you get some clarity on your niche, you get a lot of value from the call, and you walk away with a plan. No pressure, no hard sell. But if it’s the right fit, we go to work, right? So go to go.shenomomas.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. And one last thing, and this is important. Once you book, you’re going to get two emails. One is from Calendarly, one is from the consultant that you booked with. Okay? And they’re both going to be titled CGE MasterClass call. So check your inbox right now. If you don’t see them, look in your promotions, your spam, your junk, your all mail. So if you’re on Gmail, for instance, it’s going to be all mail. Um on Yahoo, it might be, you know, spam or whatever. uh the the different emails are a little bit different, but just check those those ones. Spam, trash, junk, all mail, etc., okay? And uh sometimes they hide in there instead of your main inbox, but those emails have your call details. So find them and open them. It’s very important that you do that. Um if you can’t follow the directions on those emails, there’s a very low chance that we’re going to accept you into the program. Um cuz we do have very limited slots. We can only accept a small amount of people at a time. and uh there’s a very low chance that we’ll accept you into the program because we need people that can actually follow instructions. So, make sure you open those emails and actually follow the instructions. And with that being said, I am now going to take questions, guys. So, any questions that you guys have for me, go ahead and uh type in the chat and I’ll be happy to answer them.
Great. Get a little bit of gum here.
Holly says, “It won’t let me choose a day in September.” Um, honestly guys, we might be totally out of spots. I can’t see the calendar right now. Um, and yeah, we’re going to be dropping the niche validator here in a minute, guys. But yeah, I can’t see the calendar right now, guys. Uh, we we might be totally out, but again, click the link in the in the chat to check the calendar. I’m not sure. Um, you could also try refreshing the page, Holly. Um, it could be that you click the link before we open up new spots. So, try refreshing the page and uh maybe it maybe some spots will open up at that point. Okay. Uh, Lynn, I signed up for two calls. How do I cancel one to open up for someone else? Uh, just go ahead and cancel it. Yeah, admin Steven should help you with that. R.J., Hey, my industry is a $140 billion industry with around 330,000 businesses across the US, but there are practically no videos related to the industry with more than 30k views. Even the podcasts for well-known companies in this industry are getting less than 1k views on their videos. Is this just not going to work? This is property management industry and the help that I provide uh keeps people in compliance with state regulations. No. Just because there’s not a lot of views does not mean there’s not a lot of money. Uh R.J., so just as an example, we have one client in commercial real estate. He’s one of the biggest uh commercial real estate people in Houston and he had the same exact concerns. He’s like, “Ah, I don’t see a lot of people getting views and stuff.” He’s absolutely crushing it now on social media. He’s absolutely crushing it. Okay. So, if it’s not getting a lot of views, that actually doesn’t matter because the lower the TAM, the total adjustable market is typically the higher the actual money you can make from each person. So obviously people that are in um you know real estate uh like you know a lot of these companies for instance like property management like that that’s a huge industry like you can make a ton of money doing that and so no that’s totally fine and I know for a fact property management is completely fine so definitely sign up for a call RJ. Yeah and we would love to help somebody in property management for sure. We we don’t currently have anybody in that niche. That’s another thing guys is sometimes if we already have someone in your niche we actually won’t accept uh anybody else. So you you kind of want to lock in your niche cuz it would be kind of a conflict of interest. So you kind of want to lock in your niche uh while while you still can. What happens during the call? The call is super uh is call is super valuable and it’s also free. Susan, we’re basically going to um figure out where you are right now, where you want to be. We’re going to make a plan to get there and then we’re going to see if we’re a good fit to work together or not. We can also help you dial in your niche on the call. We do recommend downloading the niche validator and playing around with that before your call. Um, so the niche validator is absolutely amazing. We’ve literally gotten like hundreds of comments from people saying that it’s like the most amazing tool they’ve ever used. And we did spend like hundreds of hours, literally myself, I spent like tons and tons of time, uh, dialing it in. So, it’s a great tool obviously. Um, but yeah, uh, uh, the call will be valuable whether we end up working together or not. We’ll be going over your niche, going over like your plan, and seeing if we’re a good fit to work together on the call. Uh, Jason says, “How much?” So um we we are totally transparent about the pricing. With that being said, we offer different services at different levels. So at the very top level, we do work with big businesses sometimes like we’ve worked with the biggest realtor for instance in Montana. We’ve worked with big companies um like even even like 10 figure companies before, right? But typically we don’t work with 10 figure companies, but like we’ve worked with big companies like that before. And typically with those types of companies, big businesses, what they what they want from us is they want us to to come in, they want us to help them build out their department or if they already have a department, work directly with the people in that department. We have to integrate into their systems. We have to make sure that obviously the YouTube channel is built out and a lot of it is just done for you work. But then more than that, we have to integrate into their systems which can also be quite difficult and then make sure that all the departments are properly talking to each other so that data is getting reported correctly. um the email marketing department is connected to the YouTube department so that they’re on the same page etc etc. Oh, maybe the SEO department as well, for instance. Um, so that is a lot of work, right? The scope of the work is is insane. That’s a lot of work. And so we charge at least six figures for jobs like that, for companies like that. And you know, we don’t even take on too many of those. Like sometimes we’ve even gotten like equity in the companies like I said before to take those on. But another really and and this is probably like for less than 5% of the people on this call. Now, for maybe about, you know, 20 to 30% of the people on this call that have six, seven, eight figure businesses already or they have bigger YouTube channels, for instance, we typically do what’s known as kind of like a build and release type offer for those channels. And what they uh what what we typically help them do is we’ll help them hire like a video editor, maybe hire like a creative director or a script writer for their channel. Typically, we’ll just hire from the Philippines as well to keep cost down. Um, and we uh build out their their systems uh in their uh their business. We typically will work with like their operations manager or something like that or we work directly with the founder and uh we just build out the systems and we just build it, make sure it’s running correctly, hire the people to run the systems for them at a very affordable price and then we release it to them. So that’s also a bit of a done for you type service as well. Um and that is going to cost anywhere depending on what they need. Sometimes they want us to hire more people. For instance, we just got a request uh to hire somebody who can travel with them full-time because this person travels a lot. So, obviously, that’s kind of difficult to do and so we we charge more for stuff like that. But that’s going to char that’s going to uh run anywhere from about 12 to $60,000 over a 6-month period depending on uh what your needs are. And then, you know, these other two examples here are basically we fish for you or we build the machine that fishes for you and we hire the people to run it. uh this uh probably the most valuable offer is we just teach you how to fish. So that way we can uh you can just you know feed you for the rest of your life because you know how to fish, right? So that’s basically just teaching you how to do all of this. So teaching you how to do YouTube and teaching you how to build the systems out uh that can help you do YouTube and teaching you how you can hire those people too, right? So that’s going to be the most valuable program in terms of the value out of all of them. And that one still is pretty intensive. It’s one-on-one mentorship. Uh we hired the absolute best of the best. We have 20 people running that program and that is going to be $9,800 or about $1,000 a month if you want to do payment plans or you can get it a little bit less than that uh with in-house uh financing payment plans as well. So you can get a little bit less than $1,000 a month. But those are the options. Again, we’re totally transparent with the pricing. Uh we are very likely going to be increasing the prices pretty soon because it is very expensive to run programs like this. It’s very expensive to create an environment. We basically created like a university, like an online university at this point. You know, we have tons of people working on the team to make this happen. It’s very expensive to create a program like this. Um, but that’s how we get people the absolute best results in the industry. There’s no other way to do it. There’s literally no other way to do it. Uh, in order to get people the absolute best results in the industry, we have to hire all those people to support them. And that’s exactly what we did. And so, yeah, uh, again, totally transparent with the pricing, but uh, it does change depending on what your needs are. Okay. So, uh, Gail question for, and by the way, guys, I’m not going to answer the question on the pricing. Um, again, if, uh, somebody else asked the question, I’m just going to tell them to watch the replay cuz it’s kind of complicated. And if you want more details on the pricing, just book a call. Just book a call. We can help you with that. All right. Next is Gail. Question. For the ones whose video blows up the first time and they made money, how did they make the money? Clicks. Uh, typically when somebody’s video blows up right away, assuming they’re a I’m just going to assume they’re a complete beginner, right? They don’t have a business already, they don’t have a YouTube channel already, they’re just a complete beginner, which is most people who join the program. Assuming they’re a complete beginner, um, typically they’re going to make money from AdSense and then they could also do affiliate marketing right away as well. Those are going to be the two most common ways when you’re complete beginner. The third way that we typically recommend, and this is actually the way that we’ve seen most clients have the highest uh, success, is you sell a high ticket offer. Okay? Okay, so you sell a high ticket offer. This could be a service like doing somebody’s resume if you’re helping them become a financial controller for instance or a management consultant. You could just literally do their resume for them. It could also be like an agency offer which is where let’s just say you run somebody’s Facebook ads for uh you know months at a time. So you get paid monthly to run their Facebook ads or redistribute their content. Some people have even started businesses where they help other people do content. Um or it could be a high ticket coaching offer or a consulting offer. Um, but we typically recommend that people sell high ticket. That’s what we’ve seen people have the most success with, right? That’s the reason why we do it. And it’s not only good for you when it comes to making money, but more importantly, it’s also good for the client because they’re actually going to get results. Again, if you sell a course, if it’s on something very simple to do, like let’s just say you’re teaching people how to use Excel, you could probably just sell a course or maybe sell like a group coaching program, something like that, like a like a school group, like a monthly recurring membership type of thing for maybe like a hundred bucks a month or something or a course for a few hundred bucks a month or or a course for a few hundred. Um, and you can make really good money doing that if it’s something very simple. But if it’s something that’s a little harder to get results with, like helping somebody get a YouTube channel or helping somebody land a job, we highly recommend just doing a high ticket course uh to help them get results or just doing the work for them. So, a service or or an agency. So, those are what we recommend. And the good thing about that is you don’t actually have to build it before you sell it. You can just sell coaching or you can sell your service before you actually uh build it out. So, you can just build it while uh while you’re actually coaching them. So, for instance, you could just do one-on-one coaching and just ask them like, “Hey, what questions do you have for me?” And then you make the curriculum based on those questions essentially. Um and then over time you just make it better and better. Okay. So hopefully that answers that question. Michael program already answered that. Uh already answered that. Okay. The signup fee is $0. It costs nothing to book the call, guys. The book the call is completely free. Oscar, how difficult was uh starting YouTube with ADHD? I have ADHD. YouTube is the most ADHD friendly business model in the entire world because like I said guys, I am super scatterbrained. Um, I’ve changed my niche probably like 10 or 15 times on YouTube and I basically just talk about whatever I want on my channel. Um, I’ve made videos in so many different niches across so, you know, right now my big thing is AI. AB. I’m absolutely in love with AI, specifically Claude. I really love Claude a lot. Um, but I I use the other AIs as well. We we literally spend like $10 to $20,000 a month on AI, which you do not have to, by the way. Like, we do we’re we’re like on the cutting edge of AI. I hired one of the world’s best AI experts to literally come and live in the apartment right next to my apartment and travel with me as well. Okay. So, like you don’t have to you don’t have to spend that much money on AI. We do all the the the research and the experimentation so that you don’t have to. Um, but yeah, uh that’s my current obsession is AI, of course. And uh but I’ve changed my obsession so many times on YouTube, right? I’ve launched two uh multi-sefigure businesses from YouTube. One of them is now a 8 figureure business. Um and and yeah, I’ I’ve changed my my niche so many times and it’s because uh YouTube is the most ADHD friendly uh business model out there. Uh how is the faceless video going to be created? Um that is probably too much for the scope of uh this training. Um but it’s actually quite simple. Um, one of the biggest things I kind of explained it with Wiz of Ecom is you’re going to have a cartoon character that represents you. And uh, this means that it’s going to be a personal brand. Even if you’re anonymous, it’s still a personal brand because they know that there’s another human being on the other side. And we have you do it in such a way where there’s actually a lot of curiosity built. So they’re actually very curious about who you are. This is exactly what you know we uh, Wizard of Ecom did. Um, and then uh, you also want to use your real voice. So, it’s very important that you use your real voice. Don’t use some kind of AI generated voice. Even if it’s like the AI version of your voice, don’t do it. People can tell. It’s very obvious. Plus, YouTube actually scans for that and they mass demonetize slashmass delete those types of channels. So, you don’t want to do that, right? Um, but yeah, that’s how the faceless video is created. Um, without getting into too much detail, obviously. Maggie, what if you have multiple ideas for channels? Should they be separated or under one name? Just one channel, Maggie. Just one channel. If you try to chase two rabbits, you will catch zero rabbits, right? That’s an old proverb. I think it’s biblical, but it’s an old proverb. And uh uh it’s very wise. Definitely follow that, right? Just chase one rabbit at a time. You see these big YouTubers, for instance, that have all these different channels and you think, “Oh, I should start a big I should start a bunch of channels, too.” But what you don’t realize, guys, is they built those other channels after they grew their first channel. Okay? after their first channel was already crushing it, they then built those other channels and they were able to funnel people to those other channels from their first channel in many cases, right? So, it’s way easier to grow. So, yeah, don’t do that guys. But anyways, go.coaching. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. Um, and by the way, guys, we are running out of spots. So, please don’t book if you’re not serious. Okay? If you’re not serious about joining, please don’t book. Uh, you don’t want to take up a spot for someone else who could get value from it, who’s actually serious about joining. Okay, just rescheduled. Awesome. Jessica, good stuff. You can cancel the first call. Um, Christopher, do you have an afterpick from that booty class that you were teaching? You’re funny, Christopher. Um, I So, so I wasn’t really teaching a booty class. It was it was a uh product that it was like a a rubber band that you can kind of put on your on your foot. So pretend like this is my leg and then you kind of just go backwards like that and it and it works out your butt at home. Um so yeah, uh Luke, yeah, it’s good for college students. Yeah, it can be good for college students. I will say guys, most of the people that we work with are people who are on the older side. We do of course have our odd exceptions like Wen who is 18 years old who we help get results for but most of the people that we work with are actually on the older side and it’s because it’s actually easier for older creators to grow on YouTube because with this particular type of YouTube channel because you have something that you can’t just look up on AI or look up on Google which is wisdom right you have knowledge experience and wisdom which is something that you can help other people with right you can help them solve their problems because you had those problems yourself and you were able to solve them Right? And so it’s actually easier for older creators to grow both in terms of the fact that you already have knowledge and wisdom and also because there’s it’s just a supply and demand issue. There’s um a lot of demand for older creators. There’s not a lot of older creators making content. And there’s obviously uh advertisers want to reach older uh viewers because 50 and above actually owns 70 to 80% of the wealth in the United States, right? So advertisers want to reach 50 and above and uh because of that uh you know YouTube pushes older creators like crazy because they want to fill up those advertiser slots obviously right plus there’s a lot of older creators that would would prefer to watch other older creators or there’s even younger people that would prefer to have kind of like almost like an internet uh uncle or an internet dad or an internet grandpa or grandma or aunt or you know etc or a big sister right so um it’s we’ve actually seen a lot of success from older creators specifically. Um, and it’s really a supply and demand imbalance right now and it’s just an unbelievable opportunity. Like we’re seeing older creators post super super simple content and just blow up on YouTube. Uh, Tammy, uh, it’s hard to open two YouTube channels, one faceless and one with my face. No, we just recommend doing one channel at a time, Tammy. Uh, just one channel at a time. Are there payment plans? Uh, huh? Yes, there is. Tommy, I want to start a new channel and I want to sell software and I want to sell training on how to build software using AI. Is it a good fit for your coaching program? 100%. So many like we try to uh have like I’d say at least 50% of the people we work with, we try to integrate AI into whatever their offer is, right? So, it may not be like selling AI stuff, but it might be just like using AI to help their clients or help their their people more or if they’re even if they’re making a course for instance, they can have AI in the course like here’s how to properly use AI uh in this context because that’s what’s happening with AI right now is it’s becoming very industry specific. For instance, there’s even AIs that have been made for the legal industry uh specifically that are now worth billions of dollars and it’s only for lawyers and law firms, right? So, uh, AI is becoming industry specific and you can make a channel teaching people how to use AI specifically for your industry. So, AI for real estate agents for instance, like realtors, right? Billy, I’d booked a call. Do I qualify for all the bonuses if I make the appointment? Um, the bonuses will be given uh once you’re accepted in the program. The bonuses that you get now are of course the uh niche validator and the YouTube niche growth AI. Um, so the YouTube niche growth AI, you get that just for booking the call and showing up to it. All the other ones you get after you join the program. All right. I I did see some comments that you can’t book in uh September. Guys, I have no idea if there’s even any spots left. Um I can’t see the calendar, but again, click that link. Go.coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat. Also, guys, I’m going to say something really quick. Um, you’re after you book your call, you’re going to see a page that looks kind of like this. Okay? So, it’s either going to look like this. It’s a little bit low. Oh, yeah. It’s either going to look like this or it’s going to look like this. One or the other. Um, and there’s going to be a short video that you can watch. This one’s 28 seconds long. And then there’s some directions that you want to follow. Very important that you actually follow these directions. Okay? Very, very important. Um, they’re very simple. They’re very easy to do. And again, if you can’t follow these directions, I don’t know if we’re going to be able to let you into the program because you have to be able to, you know, follow simple directions to get results, right? And we don’t want to we only work with people that we think we can get results for, right? So, um, additionally, at the bottom of this page, you’re going to see a bunch of case studies and testimonials from people that we’ve gotten results for as well. And these are going to be people from all different kinds of backgrounds, all different niches, all different uh, things that they’re selling. Some of them are, you know, physical in-person product businesses, etc., etc. Uh, all kinds of different demographics as well. So, for instance, if you’re wondering, hey, I already have a successful YouTube channel and I want to make it even more successful. Does that work? Yes. Here’s an example of Sean. We help them scale from 30 to 500K per month. If you’re wondering, does this work for fitness channels? Yes, this worked for a fitness channel. Also, Thomas was selling in the French market. So, if you’re wondering, does this work in other markets? Yes, it does work in other markets. Um uh if you’re wondering uh does this work for let me let me just find an example here. Uh uh does this work for uh recruiting businesses? Yes, it works for online service businesses like recruiting businesses for Carla here. Does this work in the uh German market? Yes, it works in the German market. Right. Um if you’re wondering maybe does this work for older creators? Well, Nurse Jen was 60 years old and it worked for her. Uh Cheryl as well, you know, does this work for uh people in the spirituality niche? Yes, it works for Cheryl. I also have people uh in the Christianity niche like basically they help uh Damon and Kennedy help uh Christian uh people find their kingdom partner, right? Which is uh they call it the kingdom partner. Um so it works in the Christianity niche or so if you’re wondering does this work in relationship niches? Yes, it works in relationship niches. If you’re wondering does this work for a very tiny coaching business that’s just starting out? Yes, it works for a very tiny coaching business. She got her first uh 10 clients from YouTube. Um, if you’re wondering, uh, let’s just say, does this work for physical product businesses? Yes, it works for physical product businesses like Tiffany. So, I highly recom on and on, right, guys? You’re going to look at these and, uh, you’re going to find somebody that is going to inspire you, right? You’re going to find somebody who’s selling the type of thing that you’re selling or they’re in a similar niche to you or they’re, uh, they come from a similar background to you, etc., etc. And also, we put some people on this page that we don’t reveal anywhere else. Okay? So, some of our clients want to remain anonymous. They don’t want to be in marketing material. However, they’re okay with us sharing their story after you’ve already booked a call. So, there’s going to be some people that you’ve never seen on the channel here and you can check them out, right? And it’s just an endless scroll, right? This is just an endless scroll. So, I highly highly recommend that you check this out. It’s just an endless scroll of of of testimonials, guys. So, I highly highly recommend that you check this out um before getting on your call, right? Because it’s going to be super valuable. That’s going to give you a lot of context and it’s going to allow you to get the most out of your call. So, same thing with this page except the video is just a little bit longer. It’s about 10 minutes. And we also have an FAQ section. This is a frequently asked questions section. And then you just want to follow the instructions here. So, basically the same exact thing there. Um, again, click that link in the chat, guys. Go to go.json.com/coaching, scan the QR code, and uh that will uh allow you to book a call. The call is free and valuable, and uh we will not accept you into the program if you’re not a good fit to join. So, there’s literally no risk. Plus, we have a 90-day money back guarantee. So, there’s literally no risk to you booking the call. Heidi, I need one-on-one mentor to hold my hand to learn how to do this. I’d love to be connected to someone who would help me consistently. That’s exactly what we do. Heidi, you will have one-on-one video calls, one-on-one coaching, uh, one-on-one uh, group chat as well with with all of our coaches. You can ask you can ask all of them questions. Um, but there will be a specific coach, we call them a CSM, a customer success manager assigned to you. this coach will have gotten a channel to 100,000 plus subscribers. That’s a one of the things that we uh have as a standard for the business. Chris says, “No questions for now. We’ll have more on the booking call.” Yes, absolutely. If you have like personalized questions where you need specific personalized advice, that is something we can help you with on the booking call. The master class is completely free, guys. We do not charge anything for the calls. Um,
okay. Stan says, “I already have a clawed YouTube channel and a strategy and branding started. Can you review it and see if it works for you?” Absolutely. We review people’s channels all the time. I’d say at least like 30% of the people maybe that we work with uh already have a YouTube channel. Um, so you know, a good amount of the people we work with don’t have a YouTube channel. They’re complete beginners. They don’t even have a business or anything. But a good amount of people we work with already have a YouTube channel as well. Miesa Ferguson, I am making content that is outside of my profession, but it is a niche in health and nutrition. Can you help analyze my approach? Absolutely. This is 100% something we can help you with on the call. So, definitely book a call right now and we will help you do that. Uh Jamal, I signed up and I didn’t get the instructions. It should have been on the um uh page after you selected a time. So, were you able to select a time slot, Jamal? Um, if you were able to select a time uh time slot on the calendar, uh, then you should be good to go. If not, uh, try to sign up again. Be careful about the questions, guys. Be careful with the questions that you answer. Um, the questions are going to determine, uh, whether you get a call slot or not. So, for instance, if you say that you’re not ready to start now or you don’t want to start anytime soon, we may not uh give you a slot because we want to work with people that are ready to start now. And if you say that you have absolutely no money to get started, well, this program does cost money, right? It it is an expensive program, so you do need some money to get started. Outside of the program cost, you don’t need that much, but you do need some money to get started. Oscar, do I have to start a new channel or can I use my normal one? You can absolutely use your normal one, Oscar. And that’s what we recommend. If you already have a channel, still use it. And we’ve helped people pivot from just in totally different niches. For instance, we just helped someone recently pivot from the beauty niche to uh basically healthcare niche. Okay? So, completely different niches and we help them pivot from one niche to another. So, if you already have a channel, um, not a problem at all. We can even help you pivot to a completely different topic if you want to. Ozil, I’m in the podcasting space. We’ve helped a lot of podcasts. I even worked with the number one uh, business podcast uh, in the world for beginners. Um, which is the $100 MBA podcast. So, we’ve helped a lot of podcasts. Uh, small channel. I want to learn if I’m promoting the right audience. Indie new podcasters versus professionals. trying to decide if I can do both. Absolutely, you totally can. 100%. Um, yeah, indie new podcasters or podcaster professionals, like either one. That’s something that we can help you dial in on the call, guys. So, I’d highly recommend you book a call if you want more information on that. And also, make sure to check out the niche validator. It’s been posted in the chat many times now. Scroll up and scroll down and uh you can get the niche validator that because it’ll it’ll help you with that as well. um been trained, you know, again, by myself and my team, hundreds and hundreds of hours and then thousands of hours of refinement after that. Chris, where can you download the niche validator? Just scroll up and scroll down. It’ll be right there.
Uh Frank, I’m booked. Where is the bonus email? The bonus email, uh again, niche validator is below. Please scroll down. And uh also in terms of the email, you should get an email right after you book a call. Uh and make sure you do check that email. Again, guys, check your all mail, your spam, your trash, your junk, whatever it’s called. It’s called different things on different email platforms. Make sure you check those. All right. Uh yeah, click that link in the chat, guys. Go. Scan the QR code and click the link in the chat. Larry says, “Thank you.” You got it, Larry. My pleasure. Um,
uh, Frank, I’m interested in an industry. Uh, Deborah says, “Those 10igure people are not there.” You’d be surprised, Deborah. We just had a a CMO of a 10-f figureure company join our program. And originally, she was checking it out for the company that she worked with, but she decided to actually start a personal brand, and she’s now making a full-time income, got 37 clients, I think, last time I checked, uh, from the program, and she’s just doing her own thing now. So, she quit her CMO job. So, you’d be surprised. Um, we actually do get a lot of big companies like that. Um, not a lot, but you know, like a small percentage of people watching. Um, Frank, I’m interested in an industry, uh, biopilic design, but unsure uh, yet how to break into it as an outsider. Can I create a channel about that as a way to break into it as an outsider? And do you have any success stories of this? Um, that is extremely specific obviously, but we have a lot of extremely specific industries, guys. Like for instance, um there’s one guy who is in the commercial solar sales industry, very specific. So solar uh uh power specifically for businesses. And he has a tiny channel, less than a,000 subscribers. And he made over $500,000 in a single year, guys. So absolutely, uh it works for even like super niche industries. So again, that’s something that I’d probably just book a call, Frank, and speak with our representatives. that’s something we can help you with. Uh we can even give you examples of kind of like very niche industries and and testimonials that of case studies of people that we’ve worked with in those uh niche industries. C uh Kelly says, “What does CGE stand for?” It’s it stands for content growth engine.
Uh yeah, Hansen, we only have spots for I think September 1 and September 2 right now. Kelly, how about an individual? Yep. We work with a lot of individuals. In fact, most of the people we work with are individuals. Lara, the people in my niche uh don’t like using AI for creative part of content. AI is okay for technical stuff and back-end stuff, but anything creative or problem solving, AI is an anathema. Would I still be able to work with you? Niche is energy healing. Yeah, absolutely, Laura. Uh for sure. And niches like that are even more safe when it comes to AI. For sure. So, definitely book a call with us. Click that link in the des uh in the chat, guys. Go to gosh.com/coaching, scan that QR code. And niches like yours are especially AI proof. So, like I said, we’ve already worked. I showed you an example of Cheryl, for instance, earlier. She’s in the spirituality niche. Uh, she’s making really good money now after spinning her years for her wheels for years on YouTube. Uh, we have Farah. She’s another one who’s in the spirituality niche. Um, additionally, uh, we’ve helped a lot of people that have, you know, are in niches where AI cannot help them. So, for instance, another example of that would be Isaiah. He’s a singing coach and obviously that’s something that AI can’t really help with. It’s something that’s very artistic and very subjective over what good singing sounds like and what what it doesn’t sound like, right? So, uh yeah, we can definitely um help you with that. You do not have to use AI for that. It’s something we can definitely help you with. So, yeah, click that link in the in the descript uh in the chat, guys. Go.coaching. Scan the QR code. Click the link in the chat. Okay, Tommy is going to go play with the validator. Awesome, Tommy. Good stuff. Have fun with that. You’re going to love it. Is it okay for college students, too? Yes, we even showed an example of Waqen, who was a business and engineering double major who got great results with this. So, yes, it is absolutely okay for college students, 100%. Um, how do you how do you content with the backlash to AI content lately? Um, so you again, we are not making AI slop content. If you want to make AI slop content, this is not the right program for you. We are making valuable content where the information comes from you. You are the source, but you’re using AI to do most of the heavy lifting for you. So something that would have in the past taken, you know, basically a full-time job, like 40 hours can get down to as little as 4 hours a week or even less than that with AI as a as a tool to help you make really high quality content. Nicole, thank you, Shane. You got it, Nicole. My pleasure. Jeffrey, the call is free. Jeffrey, yes. Thanks. You got it, Randy. My pleasure. Raul, question. With YouTube changing the way it counts views, does this affect your program at all? Does it make it even easier to succeed? It actually does make it even easier to succeed. Yeah, because you’re going to have more social proof and then people are going to be more likely to watch your videos. So, it does make it even easier to succeed.
Yeah, the call is totally free, Chris. And uh I already talked about the uh the cost of the program. By the way, who is booking a call? Comment in the chat if you’re booking a call right now. Uh Uhuru, thanks for the support. I’m ready to go. Awesome. Uhuru, love to hear it. Tina, what about the new YouTube policy on monetization? Not a big deal at all. In fact, the new YouTube policy with the way they’re counting views, it’s even easier uh to uh get results. Joel, are shorter videos better than over 2 minutes in length? Uh longer videos are significantly better, Joel. Um now what we do is we teach you how to make longer YouTube videos as your mother platform. So that’s like your mother content, right? So it’s like the sun in a solar system, right? And then you syndicate that content to all the other platforms including YouTube shorts, right? So you can cut up little YouTube shorts. We’ve gotten millions of views on just about every platform out there and we do it just by syndicating the content to the other platform, right? So, uh, yeah. Uh, we definitely recommend long form content. Long form content is where the money’s at, guys, by far. Lisa, finally got to book a spot. Awesome. Lisa, do I need to have a YouTube channel? No, you do not, Bimu. Um,
will the replay be emailed to us? Yes, it will be real emailed out within the next 24 to 48 hours. Um, how do I download the niche validator? Just scroll up and scroll down. Click it. Make sure that you are logged into Chat JBT andor Cloud depending on the one that you click on and it should go just fine.
All right. Uh yeah, we go over in great detail like the way you do it for faceless content and using your face is very very similar. The only difference is you’re just anonymous. You’re just you have a cartoon character that represents you. Uh that’s pretty much the only difference. And yeah, guys, go to go.shm.com/coaching. scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. Um, and uh, yeah, I am probably going to jump off here pretty soon, guys. So, make sure you click that link in the chat. Um, and I am going to I am going to have to be leaving here pretty soon. Um, with that being said, guys, uh, it looks like a lot of you booked a call. Uh, Claude rocks, I stopped the slop. I love it. Mike Jennifer says, “Thank you. Looking forward to the call tomorrow.” Awesome. Jennifer Emily, I think you just answered my question, but if I’m selling a coaching business, do I need to have the curriculum fully built out before working with you and your team? Absolutely not. You definitely do not need to have the curriculum fully built out, Emily. Definitely not. Nope. You can you can sell it before and then you just coach the person one-on-one or you could even do a group coaching cohort and then you build out the curriculum based on the questions that they are answering or the questions that they are asking and you are answering. Caroline booked but I think I need to cancel. Not ready for this. How do I cancel? make room for others. Uh, just check your email and there should be a button to cancel or you can check your calendar and cancel on there. Um, David, I’m 62 and I need to learn AI. Are there resources in the program for that or should I find another source? There are 100% resources in the program for that, David. That’s one of the things we focus on for sure. Ben, I had a very late last uh late night and forgot explicitly to ask for YouTube niche profit engine. Can I still get it? Uh, yeah. Just emailed the person that you uh uh called. Email the person that you talk to, Ben, and you can get it 100%. Stan, do I need to have content already created before I create a channel? Uh, no, you absolutely do not, Stan. Nope, you don’t need to. Michelle says, “Thanks so much, Shane. I appreciate it.” Hey, I appreciate you. Appreciate me, Michelle. Appreciate that. That’s awesome. Oliver, upon booking my call, I received this web page. Should be good. Uh, Heidi, do you recommend having one channel for multiple niches? Yes, just one channel. one channel, even if it’s for multiple niches. Yep, just one channel. Larry booked. Oliver, no email with the link for the appointment. Uh, check your spam, your all mail, and your trash, as well as your junk folder, Oliver. Make sure you check all of those. Is real estate in niche you no longer support? Nope, we still support it. Uh, we help lots of real estate agents all over the place. Um, we we work with the biggest realtor in Montana, for instance. Um, we also work with a realtor in Austin, Texas, and yeah, all over Houston, all kinds of places. Holly, does the phone call cost anything? Nope, it is completely free. Angela, have a good night. Awesome. Angela, you have a good night as well. Thank you. She says, “Thanks, too.” Oscar, thanks Shane, you got it. Oscar, my pleasure. Uh, Rosemary, can’t wait till tomorrow. Yay. Awesome, Rosemary. Can’t wait to talk with you as well. Raul, thanks for everything, Shane and team. Awesome, Raul. My pleasure. Thanks as well. Michael, with zero YouTube experience, can I make enough to cover the cost of the system within a year? Absolutely. I I mean, so many people have done that. I mean, a lot of people make within the first like few months, for instance. But you absolutely can uh do that. That’s that is actually the goal is is to get you there in the first few months, for sure. Chris, is it typical for someone that you get on a call with is clueless on what niche to choose from? Yes, that is actually typical and very normal. Most people do not know what niche to choose. So, yeah, go to go.mas.com. com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat, guys. Uh, I clawed my way in. Now I have to leave. Awesome, Stuart. All good. Uh, the niche validator, Al, that was the special bonus. Chris, I got a I got a call scheduled, but I also didn’t get the link. Um,
really? Uh, check your email, guys. Check your spam, your all mail, your trash folder, et, etc. Everything. Tammy, the navigator tool was great. I can’t wait for the call. Awesome, Tammy. Looking forward to it as well. Love to hear it. Oscar, what if I want to help people but don’t have a service to sell? That is completely fine. That’s one of the things we help you with. Chris, are the most attractive niches my professional experience or my personal experience? Honestly, both. Um, we’ve helped people in both of those, but basically, it’s something that you already have experience with typically. Um, there are exceptions. For instance, we’ve helped like female dating coaches that that coach men. Uh so obviously that wouldn’t be you know their experience because they’re a woman right but they help men uh uh for instance with dating u but usually it is uh from your own experience. Uh Wendy how do you get the free item if we do not book a call? Uh it’s right there Wendy uh we we were reply to your comment. Um favor thanks for your time. It was lovely. Awesome favor. My pleasure. It was lovely meeting you as well. Gabrielle, Gabriella or Gabriella just use uh niche validator. Stoked and validated what I thought my niche should be. Thank you. Can’t wait for the call. Awesome. Gabriella, love to hear it. Susan, if I know my niche, what use is the gain from the niche validator? It can help make your niche 10 times better. It can help you, for instance, come up with your niche hypothesis statement. So, I still recommend using it and also getting on the call because we can help you make your niche even better and figure out how to you can actually monetize your niche on YouTube, what video ideas to make, etc., etc. Thank you for this life-changing opportunity booked. Awesome, Rosemary. Love to hear it. My pleasure. Angela, if I sign up, how long is the program? It is a six-month program, Angela. Uh, Charles, great job. You delivered good content. I’m looking forward to my call and I’m working with the lead AI now. Awesome. Good stuff, Charles. Appreciate you. And my pleasure, Brian. Thank you, Shane. My pleasure, Brian. You are very welcome, Joel. Can you create an LLC for the channel that you can create? Yes, you can create an LLC. We can help you with that in the program if you’d like. With that being said, you don’t need to create an LLC, right? Most people don’t create LLC’s until they’re actually making money from their channel. In fact, uh for tax purposes, again, I’m not a lawyer. I’m not a accountant, a tax professional or anything, but for tax purposes, a lot of the time you you know, it doesn’t really matter until you’re making like over $10,000. Depends on the state you live in, but doesn’t really matter until you’re making more money. But yeah, that’s definitely something we can help you with in the program. Jeffrey, how much will it cost and for how long? Already answered that question. No email equals inbox or spam. Yep, that means you got to check your all mail, your spam, your trash, your junk, all those, and you’ll get the email in there. Ann says, “Thank you, Shane. Need to say goodbye. I appreciate your time and sharing knowledge.” Awesome. Ann, my pleasure. And you have a wonderful rest of your evening. Denise, do you already have a massage therapist in the wellness space? Nope, we don’t. Nope. That would be great. Jess, thank you. Good night. Uh, you got it, Jess. My pleasure. May, thanks to you. You got it, May. Claire, can you make money with shorts on YouTube? You can, but we recommend doing long form content. We do teach you how to make shorts with the syndication method that we talked about before. Larry, I’m 64 and looking forward to make this rock. Thank you for the opportunity. You got it, Larry. My pleasure. Jonathan, hey admin, thanks for responding. I checked my other folders and I still don’t see the second one. Uh, the first was almost an hour ago. Um, the admin responded to your message, Jonathan. If you scroll up and if if you really have checked everything and you and you can’t uh and and you and you can’t find your call, please email [email protected]. Make sure you send your name and the email that you signed up with. But email [email protected] and we can help you with that if you if you truly have tried everything. Email [email protected]. Claire, I searched my email for niche and I was able to find two emails they sent. Awesome. Christopher, thank you. Shane, looking forward to working with your team. Awesome. Christopher, looking forward to working with you as well. Stephanie, do you work with school teachers? I haven’t seen any testimonials about that. Yes, we have accepted school teachers into the program. You guys are absolute naturals when it comes to teaching. So, that is that is definitely something we can help you with. Favor, thanks for your time, guys. I booked already, so good night. Awesome. My pleasure. Favor, thank you as well. Susan, I’m sorry I missed the last amount that it costs. Uh, that’s okay. Um, it’s $9,800 or $1,000 a month or you can get it even a little bit less with uh payment plans. We have in-house financing payment plans. Jeffrey, how much does it cost and for how long? Already answered that question. Dan, join the VIP. Is there more training coming up? Uh, I’m going to be answering questions uh for the next bit. So, kind of. Yeah, in in terms of like answering questions. Yes. Beverly, thanks for spending this time with us. Looking forward to the call. Awesome. Beverly, looking forward to it as well. Jeffrey. Uh, let’s see. Answered that question already. Looking forward to my call on Tuesday. Awesome. Timothy. Lisa. Looking forward to the call. Respect. Awesome. Lisa, love to hear it. Um, Christopher also signed up for the call and do not see an email with the bonus links, spam, junk checked, etc. Search the entire email, client, nothing. Email supporthumus.com with your name and your email and we should be able to help you out. Susan, on our uh schedule call, do you call us or do we call you? Uh, we will call you, Susan,
unless it’s a Zoom call, then make sure you get on Zoom, obviously, but we will call you. Just follow the instructions in your email and it’ll tell you exactly what to do. Mary, the chat GPT and the Claude links will not let me post a question. Uh, make sure that you’re logged in. Make sure you’re logged into ChatgPT andor Claude before you click on the link and it should be fine. You can also just save that link and and use it for later for whatever reason if you if you can’t if you can’t uh make it work right now. Jeffrey, what does this uh already answered that question? Um, yeah. So, guys, go.coaching. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. Uh, Amber, thank you for the information and the options coming on the call. You got it, Amber. My pleasure. Oliver, thanks for your time and great info. You got it, Oliver. My pleasure. Jonathan, thanks. Admin, an email from an agent specifically with add to calendar link. I hope that’s enough. Yeah, should be good. Denise, got any massage therapists in the wellness space? I I don’t believe we have any ma massage therapists, but we have people that are kind of similar to that. And yeah, that’s definitely something we could help you with. Uh Susan, on our schedule call, can do you call us or do we call you? We will call you. Uh Mike, I train AI. Awesome, Mike. Emily, at what point of success would you need to hire a team member? Probably when you’re already making like 10 to $30,000 a month. Uh you can even get higher than that. We’ve had people get up to like 50 to 100,000 a month before they hire anybody. So yeah, uh should be totally fine.
Um Victoria booked. Awesome. Victoria Lisa niche validator. Good stuff. Joel, uh from one pharmacist pharmacist to another. Thank you for your time tonight. You got it, Joel. And you’re That would be so funny if you were my previous boss. Uh he was the district manager. Joel was the district manager there. That would be hilarious if you were my previous boss. Uh but yeah, you you got it, Joel. My pleasure. And uh yeah, from one pharmacist to another. My pleasure. Okay, Mike says he’s booked. Awesome. Uh you guys rock. Really fun talking to you guys from the admin team. Yes. Yeah, this was a really great crowd today. You guys, you guys are great. Kenneth, my child wants to start a faceless channel and not use voice either. How to do so? um we don’t we don’t do full AI content and we also we can work with the parents of the child but we don’t work directly with children. So we can work with the parents of the child uh but we don’t work directly with the child. Uh just just FYI. Uh Ben, I had the call very late last night. Yep. Just talk to your just reach out to your rep. They can give it to you. Stan, can an admin create one post with all the content links? Uh we the admin has been uh making the post with all the stuff that we give away for free. So yeah, just scroll up and scroll down. You’ll see that. Victoria, thank you. Cindy, I downloaded the skill download. What do you use to open? Uh just make sure that you are logged into Claude andor J Chatbt. Um the niche links just uh Nuri just look at the chat. It’s down there. Just copy those links. You can copy them and and uh if you want to, you can uh save them as well, but there should be a way to kind of like pen them or bookmark them so you can just have them for future reference uh in your browser or even on the AI itself. Chris, uh Shane, thank you for your time. I can’t wait for my call. Awesome. Chris, my pleasure. Can’t wait for your call as well. Oliver, email comes from Alias. Thanks, Shane. I was looking for Shane Hummus. Yep, it’ll be uh you guys, the call will not be with me directly. There’s there’s way too many calls. Uh once you’re in the program though, you will uh uh interface with me. Uh so I obviously don’t have time to interface with people who aren’t already clients in the program. Niche finding now. Awesome. Roosevelt, good night. Shane and team, awesome, Roosevelt, good night. Have a good one. Bernie, I’m going to leave. Thank you, Shane. You got it, Bernie. My pleasure. Mandy, thanks again. Shane, you got it. Mandy, uh Brian, have to run. Thanks again. You got it, Brian. My pleasure. Maggie, thanks. Appreciate all you do for free. Makes me want to sign up. I love to hear that, Maggie. Yeah, we always like to give way more value than what we receive and it has come back to us in spades. So, we are blessed and thank you so much for that, Maggie. Appreciate you. Um Lori, no. Uh actually want people to take my classes in person. Um actually, there’s a lot of people that that have made that type of content. So, they make content on YouTube and then they make it they can make content in certain areas like they can target geospecific target certain areas and then get people to actually come to inperson events. So that’s definitely something that you can do for sure. Uh what about a school teacher? Um yes, we can definitely help school teachers. Absolutely. Um Angela, the links, files, and uh chatb2 uh is not downloading. Just make sure you’re logged in, Angela. Uh Alia, Jenna, good night. Have a good one. Samuel, thank you very much. You got it, Samuel. My pleasure. Kelly, what about the new EU laws that require absolutely every AI generated or assisted content be obviously lab labeled as AI generated? So, yeah, it’s it’s um that is only if you use video and audio AI generated content. If you’re just using AI to help you make content, like for instance, help you write your script, it does not have to be labeled like that. Um that’s that’s YouTube’s terms of service. And yeah, you if you are actually making AI generated content like AI audio, AI video, um then you would want to label it correctly, right? And the kind of the the thing that you want to think about guys is is your content deceptive, right? So if you’re showing a person on the screen and that person is not a real person, it’s an AI generated person. Even if if it’s the AI generated avatar of you that and you’re not disclosing that information, that is deceptive to them. And so you really want to disclose that information, right? And I 100% agree with that EU law. I I think AI fully AI generated SLO content is a bane to the existence of humanity. And I 100% agree with that law. So um yeah, that is not a problem with our program. We have had exactly zero people uh banned from YouTube in our program. Zero people. Okay? And there’s lots of other programs, like basically every program that teaches people how to make AI slop, lots and lots of their clients get banned. Okay? So, we’ve had exactly zero people get banned. And that’s because we don’t teach people how to make AI slop. We teach people how to make really good content that happens to be AI assisted. Um, what kind of views do you call good views? It’s basically the right people who you’re solving a problem for, and they’d be very likely to be interested in buying a product or service from you. Um, Jana, thank you. Good night. Awesome. Janna, my pleasure, Dan. So, what did the VIP buy me? The VIP will be a training on Tuesday night. So, it’ll be Tuesday at 6 p.m. You’ll get 1 hour with me directly before the live training on Tuesday night at 6 p.m. That’s the VIP buyers. So, all of that information is on the marketing page. So, the sales page, it’s in the thank you page right afterwards, and it’s in the email that we send to you. Um, so yeah, like just please read your emails and you’ll know. Lori, that is a good idea. CPR merch. Yeah, could be. Uh, Christopher, 10:40 Tuesday Eastern. Can’t wait. Awesome, Christopher. Can’t wait as well. Good stuff. Jonathan, thanks uh Shane for going through all the comments. Appreciate your time. You got it, Jonathan. My pleasure. And guys, go to go.shane.com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. Will this Zoom be on replay? Yes, we will send out the replay probably in about 24 to 48 hours. We’ll send it out. Roy. Uh, yep. It will be on replay. Yep. Um, Chris, looking forward to the adventure ahead. Awesome, Chris. Gregory says, “Thanks.” You got it, Gregory. You got it, Chris. My pleasure for both of you. Sarah, sorry my sound isn’t working. How is it okay uh to get the niche validator? Yeah, we responded to your comment there, uh, Sarah. Uh, so you can just scroll up, scroll down or just look at your comment and we responded to it. The admins responded and that’ll be the niche validator. Sylvia, book the call. Uh, use the niche validator. Awesome. Looking forward to chatting. Thanks for everything. You got it, Sylvia. That’s great. Lori, what if I’m not offering any things? My niche is CPR and first aid. So, mostly it’s a service. Will I still be successful? Yeah, absolutely. I mean, there’s so many different things that you can uh do when it comes to uh CPR. Um, there’s a lot of different things that you can promote with that. There’s even people who get paid just to to teach CPR. So, it might be a type of thing where you, you know, you’d have to get certified for that, but yeah, you can absolutely get paid to teach that. Um, you could also just sell stuff related to CPR. Like you can sell, uh, you know, physical products on Amazon that are related to CPR. Um, like doing a um, uh, uh, you know, like uh, uh, uh, a machine that that resuscitates people. Steve booked. Curious to see how uh, your program is different. Familiar with others who are honestly terrible. Yeah. So guys, we’ve had a lot of people who come into the program or they, you know, they they book the call and they’re like, “I’ve tried other programs like this in the past. They weren’t good. I had a bad experience.” Um, and and those people are actually our favorite people to work with. Okay? Because it’s kind of like if you had a bad relationship, you appreciate a good relationship when you actually get one, right? People who’ve never had a bad relationship, maybe they don’t appreciate a good relationship as much. And it’s the same thing with coaching programs. If you’ve never had a bad experience with a coaching program, you’re not going to appreciate it when you actually see a top tier coaching program. Right? So that is exactly what we have. It’s the absolute creme de la creme, the best of the best red carpet treatment coaching program. And that’s what you’re going to see immediately when you get into the program. Okay? So we love people who are kind of skeptical like that. Um because when you join the program, you’re going to get absolutely blown away by how amazing and how professional we are and the results that we get people. Like I said that you saw all those community posts. People are just winning left and right. So yeah. By the way, guys, why are you why are you on the fence? If you’re on the fence, go ahead and comment in the chat. If you’re on the fence and uh uh you’re you’re thinking about booking a call, but you’re not 100% sure. Go ahead and comment in the chat exactly why that is. I’m serious about that. Tina says, “What about an entertainment niche YouTube channel with a small audience?” Um we do not help with entertainment channels. With that being said, if you’re talking about an entertainment topic, for instance, we have a client who teaches people how to get better at chess, you can talk because that’s a game, right? You you can talk about an entertainment related topic, but you have to do it in an educational way where you’re solving people’s problems. So, you can make your educational content entertaining, but we do not help purely uh entertainment channels. So, if that’s what you want to do, uh that’s we the this is not the right program for you. Okay. Um Sean says, “Thank you for this very informative presentation. It has given me some options to consider before I take the next step.” Awesome Sean. Um definitely some Yeah, I mean I think you should book the call, right? Just go ahead and book the call. Um a lot of these things, like I said, are timesensitive, but go ahead and book that call and we can answer any questions that you have or uh any questions that you have and any considerations that you have. Bonita says, “Money, honestly, guys, like, you know, money is really not that much of an issue. If we accept you into the program, it’s because we think that you have enough money and we and you have a a good idea, like a good niche idea where you can actually start making money and we can get you on a payment plan and then you can just pay it off while you’re making money. So, if you have a good enough niche idea, um, if we accept you into the program, we believe that you can actually get results.” Okay? So, like I said, we don’t accept everybody. We have a limited amount of people. So, there’s pretty much nothing uh to lose by booking the call, guys. Uh Cindy, too soon. Okay, fair enough. You can come back later and uh maybe join the program later. Uh Heidi, the money thing. Yeah, again, uh answered that question. Uh yeah, a couple different people. The money issue, like I said, um if we accept you into the program, like the call is going to be valuable and it is free. If we accept you into the program, it’s because we think that you’re, you know, have a niche and you’re the type of person who can actually get results and you should be able to make money and then you can pay us back with that money. So that’s that’s why we accept you into the program. We do have payment plans for people in that situation. So again, I think you should book a call. Go to go.shanmas.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. I booked, but I’m scared of not getting success from the effort and the cost. Um, that’s something we can help you with on the call, Amber. we can we can help explain uh explain through how it works. And once you really understand how it works, especially for your specific situation, your specific niche, you’re going to understand why we’re so confident about this because you’re not going to be starting off from the start line and doing an entire marathon. You’re starting off like 90% of the way through because we’re teaching you how you can teach other people to solve problems that you’ve already solved, right? So, with most business models out there, you’re starting from square one. With this business model, you’re already starting like 90% of the way through the race. So, you’re going to beat everybody else who’s starting at the beginning, right? So, Lori, thank you so much. What great information. Good night. Awesome. Lori, good night. Have a good one. My pleasure. Rosemary, have a call but no idea what to do. Good evening. Enjoy the Orient. Yes, we I am I am definitely enjoying it. Um, good good stuff. We can help you figure out what to do as well, Rosemary. Thank you so much. Have a good one. Dan, I joined the VIP. Is there more training coming up? Yes. 6 o’clock p.m. Eastern Standard Time on Tuesday. is the VIP session. Emily, laid off, pivoting, may not have the cash to do this depending on the severance. Totally understand, Emily. Uh we don’t want to put anybody in a bad financial situation. Um but if you do have the runway for it, um then we could help you out and if you have the the really good, you know, if we if you have a niche that we think uh would be successful on YouTube. Thank you, Shane. This is the best in the Shane is the best in the industry. Appreciate you, Salvador. You’re awesome. Uh, Cindy, want the call to be productive and need a little bit of time. Okay, fair enough. Yeah, do your research. Again, guys, I highly recommend looking at this thank you page, checking out all these. Do your research on that and that’ll be really good. Um, Cindy says, “Plan to awesome.” Tina, no, not a game. It’s a comedy type channel. Um, guys, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat. Um, so Tina, you could teach people how to do comedy. You could teach people like educationally how to do comedy. Um or or like something related to comedy, right? You um you could even teach in a comedic way, but it does have to be somewhat education related. We we don’t accept pure entertainment channels just very simply because it’s it’s uh way harder to get results for pure entertainment channels. So, we wouldn’t be able to give you the uh 90-day money back guarantee in that case. Um Christopher also signed up for a call and do not see an email with the bonus links. Spam junk checked. search entire email client nothing. Um yeah, so bonus link just uh we responded to your comment there if you want that bonus. Um and in terms of the email, if you’re really not receiving any email, uh and this is something that the admins should be posting, you need to email supportanehus.com with your name that you signed up with as well as the email that you signed up with. Okay, so again, email shane uh supportshane.com with your name and the email that you signed up with. Roosevelt, I’m in. Shane, payment plan is a gamecher. Awesome, Roosevelt. Love it. Love to hear it. Wendy, thank you. You got it, Wendy. My pleasure. Jonathan, thanks. Admitments. An email from an agent specifically with add to calendar link. I hope that’s enough. Yeah, I think that should be good. Chris, if I sign up, can I run two channels through the program at the same time? I’m a real estate appraiser with 30 years of litigation expertise, but I recently lost my wife. Oh, I’m so sorry to hear that, Chris. And I am starting a journey of rebuilding my life at 63. You can do two channels at once, Chris, but we don’t recommend it. We really don’t recommend it. We recommend that you focus your attention on one of your channels. So, a really good example of that is we had one client, his name is Dr. Clifford Stewie, and this particular client had like, I think, three or four different YouTube channels, and we identified that one of them had the best monetization capabilities. And we just focused on that channel, and we kind of ignored the other channels. and he was able to scale that business to six figures and then multiple six figures a year from that. So, um, highly recommend just focusing on one channel. With that being said, yes, you can, uh, focus on multiple channels in the program if you, if you really want to, you can. We just don’t recommend it. Kelly, uh, how much help can you provide to help a senior choose a niche? We’ve helped tons and tons of people, many of them were seniors, uh, choose their niches. So, that’s definitely something we can help you do. Again, just book a call and we can help you with that. Latoya booked. Awesome. Uh the call is with a staff member, Heidi. It’s with one of our coaches. Um they are YouTube experts as well, but the the call is with them specifically. They’re experts in helping you choose your niche. Um we train them extensively on how to help you do that. So they’re going to ask you a lot of questions, really dig into everything about your niche and about what your goals are. Again, where you are now, where you want to be. We’ll make a plan to get there, and we’ll see if we’re a good fit to work together or not. Um the niche app, uh Linda, just uh we responded to your comment there. admin Steven. So, just go ahead and uh click that link and uh we’ll we’ll help you with that. Linda, please show me the one for Claude. Um we just responded to your comment again, Linda. Uh make sure that you’re logged into Claude as well. Okay, guys. Few more minutes and then I’m going to jump off. All right, so a few more minutes for you guys to sign up. Go to go.shenhus.com/coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat, guys. Um this might be my last call before I sign off. It’s been an absolute pleasure chatting with you guys this evening and teaching you and answering all your questions, but we do need to jump off. It’s actually morning for me, but this evening for you guys. Uh, but I do need to jump off here in a little bit and I know that it’s probably getting late for you guys. So, I want you to uh be able to go to sleep. Um, Susan, have you ever had to refund someone based on your guarantee? Absolutely. Yeah, we have people that have life circumstances or they just think it’s not for them and that kind of thing. And we 100% honor the uh refund guarantee. Right. So if you want, you know, uh, like details on the refund guarantee and like to ask questions about that, then you can definitely ask on the call. U, but yeah, we 100% honor that. Um, if you know, sometimes life events happen. For instance, we had one guy who’s coming in uh, recently. Uh, he had a great niche. We were very excited to help him, but unfortunately he lost his job right when he came in. It was just happen stance. He just happened to lose his job. He didn’t really have the money to support himself at that time. And so we refunded him and it was it was no problem whatsoever. Right. Kelly, how does the 90-day uh again, you can get details on the guarantee on the call? Uh if you want to ask uh more more detailed uh examples, but uh thank you. This was very useful. Tanya, awesome. Dan, trying to book a call. No dates available. I think that we might be fully out. Uh but maybe there’s a few more. I think uh the admin is saying that there should be a time available for September 2 because a few people did drop out. So there should be a time available for September 2. So again, gosh.com/coaching. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. And again, guys, I am going to jump off here in a few minutes. Um, answering these last few questions. Ben, I’m about to retire. Every dollar counts. A payment plan could help maybe as a percentage of revenue for starters. We don’t do any type of revenue share type thing. That would be like a partnership with a business. We we only do that if we like get equity in the business. Um, so and we only do that if the business, you know, is already like a big business that might get end up getting sold in the future. With that being said, it’s we do something very similar to that where if we think that again, if you have a good niche, we’ll we’re willing to give you a payment plan uh with the 90-day guarantee because we know that there’s a very good probability that you’re going to be able to make money and you can just pay us back with the payment plan. So, we do something similar to that. Uh Dan just booked a call. Awesome. Dan Fabian, I make videos with AI for children based on Bible stories. Do you think that has potential? um if it’s purely AI, if it’s pure AI generated, then probably not uh the uh channel to work with, uh we’re not the people to work with. But if you’re using AI to help you make content, then that could definitely work. And you know, I love that niche as well. So that’s that’s amazing. Um but yeah, we’re uh hopefully that answers your question. Victoria, when will you be offering this again? We should be doing uh more live trainings in the future. So check back in the future with more live trainings. I can never promise, but um we basically do them when we have capacity, when we have people uh we have enough people that uh enough spots open that we can actually bring new people in. Kathy, other than the niche helper, what other bonuses do I need to check for my email? Um I think that that’s it. The niche helper, the YouTube niche growth AI, you will get that when you book a call and actually show up to the call. So, make sure you do book a call and then show up to the call and then ask about it on the call and you will get the niche growth AI. That’s going to help you monetize uh your niche, actually figure out how to actually make money from the niche. So, make sure you book a call to get that. Cindy, thanks for everything. You got it. Cindy, my pleasure. Kenneth, booked already. Listening to learn. Going to check email after. Thank you for everything. You got it, Kenneth. My pleasure. Lindsay, your patience is astounding. Thank you for your time and knowledge. Oh, I appreciate that, Lindsay. You’re awesome. Thank you so much, Nuri signing off. Thank you again. You got it, Nuri. My pleasure. Salvador, can you send an invitation to attend the VIP price for VIP, please? uh you just get it right when you sign up. So, it’s basically an option right when you sign up for the live training. It’ll uh redirect you to a page for the uh VIP and that is an option for people. Fabian says, “Thanks for everything. Waiting for the call tomorrow and see what we can work out. Have a great day. Bye.” Awesome. Fabian, you have a great day as well, guys. Absolute last call. Go to go.coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat. This is the last call. One thing I will say is I’m going to post the thank you pages uh in the chat. Um, so these, if for whatever reason you closed uh down everything, again, these thank you pages are very valuable. Make sure you actually go over these. There’s lots of really good material on these, lots of case studies, etc., etc. I highly recommend you go over that. And also, just make sure you follow the instructions. The video is not that long. It’s very short. Uh, the instructions are very clear. Make sure you follow those instructions cuz like I said, if you can’t follow those instructions, I don’t think we can help you, unfortunately. And that’s one of the things that we evaluate and we do know if you actually uh do that stuff, right? So, make sure you do that. So, I posted that in the chat. Additionally, um I’m also going to post the apply for the one-on-one YouTube coaching in the chat, too. So, I’m posting that right now in the chat. Uh if for whatever reason you’re mowing your lawn, you’re on like on top of your, you know, mobile uh lawn mower or you’re doing the dishes or you’re listening to this while you’re cooking dinner or something like that. If for whatever reason you couldn’t sign up uh while you’re doing it cuz your hands are just busy, uh maybe you’re driving for instance. Okay, be careful if you’re driving, right? Drive safely. But go ahead and copy and paste this link um and you will be able to sign up for it later. And additionally, you can just go ahead and screenshot this screen right here as well. Okay, so uh that is what you can do and then you can sign up later or let’s just say you tried to sign up but there wasn’t a good spot available. Again, check back try do it within the next 24 hours of course but check back maybe like 20 hours from now like tomorrow. see if there’s another spot available and if there is one, you can sign up then and you still get all those bonuses again as long as it’s within the next 24 hours. With that being said, guys, thank you so much. Appreciate you all. Uh, I’m going to be signing off for now. I did drop both of those in the chat for you so you can go ahead and grab those. You can just copy and paste them, save them, you can bookmark them, whatever you need to do, and then sign up later. And thank you so much, guys. Appreciate you. Have a good one. I’m gonna be jumping off now. Thank you, Stephen. Uh, thank you, Heidi. Thank you, Lindsay. Thank you, Mitch. Thank you, uh, Kenneth. Uh, uh, shout out to the admin team. Lindsay gave a shout out to the admin team. Yes, admin team is is great. You guys are awesome. Thank you for all you do. Ben, thank you. Bye. Uh, Rosemary, love your vids. Awesome. Rosemary, thank you. Latoya, thank you so much. Uh, Alexis, Kathy, Kenneth, Joel, Lisa, uh, Aaron, etc. Appreciate you guys. Raul, Opel, Claire, um, uh, Sean, Roosevelt. Thank you guys so much. Have a good one. Take care, guys. Bye for now. Take care.
-
I published 150 low content books on Amazon KDP and what have I got to show for it
Hello everyone and welcome back to Sparrow’s End Business Diaries. I decided it was about time that I made this video. I finally got to the point where I’ve published 150 books onto KDP that I am relatively happy with. It’s about time I took stock and asked myself the question, what have I actually got out of doing KDP and uploading those 150 books? There are so many opinions online about KDP about whether it’s all a massive con and whether it’s oversaturated and what type of books it is that you have to make now in order to make money. Most of those opinions are based on personal experience on people’s successes and failures and I just thought it was time for me to put my two pence worth in as well. I am going to start with a short little story time about my history with KDP and then we will get on to the juicy stuff in terms of what have I actually got to show for it. So, I first opened my Amazon KDP account back in 2021. I didn’t really do anything with it for I’d say 2 or 3 months and it was just something that I had seen on YouTube and thought, “Oh, that sounds quite interesting.” particularly the videos that were all about uploading notebooks because I love stationary and I just thought, “Oh, okay. That looks like something I can do.” Opened the account, did nothing, and then over the summer of 2021, I created my first notebook and I uploaded it and promptly just walked away from it and did nothing else. I assumed that if I made a sale, I would get an email. I’d get notified in some way like you do when you make a sale on eBay or on Etsy, but nothing happened. And it wasn’t until I got a payment, like a royalties payment email come through that I realized that something was happening that I had sold something. So, I went back on uh onto the dashboard and I could see that I had sold a couple of copies of well, I sold one copy and then I sold another copy I think like the following month. But I had sold a couple of copies of this notebook over that summer. So that made me think, okay, it’s real. You actually do get paid the money that you make and it is possible to make money. So I created in the September I created a small batch of notebooks. I cannot remember how many. You’ll have to go back to my first KDP income report um because I think it tells you something about it there. And I think it was in the October. So I uploaded these books at the end of September. And then I think in the October I earned about £10 from those notebooks, which again was just a lovely confirmation that actually you can make money and you do get paid the money. So over the course of quarter 4 in 2021, I made about £150, which is about £180 just from mainly those notebooks that I uploaded to begin with. And then I added some dated diaries, I think, and maybe a coloring book. I was really pleased with that. So during the course of 2022 and also 2023, I have just chipped away at KDP very very slowly, tiny little bit at a time. Some months go past and I don’t touch it or do anything. Other months, like May of this year, I set myself a little challenge um to upload a book a day in May. There is a playlist for that somewhere in my playlists if you want to watch it where I did upload more books than I would do usually. Most of the time KDP has been fitted in around all of the other things that I do online as well. My whole channel is me testing out loads of different online income streams and me kind of reporting back to you how I’m doing, how I’m finding things, and also how much money I’m making. And KDP just naturally became part of that group of things that I’ve been doing. So, it has just been tiny little incremental steps over quite a long period of time. But now I’ve got my 150 books up. I really think that it’s time for me to take stock and to evaluate what have I got to show for it and what am I going to do moving forward. So, I think the first thing we need to look at then is how much money have I actually made from the 150 books. I have got it written down in front of me, so I’m going to read it out to you. [gasps] Okay, so as it stands, I have made £1,233.97
in dollars. That’s $1,547.95.
That’s what I’ve made in royalties over the lifetime of me being on Amazon KDP. I have just got to the point where I’m making approximately £100 or £125 every single month from that catalog of 150 books. I’ve also looked at my year-on-year growth and I am currently on track to have made about 1,000 to,200 this year on KDP in dollars. That’s about $1,200 to $1,450. I have no idea how you would feel about that if they were your results. It’s impossible for me to say exactly how much time I’ve spent on it over the last couple of years. I know that there have been big gaps, big periods of time where I’ve done nothing towards it and other months where I’ve done a tiny little bit towards it. It has taken up a little bit of head space at times where I’ve been trying to sort of learn things. Overall, it’s definitely not one of my income streams that I have spent, you know, a lot of time on compared to others that I’m working on. So, what does that £100 or £125 a month actually mean to me? Well, £100 is my share of the grocery budget every single month in my household. So, the overall budget is £200. My other half contributes 100, I contribute 100. That mostly covers all of our groceries and toiletries and and things like that for the month. That is now covered. And that is covered pretty much passively. The only things that I sometimes do with books that are uploaded, so with my catalog of books, is I’ll sometimes go in and refresh and try out different keywords. I sometimes make adjustments to descriptions, but I mostly stick to a sort of minimal interference with them once they are up. And whilst I have started to experiment with ads a little bit, I probably haven’t spent more than $10 or $12 on ads, I don’t think, this year. I also I’m just at the lottery ads stage of things. So, I’m not having to um put a lot of work into setting up the ad campaigns either. So, I suppose what I’m saying is it is now making a significant contribution to my income. is covering one of my bills and is doing so in a very lowmaintenance way compared to my other income streams such as running a vintage shop on Etsy. That income stream is very active. I have to source stock. I have to photograph things. I have to list each and every item. I then have to package things up. I have to deal with customer inquiries. and just so so much more work goes into that than goes into maintaining my KDP income. So my judgment is that financially it has been worth it to establish this passive income stream and to be getting money from it consistently every single month of the year. I think also with the cost of living crisis that is affecting millions of people worldwide, having that extra £100 a month is just it’s so so helpful. And there aren’t many people that would turn down an extra £125 every single month. Now, besides the money, what else have I got to show you for it? Well, I would say that I have the pleasure of doing it. Like, I really enjoy the work. I enjoy the creativity of it from like a sort of a design, an art and design perspective. I really enjoy making the front covers, making the interiors. I’m beginning to enjoy the research process and sort of figuring out some different types of book that I can try and make. I also think that it has built on existing skills that I have and it’s also given me some new ones as well. And I think all of the skills that I kind of develop with KDP, they all kind of feed into all of my other income streams in some way, shape, or form. So, for example, learning how to research what types of books are in demand on KDP has also helped me to research what type of vintage items are in demand on Etsy. So, something that I’ve learned to do on KDP has now started to have an impact on my reselling business as well. And so everything kind of I suppose all merges together in this big melting pot of the things that I am now able to do that I couldn’t do before I started KDP or just wasn’t very good at. I think the other thing that it has given me is some confidence in my art and design work because the vast majority of my books make sales. particularly my scrapbook paper pads. My notebooks aren’t doing too badly and then one of the new niches that I have just released one book into that has made I think maybe about 20 odd sales already from that. So it has given me some confidence in my ability to do this and to earn money from it. However, I think the biggest takeaway from it, the biggest thing that I have got to show for it is this huge amount of potential for the future. There are so many things that I am now looking at doing next year in order to sort of build and grow my KDP income and other incomes as well. So for example, I have got at least two, possibly more, but at least two pen names that I am very, very tentatively at the moment taking steps towards growing into fullyfledged holistic businesses that sell other products, that have mailing lists, that have a marketing plan. and I’m really really excited to see where those things take me. I’ve also decided that I am definitely going to move forward with starting an online education business. It’s something that I have been putting off so much because of the nature of the subject um that I teach and also things to do with copyright and also there would be a conflict of interest with one of my employers with an exam board that I work for. You have to declare whether you are a publisher of any kind to them. And so there could be some problems there. And I have got to when I start this business make sure that absolutely every single element of it is completely original to me as far as possible. So I’m still a little bit wary of doing it, but I know that I’m ready to do it now as well. So huge potential with KDP and I’m really really looking forward to next year because what I’d like to do is to go from making £100 a month to making £250 a month which would be about quarter to a third of my like survival expenses. the amount of money that absolutely kind of I have to have every single month to pay all of my bills. That would be amazing and I do think it’s possible. So, there’s just all of this huge potential that I’m really really excited about for next year. Now, on the topic of education and teaching, I also have another idea that I want to run past you to see if anyone would be interested. I am thinking of creating a miniourse for KDP. Something like get off the ground with KDP is what I’m thinking at the moment. [laughter] Um, and it would be geared towards absolute beginners, people who perhaps are feeling a little bit overwhelmed by all of the information that’s out there that might appreciate a really kind of simplified syllabus to work through and who would like to work with me on that. is something where I can put into it everything that I have learned so far as a beginner at KDP and how I have managed to produce books that are good enough to get sales and how I have slowly and steadily built up this income stream for myself. It’s definitely not something that would be suitable for anyone who is already doing KDP and is already making, you know, $2 $300 a month from it. This is not for you. [laughter] This is definitely not for you. click off now. However, if you’re struggling to get that first sale or to just get going with it, then what I have in mind might be suitable for you. There is a link in the description box if you want to sign up and show that you are interested. Now, before you sign up, I would suggest that you do two things. First of all, go back through and watch some of my KDP videos. There’s ones on there about scrapbook paper. I’ve got some about using repper and some income reports. go back through those and just kind of check out where I am and what I’m doing with KDP. And then the other thing I would suggest as well is you go and check out some of my work from home vlogs so that you get to know me a little bit better because I’m the person you would be working with. And the reason why that is so important is that there was a metaanalysis conducted on all the different things that make an impact on someone’s learning. And in the top three was your relationship with your teacher. So it is really important that you choose the right person. And in the vlogs, you’ll get a much more natural sense as far as anything on the internet is natural of who I am and how I am, how I talk about things, my attitude towards things, because what you really want to do is find yourself a really good match. And if your goals and your ideas and the things that you want to achieve with KDP are nothing like anything that I’ve spoken of, then anything I come up with is not going to be right for you. we will not be a good match. But if you are interested, oh, and also those of you that were interested in a scrapbook minieries, if you sign up as well because I’m thinking that would make a really nice little mini course that is specific to scrapbook paper. So, if either of those two things sound interesting to you, then sign up using the link in the description box and I will use that to judge whether I think there is enough demand for me to put something together. And if there isn’t, no offense will be taken. I have got plenty of other things to focus my time and energy on. But if it is something that people want, then it’s something that I can very easily put together for you. Let me know in the comments below how your KDP journey is going and whether you think it is worth it or not. And I will see you again soon in the next
-
5 AI Art Side Hustles That ACTUALLY Make Money
Can I show you five different ways to make money with AI art that actually work and along the way teach you genius [music] new prompts for generating stunning AI images that you didn’t know? Well, that’s the challenge I’ve set myself [music] today. So, let’s jump straight into it. One, wisdom story videos. So, check out this YouTube channel. It’s just four months old and honestly, it’s pretty crazy. But, in less than two weeks of posting videos, they had their first viral hit. It was this video here. It’s basically a glorified show with AI art and an AI voiceover and it’s gotten over 2.4 million views, which is insane when you think about it. Because YouTube lets you make money from videos that you post with their monetization program, YouTube AdSense. YouTube AdSense is available in over 200 countries around the world and it lets you earn money by splitting advertising revenue with YouTube on your videos. On average, most videos on YouTube have a $3.30 to $4.40 RPM, which [music] by the way, if you’ve never heard that phrase RPM before, basically means revenue per mill, which in other words means revenue per 1,000 views. So, on average then, a video on YouTube earns $3.30 to $4.40 per 1,000 views that it gets. And so, if you do the math then, it means that on average we can estimate that a video like this which got 2.4 million views earned its creator $7,900 to $10,560. [music] And honestly, it could be even more because some videos on YouTube get an even higher RPM. I know that my RPM that I get for videos is well above $40. So, yes, if we just watch this video for a moment, you can see that it is super duper basic. It is just effectively a slideshow. It is a slideshow featuring AI art, which will just be generated with an AI art app like Midjourney and it’s had a filter put on top of it. And if you were to actually listen to this voiceover, which I’ve muted, it’s just an AI voice. And chances are the script for this video would have also been generated with ChatGPT, too. So, yeah, this is mostly just an AI-generated video. And well, admittedly, I got curious and I decided to come and see if this was the only channel crushing it creating these wisdom stories. And I quickly discovered that, nope, it is not. For example, take this channel here. This channel is just 5 months old and it’s hit over 100,000 subscribers. They make similar wisdom story videos using AI-generated art and voiceovers, and their videos get tens of thousands to hundreds of thousands to millions of views. [music] But that’s not all. Take this channel here. This channel is just 2 months old, but it’s already creating videos that are getting tens of thousands of views with some videos like this one that they posted just 1 month ago getting hundreds of thousands of views. And yes, because I know that somebody is absolutely going to go into the YouTube comments and point this out. To make money from your YouTube videos, your channel does need to meet certain thresholds. You need 4,000 watch hours and 1,000 subscribers. But, well, from my experience, once you get your 1,000 subscribers on YouTube, you’ve usually had to have gotten enough views that you’ll already have your 4,000 watch hours, too. And well, if we come to SocialBlade, you can see that in DreamSpark’s first month of posting videos, they gained 13,000 subscribers, which means chances are they reached the YouTube threshold for monetization within just days. So then, the question is this: How can you generate viral AI art that’s similar? It’s a good question. So, for this challenge, I’ll be generating my AI art with Midjourney as my app of choice. But, [music] you can use whatever app that you like. So, if you prefer DALL-E, you could choose to use that. Or if you prefer a free AI art tool like Leonardo, you could use that, too. Either way, it’s up to you. So, then, I set myself a challenge for this video, to create a similar picture here to this one. And so, to do that, I came and prompted Midjourney, and I described the monk that I wanted Midjourney to generate, including his age and pose. And I also specified the angle I wanted the image to be made from, and I specified the setting, and I described how I wanted the image to feel, and I also noted the quality that I wanted the image to be made in. And look, here’s the thing, right? Some people are surprised when I do what I did here, and ask for an image to be made with less detail. Most people assume that the more detail, the better. But, in my experience, lower detail can sometimes have advantages. So, for example, I think that it can create the feeling of an image being more mystical and calming, you know? Which is why I picked that. So, after that, I set the aspect ratio parameter to also be 16 by 9. The aspect ratio parameter lets you change the size and dimensions of the image that Midjourney [music] generates for you. And so, I picked mine to be made in 16 by 9, because on YouTube, the aspect ratio of a standard YouTube video that isn’t a YouTube Shorts video, is 16 by 9. And then, that was it. I let Midjourney go ahead and do its magic. Now, obviously, in practice, you would want to get Midjourney to do lots of generations for you to pick from, but for this video, I just did one, and out of these, this one here was absolutely the best in my opinion. I think it’s quite stunning. So, then, onto number two, create and sell pillows. So, yes, I think this is pretty cool. But, using print-on-demand, you can make and sell your own cool pillows that feature AI artwork. And there are two ways that you can make money doing this. The first is that you can come to a print-on-demand marketplace, such as zazzle.com or redbubble.com, where you can sell your AI art that you generate onto products that they print and sell, like pillows, for a profit. You just upload your art onto the website and you get paid a commission whenever it sells onto a product like a pillow. But, there is another way, too. You can also come to a general online marketplace like Etsy. On Etsy, throw pillows featuring cute artwork and patterns are also popular. [music] And so, here is what you can do. You can come to a print-on-demand app like Printify and then choose a pillow from the catalog to customize. Then, you just upload your AI art piece onto the pillow and then you can list your pillow for sale on Etsy using the Printify Etsy integration and price it for a markup price. And then, you can earn a profit each time your pillow sells. And I’ll show you something on Etsy right now. There is one style of pillow that is super trendy right now. And that is William Morris-inspired throw pillows. Some stores in this niche have made over a hundred thousand dollars in the past year just selling trending pillow designs such as this trending William Morris frog pillow here. So, if you’ve never heard of him before, William Morris is a historical British designer. He was very famous for revitalizing interest in traditional British style textiles through his artwork. And well, as you can see here on Etsy, when you create designs that look similar to the textiles that he designed, they look really amazing when printed onto pillows, which is why they’ve been so popular with customers. And I’ll tell you something, for better or for worse, Midjourney is amazing at taking inspiration from other artists, especially historical artists, and then replicating their style onto new images. So then, to make my own William Morris-inspired pillow, I first came to Midjourney and prompted it by noting William Morris’s name and I explained the type of image that I wanted and I prompted it with the style that I wanted and I added in the aesthetic and I also added in the prompt butterfly. Since, well, if you take a look at the best-selling William Morris-inspired pillows on Etsy, you’ll usually find that they’re themed around some sort of subject, such as, well, a frog. So, I thought that just as a fun example for this video, that I’d pick butterflies to be my subject. And then, that was it. I just went ahead and I let Midjourney do its magic and create my design. And honestly, I think that the results were pretty cool. And by the way, if you’d like to learn how I and others earn passive income every day from selling print-on-demand products, you should be sure to download a copy of my free print-on-demand ebook, The Six Steps to Six-Figure Online Stores Followed to Make Over $10,000 a Month. You’ll find a link to download my free ebook in the video description below. All right, then. On to number three. Create and sell Midjourney prompts. So, speaking of Etsy, did you know that there is a thriving market on Etsy for Midjourney prompts? Take for example, this set of three PDF files containing Midjourney t-shirt image prompts. The Etsy research app, Alora, estimates that this has made over $27,000. But, here’s the thing. It’s not just Etsy that you can make money selling prompts on. Nope, there is a dedicated marketplace to them called PromptBase. Here, you can sell prompts for any AI app, like Midjourney, ChatGPT, DALL-E, and even Leonardo. But, out of all of them, Midjourney is overall the most popular. To give you some ideas on what sort of prompts that you could create to sell, these prompt packs that I’m showing you right now are currently selling the best for Midjourney on PromptBase. You can see that they usually range from $2.99 to $7.99. Although, something that is interesting is that one of the most popular prompts on PromptBase is actually priced at $14.99, which isn’t actually that surprising when you think about it, given the fact that this prompt is going to save people a lot of money because they won’t have to purchase product mock-up photos, and they won’t have to take their [music] own photos, too. All right, then. On to number four. Storytime videos. So, this here is an example of a storytime video made with AI art for a YouTube channel called Whisper Diaries. It’s in one of the classic popular niches for storytime videos on YouTube, which is creepy stories. Now, creepy stories are a very popular niche for this because one, they can get huge amounts of views, but secondly, and probably most importantly, they can have very high cash earnings. On Reddit, a channel owner in this niche revealed that the average RPM is $11, which basically means that for every 1,000 views that they get, that YouTube pays them $11, which is actually pretty insane when you consider that the average RPM is about $3 to $4. And check this out. If we come on over to SocialBlade, you’ll see that each month, Whisper Stories usually gets around 1.2 to 1.5 million views, getting 1,408,000 views in the last month, which at an RPM of $11 is $15,488 just from YouTube ads. And again, just like with the Wisdom Story videos, these videos are just mostly AI-generated, too. They’re effectively a slideshow of AI art. And if you were to actually listen to the video, which I have muted, you’d hear that it’s just using an AI voiceover, and the stories themselves are probably also just generated with ChatGPT, too. And here’s another cool thing, too. If we go and do a search on YouTube, you’ll quickly find that there are lots of other new channels crushing it, too, in this niche, like Dr. Spooks. You can see that they started uploading videos just 4 months ago, and yet already, they’re now bringing in over 217,000 views a month, which at an RPM of $11 is $2,387 from YouTube ads. Now, of course, I do have to say, if you’re interested in doing this, you don’t just have to only create and post spooky stories. You can pick whatever story time niche that you like, but for this example for this video, I’m just going to run with spooky stories. And I’ll set myself a challenge to see if I can generate my own similar AI art picture of a suburban American house like Whispered Stories did here. So, first of all, I’m actually going to open up Midjourney settings. I’m going to switch back to their older 5.2 version, and I’m going to use the medium level of stylization for this picture. Because sometimes, as you will see, Midjourney’s older versions can sometimes be better at generating the type of art that you want compared to their newer versions. So then, after choosing those settings, I described the image that I wanted Midjourney to create for me, and I also described the architecture that I wanted the house to be in, and I described how detailed I wanted it to be, and I added in that I wanted it to have strong use of negative space. And that is because negative space, if you’ve never heard of that phrase before, means to have empty space around the focus of the image. And so, you can see with this picture here that the house doesn’t take up the whole picture, and there is space around it, adding to the creepiness. And so, in addition, I also added to my prompt the feeling I wanted the image to have, and I added in the type of lighting I wanted the image to have, and I also set its aspect ratio parameter to be 16 by 9. Since, again, standard YouTube videos that aren’t shorts are in a 16 by 9 ratio. And then, after that, I just let Midjourney do its own magic and generate four images for me, and the results that it created were pretty good in my opinion, especially variation one. Now, as I said, there is a reason why I switched back to using Midjourney 5.2. And it’s because if we come back and change it in the settings to the current latest version, which is version six, this is the results that it gave me using that version and the same prompt. You can see that it is drastically different, isn’t it? It is absolutely nothing like I wanted. So, if your AI image generator app has different versions, it is absolutely worth it, in my opinion, to play around with them. So then, on to number five, shower curtains. Yes, so just like the pillows, there are two different ways to create shower curtains using AI art that you can then sell for a profit to earn money online. The first is to come to a print-on-demand app like Printify that sells customizable shower curtains, and then upload the art that you generate onto it to make your own custom one to sell. You can then list your Printify shower curtains for sale on an online marketplace like Etsy. If you browse through the top-selling shower curtains on here, you’ll see that the best sellers usually average and range in price from about $50 to $70, such as this trending shower curtain here that is selling for $72, which means that this is an item that has very high profit margins. Because on Printify, you can buy shower curtains for as low as $28.56 with shipping costing an additional $5.29. And so then, as you can see, using an Etsy profit calculator, the profit margins, even after selling fees for this, are over 40%. But, that is not the only way that you can make money, too. Nope, you can also come on over to a dedicated print-on-demand marketplace like Zazzle.com or Redbubble.com. Shower curtains are a surprisingly popular product on these marketplaces. And one trick that you can do when you’re doing product research on Redbubble is you can sort designs by best selling to see what are the top-selling products. And doing this, we can see that this shower curtain here, featuring two cowboy cats in this cool vintage style, are one of the best-selling shower curtains on Redbubble. As you can see, part of the visual appeal of this is that it doesn’t look like a real image. It looks like it was photoshopped. So then, let’s set ourselves a challenge. Can we use AI art to create our own similar image? But, this time, we will keep the cool cowboy theme, but instead of theming it around cats, let’s instead theme it around dogs. And to achieve this, I’m actually going to go back into Midjourney settings and switch it again to be a different version. This time, 5.1. Because, as I’ll show you shortly, 5.1 is going to give us drastically different results compared to the other versions of Midjourney. So then, after that, I prompted Midjourney by describing the type of image that I wanted, and I added in the minimalism prompt so that we don’t get a complex scene, and I also noted the style that we wanted, and I also added in that it is photoshopped, and very importantly, I added in the prompt that it is fake. So that Midjourney doesn’t try to actually draw us a realistic-looking cowboy dog. And then, I went and then also added in the color palette that we want, and I also set the style parameter to be 500. You can choose anywhere between 1 to 1,000 for it. The higher the style, the more Midjourney will make the image look artistic in exchange for not sticking as closely to the prompt. And then, that was it. I just let Midjourney come and do its magic. And do its magic it did. I will freely admit that of the results, version two in the top right corner was slightly terrifying, but version four in the bottom right corner was very cool. And you see, here’s the thing about Midjourney, right? If I changed the version to be a different one, as you can see here, the results would have been drastically different, and not quite what I wanted. So, for example, version six created some very cute results, but they were too realistic. So, if the AI art generator you’re using has different modes or versions, don’t be afraid to switch them up.
-
08/28/2026 – PODshorts – AI Builds Short Podcasts That Pay Out $1032 A Day Agentic Automation
All right, we are officially live. Welcome, welcome, welcome everyone. Settling in the room is open. There you go. You see John here. Adam is here. Excited says Stacy. Devin is here. Amazing. Good to have you. Ollie is here. Mo is here. Tony is here. Thomas, amazing. Good to have you. Welcome. Let me know in the chat box as soon as you’re in if you can hear my voice and if you can see the screen. We’re going to cover something phenomenal. Honestly, this is something you’ve never seen before. But more importantly, there are some very big lessons I want to cover because it’s going to take your social media, more importantly, your entire business to a whole new level. You see, if you’ve been struggling to generate leads, clients, traffic, whether you’re selling an affiliate offer or an agency service, this is going to change the game for you overnight. And I’m not just saying this. I’m actually going to prove it to you on this very session. You’re going to see it with your very own eyes. Let me know in the chat box. First and foremost, once again, I see more people joining in. If you can hear my voice and if you can see the screen, then we’re going to dive right in and see. There you go. Rebecca saying, “Anthony, Jeffree in.” Amazing. Michael, good to have you. Stephan, good to have you. Amazing. All right, let’s go ahead and get right started. As you can see, AI builds a hyper realistic, literally hyper realistic, indistinguishable from real humans. a hyperrealistic podcast show that brings you buyers every single day. We’re going to explain exactly how that happens, why that happens, and how powerful it is, allowing you to generate mass following and massive engagement. And there’s an exact reason why that will happen, which we’re going to cover on this very webinar. Now, here’s the truth. Having an audience is by far the most profitable asset for any business. Once you have an audience, everything becomes easy. You have an audience you can post to. You can make, you know, sales. You can generate leads because you have people that follow you, that engage with you, that are looking forward to hear from you. An engaged audience is the life source of your business. And it should be your goal to build up an audience of people that are interested in what you do and what you have to offer. No matter what your business model is, an engaged audience gets you more leads, it gets you more sales, and it gets you a ton of engagement, which will get you more reach. Now, here’s the problem. Most people, and let me know if this sounds familiar, have no idea how to build a dedicated audience. And I don’t blame them. It’s becoming harder and harder and more competitive each and each year. Right? Tell me if this sounds familiar. Just give me a quick yes in the chat box if it does. You see, you’ve maybe bought, if you’re anything like me, some of the latest and most amazing agentic tools, video tools, content tools. you have it all and still have nothing to show for in terms of engagement, reach, virality, and more leads and sales, especially from social media. On top of that, you’re posting and you’re waiting and the views never come. And we’ve actually seen a lot of recent complaints come up, especially on Reddit forums, where people saying, “Hey, you know, dropping to zero views. I keep seeing the same complaint, no views. I’m literally getting, you know, zero views or under 100 views, and your follower count is not moving.” Now, if this sounds familiar, once again, just give me a yes in the chat box if it does. Because worst of all, if this is the case, that also means you’re not bringing in new leads or sales. No new leads today, no new sales today, no new link clicks, and zero payouts. No matter if you’re selling an agency surface, an affiliate surface, or whatsoever. Now, I want you to know that it’s not your fault, and we’re going to solve this on this very webinar. You see, even though the tools you have are great, and I love them, too. I use them all the time, there’s a significant difference that we need to understand. You see, the problem is most content tools, even though they do exactly as promised and create the most beautiful videos, they’re not necessarily designed to build you an audience. They’re designed to create amazing content for if you already have an audience. And that’s where the disconnect is. That’s why, you know, you can put out amazing content like a content factory, but you’re not generating any new followers. And that means you’re simply posting into the void. They can help you create videos, but you’ll be posting to nobody. And as long as that’s the case, those tools, you know, can’t get to their full potential because there’s nobody to show all the amazing content to. You need something else to first build up your audience quickly. And that’s exactly what Obby has solved behind the scenes. Now, he’s done it in an amazing way that is backed by proof, research, and the results we’ve seen from early users, beta testers that have never grown an audience before. They are crushing it. Now, we’re going to show you exactly why it works so well, how it works, and then on top of that, you’ll be able to use it immediately after this [clears throat] webinar. You see, podcast shows are the fastest way right now to grow an audience and get traffic and sales from day one. And this is something that so many people are overlooking. You see right here, earning 20K a month from Faceless AI podcast, over 5K or actually 10K on an AI podcast channel, over 7.8K of viral AI podcast channel. It’s a completely untapped niche that is absolutely crushing it right now, generating a ton of views and massive engagement. And if you’re wondering why why does it work so well, that’s exactly what we’re going to show you and prove to you on this very webinar. You see, if you go and look up and you can see the resources on this on podcastatlas.com, Riverside as well as search engine journal, which are all, you know, verified articles and great research statistics. Do podcast clips grow social account faster? And you’ll see yes 73% of listeners now find new shows through clips and accounts posting them grow 35 to 60% faster than standard content. Even further, how far does one podcast clip actually reach? A single 60-second clip typically reaches 10,000 to 50,000 organic viewers. That is insane. Now, social media heavily favors podcast content. We’re going to show you why and how that is. You can find all this data on the creator studio on the creator insider. If you look at bus sprout or bus sprout, all these data points are proving that in 2026 right now in this very exact moment, using AI podcast will accelerate your results in record time. Now, if we go a little bit further here, you’ll also notice that people that actually listen to a podcast, they are engaged. It’s not like just watching a little video clip and then scrolling by. When you’re listening to a podcast or watching a podcast clip, it’s generally a topic that you’re interested in. There’s some, you know, interesting topics or sometimes a little bit of controversy or just, you know, different opinions. It captivates the listener. And that’s why 44% of podcast listeners actually buy something that they hear on the podcast. And 74% of viewers give podcast clips their full attention. Now, that’s very rare on social media. And that’s why AI podcast are the most powerful vehicle to capture attention online. That’s exactly what Maria did. Literally two kids working the night shift and on her bus ride, she is managing her entire podcast from her phone and she’s crushing it with thousands of views daily. And we’re going to show you some examples of her channel in a moment. Now, absolute beginners left, right, and center are generating huge audiences using AI podcasts. And we’re going to show you exactly how they’ve done it. Because what if I told you that after this training, you will have a podcast show running without ever recording a word yourself. You’ll be generating over a 100,000 views or thousands of followers, thousands of link clicks, and consistent sales flow. Now, these are the types of clips that are known to generate millions of views online, easily replicated for verality, and actually presented to the right people that start following you because you’ll have a massive reach. Now, it will automatically turn those views into leads and sales while it’s added without you having to lift a finger. So, the best part is you don’t need to record anything yourself. You don’t need to go on camera. You don’t need to edit a single clip and you don’t need a following to begin with. And that’s where most other content tools fail. They assume you already have an audience and then great if you use it. You know, you can put out better content, more content for your audience. But if you don’t have an audience to begin with, that’s where you need what we’re going to show you right here. Now, comment yes if you’re going to stay until the end to see how this works. Now that you know what we’re going to talk about, now that you have a little bit of an introduction to what this is about, let me know. Give me a big yes in the chat box. We are live. The team’s here live. Ob’s here live. He’s going to do a demo here in a bit. We got some amazing examples. We got a amazing case studies, success stories. Honestly, everyone that is struggling to build an audience. Once you have this, you’ll be able to generate real and mass engagement of people following love with your content starting today. So, hey, lots of just coming in. All right, let’s go ahead and get started. Let secret number one that we’re going to cover is the instant podcast show. We’re going to show you how you can literally turn any topic that you type and turn it into a viral vined show that the algorithm actually goes out and push to strangers for free, allowing you to get free traffic 24/7. Now, second of all, I’m going to show you how to get weekly podcast income. How that traffic will turn into clicks and commissions every week with no followers and nothing of your own to sell. You’ll have people ready to buy practically overnight. And on top of that, because you’re on this webinar, we always do something extra special for the people here live. Grab this on this webinar. You’re going to get the most phenomenal biggest bang for your buck to start building an insanely large audience in a way you’ve never seen before, but only on this webinar. So, I hope you’re excited. And without further ado, let’s dive right into secret number one. In 2026, there’s been a huge update. Short form content is by far the fastest way to get seen online. Now, you can see this on YouTube’s official blog, Meta NewsWoom, as well as Hootsweet Research. All these sources attest to this. When you look up a short form video, the fastest way to get seen online, the answer will be yes. It is the only format that major feeds still push to the people who don’t follow you. Which means brand new people get to discover you. You get to reach people. So your brand and your offer and your products get into the hands of people that don’t know you exist yet. And around 200 billion views a day are shared across shorts on reals and Tik Tok. Meaning a brand new account, even if you’re a complete beginner, can reach strangers on day one. You can see right here, short form video is the fastest way to get seen online because major social media algorithms push these brief clips to wide audiences who do not follow you yet. So, if you want to grow an audience and reach people, you need to publish short form content. These are short vertical videos. Now, here’s the problem. We see people, and again, let me know if this sounds familiar. Even though they’re doing exactly that, they’re uploading short videos. They’re using, you know, different types of AI tools to generate these short clips, posting it on Facebook, on Instagram, on LinkedIn, on YouTube, on Tik Tok, you name it. and they’re barely seeing new engagement and followers. And that’s because here’s what they don’t tell you. And this is extremely important and nobody’s talking about this. You see, there are two types of content. And most AI tools, if not all, only create one of them. You see, you have audience building content. This is the type of content that they’re strangers into followers. This content is specifically designed to make people follow you and come back for more. On the other hand, you have audience nurture content. This simply speaks to the people that are already following you. It’s useful, but it’s not designed to grow or get more people in. It’s just designed to give more to the people that already follow you. Now, answer the following question. Which type of content will get dedicated followers? Is it A, a person listening to a short podcast clip on a topic they care about, maybe mentioning a product while they’re at it as well, or is it B, a person just watching a short promotional video about a product, more like an ad video or an ad commercial? Which type of content will get a dedicated follower? A podcast or just a promotional video? There you go. I see a a a a across the board. It is most definitely a podcast known to captivate audiences and turn them into followers because they want to hear more of it. They’re interested in it. It talks about, you know, the topics that they care about. And this is not just something we’re saying. It is proven that one in three viewers goes on to follow the show. One in every three clip viewers goes on to follow the show. These clips don’t just collect views. They build audiences that come back and that’s why brands are pumping over 2.86 billion into podcasts just last year because they know the significant growth that it brings. Now clips, you can see right here are now the number one way that people generate views. You can see right here, clips on social become the top podcast discovery tool. It is the fastest way to get discovered by new people and actually start building an audience. And the reason it works so well is because it helps people stay longer on the platform. And that’s exactly what social media wants. If it’s up to them, you’re glued to your phone 24/7. And a podcast on average makes you stick around longer than just a little video clip or promotional video. And that’s why social media loves podcast content. And again, that’s not just something we’re saying. Everything we’re telling you is something we’ve researched, tried, and tested. And you can see it right here. Why do platforms push podcast clips more? The watch time is the main reason. Two people talking holds a viewer far longer than a scripted post. And 47% of the podcast audience now watches it on clips only. Meaning social media loves it when you produce podcast content because it holds the attention of the person longer. And longer attention meaning more eyeballs on social and that’s what they want. meaning they’ll give you more reach because you’re able to keep people on the platform longer. It helps people longer on the platform, which is what the social media wants. Let me know if this makes sense. This is why platforms will reward you with more reach. When you produce AI podcast clips or podcast content, they see, hey, this type style of content allows us to captivate people longer on the platform. Let’s push it to more people. And this is happening over and over again. Real accounts are getting real results and even up to millions of views. And all it takes is this. The fastest way to build a dedicated audience is doing or leveraging viral AI podcast clips. You choose a trending topic. This can be any anything. One of our clients has a podcast on gardening. This can be on weight loss. The algorithms will place it in front of the right people. They know who likes what based on their feed. You just need to create the podcast clip around it. From there, you create the high-quality podcast video. You upload it and literally watch it take off, generating more views and more engagement than any of your auditor content that you’ve published thus far. Now, you might be wondering, if this works so well, then why is not everyone doing this? Now, first of all, the people that are doing it are absolutely crushing it. And I’m actually going to show you a few in a second. But second of all, building a real podcast is a wall most people never get over. The ones that do, they become wildly successful. But most of the times, setting up a podcast is really hard. Now, before AI, you need, you know, a microphone, booth, studio, editing softwares, camera, lights, backdrop, you name it. At least, you know, $2,700 upfront at the bare minimum. Now, even with AI today, it is still complex and nearly impossible. Honestly, we’ve tried it with the latest AI tools, and it’s just not designed to do it. Every one of them will bill you over and over again per usage, per month, per credits. You need the script writer, the voice cloner, the video after, the audio cleanup, the clip editor, the auto captions, the thumbnail designer, theuler, the bio, and the link page. And all of them are not trained for podcast. So, you need to know how to navigate all these tools with all these subscriptions. It is the absolute worst. And even if you manage to work with all these tools, you still need to research the market every single week. Hunt down what the trending topics are that people actually want to listen to. Write the hooks, write the scripts, write the angles, cut the episodes, caption it. Now, this is so complicated. And if you’re selling an offer, you also need to wire your links into all of it. Now, all of this hassle is about to change. You see, Obby sat down and wondered, “How do I make an agent that can generate 247 traffic by publishing hyper realistic podcast? owning your own podcast that actually allows you to generate real engagement that mass following in record time. Now, before I show you how it’s done or before Obby comes in and actually, you know, runs the demo, who here would actually like to see some samples of podcast cap clips that you’ll be able to create? Let me know in the chat box. Who here would love to see some samples of the hyper realistic AI podcast clips that you’ll be able to create? Just dropping a quick yes in the chat box and then after that we’ll go into an amazing demo. There you go. Yes. Yes. Yes. Show me. Show me. Show me. Awesome. So, I got tree clips. These are from actual users that are crushing it right now. Beginners that are seeing phenomenal success. I think two of them I actually saw your names are here and I’ll talk more about them in a second. But here’s what they have been creating. These are hyperrealistic AI podcast created on complete autopilot. So, let’s actually play the first one here. Most beginners chase big online income ideas, but the real tension is getting that first $100 with something simple. What’s the clearest path to make that first $100 without over complicating everything? The clearest path is to validate one simple offer first. Ask potential customers through a quick survey or direct conversations. Then promote a straightforward offer to your Wow, who here is loving this already? Let me know in the chat box. Do you see how realistic this is? a real conversation, a professional setup, a topic that interests people. There he goes. If you were saying, “Wow, this looks better than I expect.” Let me go ahead to the second one right here. Wildlife conservation is often treated like a charity case, but if it’s really an essential service, who actually pays for it when donations from animal lovers clearly can’t carry the whole system? Government sources, private foundations, and revenue like ecoourism usually pay for it. That mix matters because conservation groups can diversifi. Wow, do you see the quality of this? A serious topic that interests the right viewer. You’ll be able to set up such a phenomenal podcast show that not only attracts the right people but also generates massive amounts of attention and followers because they love the type of topic. They love the conversations. They love the discussions, the controversy, as well as the topics. A serious podcast on a trending topic researched for you by agents and generated for you by agents. Let me show you another one. This one’s actually from Priya. And Priya is crushing it right now. Let me actually play it first. Most people think staying fit means strict schedules and perfect routines, but that idea falls apart when real life gets busy. A better approach is making fitness fit you instead of forcing yourself into unrealistic habits. You do not need hours in the gym every day to make progress. You can work out effectively in 15 to 20 minutes and sometimes even small changes to Wow. This is just a snippet of a podcast. And again, this one is from Priya. I think I actually have one of her testimonials here. Priya was fearing having zero followers. She literally said zero followers when I started. That was my whole fear. Like nobody would listen and you know what if this all for nothing in on day three, literally in three days. So on day three, she generated 28,000 views right here. Day one, nobody knew my show existed when I got started. The clips didn’t care. The algorithm started pushing my third clip to 28,000 strangers. And then she said, “You don’t need an audience to begin with. This format brings you one.” She started from zero. That last clip that I showed you was hers in the health niche. She’s crushing it. Let me know who is loving this already. Now, like I said, you have so many people crushing it right here. Also, uh Jolene crushing it in the gardening space. Um right here, my gardening show posted 41 clips in one month. Already made over $52 as well. You know, she just recently started monetizing. I told her she should be doing it way longer. Um, but yeah, she is crushing it right now. Now, and she says, “Yes, I’m bragging. Anyone can do this.” And this type of content is designed to grow an audience, not just to put more stuff out there, but to actually build a following. And that’s what this does. Now, let me ask you a question. What if you had access to the latest AI technology that can create a viral podcast show for you? Literally plan it for you on all platforms, the right topics, the right engagement, place it in front of the right people, and make it hyper realistic that it’s, you know, indistinguishable from real humans. Now, if you had that, knowing how viral these formats are, knowing that social media prefers these formats, and knowing that this allows you to build your audience faster than anything else, if you could have access to these viral podcast clips in just minutes on any given topic, do you see yourself growing your business faster than ever before? Let me know in the chat box. Do you see yourself growing your business faster with an AI podcast that you can set up in any niche? Monetize, have full support in whether it’s the financial niche, the pet care niche, fitness niche, no matter what it is, you’ll be able to set this up in a matter of clicks and an AI agent will do it all for you. So, that being said, comment yes. And those of you that say yes, comment, “I want this because that means Obby will come in and actually show it to you right here on this very webinar.” Comment I want this in the chat right now. Who here would love to see how you’ll be able to do exactly that? Comment, “I want this.” I see lots of people commenting already. So, that being said, Obby, go ahead and take it away. All right, folks. Welcome to Pod Shorts. In this short demonstration video, I’m going to show you how you can use Pshots to create short form podcast videos that you can publish on social media on Instagram, Tik Tok, YouTube, Facebook, and drive tons of traffic to your affiliate links, earn commissions. But not just affiliate links, you can also promote your Shopify e-commerce store. You can promote your local business. You can promote your service based business. You can literally promote anything and everything that you like using these short form podcast video. Now the reason why we are pushing for podcast video is because people love these kind of videos. The amount of views and engagement and video retention that you get on short form podcast videos, especially on Instagram and Tik Tok, is insane because these are natural human conversation based videos where people want to watch the video, want to listen to what’s being told in the videos. And because these videos can be so pitchy, so salesy, people often click on the link. Now how p charts work? It automates the entire thing using AI agent where you don’t have to do any of the work. So once you log into dashboard you can see trend radar blueprints episodes characters and your calendars analytics and integration. Now what trend radar essentially does it finds trending podcast on YouTube. So YouTube has long form podcast. We’re going to find trending long form podcast and what we’re going to do is we’re going to create a blueprint which means we’re going to replicate the hook, the tone, the idea of what makes that podcast video get tons of views. So let’s start with our campaign name for the trend. Let’s say demo one. And we’re going to do weight loss. Now this is the niche that we want to be. This is the country. It is a language. Now you can pick any country. You can pick any language, right? So if you want to do Spanish, German, Portuguese, you can do all of that. And again, we can put weight loss and the keyword here and click on search trends. Now what this is going to do, it’s going to go on YouTube and start searching for trending podcast in the weight loss niche where people are talking about weight loss. And then what we can do is we can create something called blueprint. Which means it’s going to analyze this video, the podcast video and see what was the hook, what was the marketing and the sales hook, what was the tone, how many characters were talking, was it funny, serious or boring. It’s going to analyze all of that thing and then we can create our own podcast. It’s not going to copy the content. Understand? It’s only going to copy the DNA of this video. So these are all the podcast that are trending right now. So if you look at this one, it has 519 views, it has 750K views, 78K views, 210K. Now if I click on details, I can see all the detail. The engagement is really high. Recently like it’s a very new video, 13 August and it’s doing really well. Format fit is pretty decent. Niche fit is 100%. Right? So it talks about all of these details. So, what we’re going to do is click on create blueprint and we’re going to click create. Now, what this is going to do is going to go find out this video, transcribe it, understand the DNA, the the hook, the style, the marketing, the the way of speaking, the way of uh presenting the content, and then it’s going to create that DNA profile, the blueprint that you can then use to create your own podcast. And now you can use the same blueprint to create podcast not only in the weight loss niche but you can create in any niche you want. So if you see that this video is performing really really well means its hooks are doing well its way of presenting information is doing well and it’s getting a lot of clicks on its link. It’s making a lot of money to the publisher. You can just copy that blueprint into any of your niche. So you can take this video and then create, you know, uh, pod shot podcast videos about plumbing, about lawyers, about your e-commerce store, your pizza shop, pretty much anything using the same DNA and it will get you the same amount of engagement, same amount of views. It will get you better ranking. It will get you better video retention where people actually end up watching the entire video. and it will get you better clicks on your bio page or on the link in the description resulting in more sales. Now as you can see the blueprint is created and now you see something similarity here. This is one of the video I created a blueprint for earlier as well about finance and this is about weight loss. If you look at the thumbnail they have similarities right? Anyways, I just wanted to point out now if you click on details, you can again see all the details here. The host, you can see the segment structure, gold, open hook, host, brief platform, format, all these things it has understood and created about it. Now, if I go here, I can delete this or create episode or I can just go back here in episodes and start creating my episode. Now, episode essentially means creating your short form podcast videos that are going to be published. So, we’re going to engage an AI agent or creator agent to start building that and we’ll just give them some details. So, I’m going to create this campaign name called weight loss niche is also weight loss blueprint. So, I’m going to select the blueprint long form expert teaser cold opener. This is the weight loss uh blueprint that we picked. want to create videos for uh North America in English. But again, you can pick any um country, any language that you want. Duration, we want like 300 seconds. So 300 seconds is about a 5 minute long short video. Now what we can do, ideally I would like to keep it shorter. So I’m going to do like 2 minutes long. So I’m going to do 120 seconds. And there we go. And I’m going to create, let’s say, three videos. Let’s do that. So, we’re going to create three videos. We can have one host, two host, three host, or up to four different host. And this is the monetization URL. So, I’m going to put my affiliate link here if I’m promoting a product or um I’m going to put my e-commerce website, my uh service business website, my client’s website, whatever I want the traffic to go to. When somebody watches my video and they click on the link, I want them to go to this link where I’m going to be selling my product or my service or getting, you know, uh, form submissions, anything. The end goal is is what we’re going to do. Now, next we’re going to do is angles. So, AI has the agent has already created a couple of angles for us. So, we can use the invisible calorie audit. We use why your body fights back maintenance problem. So I’m going to do like buy your body fights back. It’s like that’s a good hook too. If you don’t like any of these hook, you can click on refresh and it’s going to give you new hooks as well. But these hooks have been created based on the blueprint that we created. So these are guaranteed to get you higher views or better retention which means the algorithm is going to push you more. Now there are two hosts. You can pick from the host that you have already created the characters or you can create a new character. So you can create a character here or you can just go here and create a new character. Let’s say I want to use the first host as John and for the second host I want to create a new host. Now I can generate a character or I can upload my own picture. So if I upload my own picture it’s going to create a character like this my own character with my own voice. And if I create generate I can do go here call it max. I can give some essence appearance and then I can select voice. I can pick 11 voices. I can use my own custom voice. I can clone my own voice. Right recording and I can use our own AI voices. Bunch of AI voices that we have. Now let’s say I want to use Noah. I can preview the voice as well and then click on confirm. That’s the voice. Gender is male. So I’m going to click on generate character and start generating character. And as you can see Max is created. So I’m going to select Max as the second H. And then I’m going to click on continue where I can see the script. Now the script is written in real time by our script writing agent. So he’s writing all the script. Again you can customize and change the script uh in whatever format you want. If you don’t like the script, you can regenerate it. But we’re just going to go ahead with this because this is really really well written script based on the blueprint, the DNA of a trending podcast that we created. Now what this did, it created a long script for a bigger podcast. And then from that long script, it created these three short scripts for the short podcast videos that we’re going to generate. So this is going to be the title. This is going to be the hook. And this is going to be the short video script that we’re going to use. So it’s created all these three scripts for us for the three video that we wanted to create. And we’re going to click on continue. And here we go. Now I can schedule all of them right now. I can manual schedule them. what date and time, how many times they need to be posted on which account they need to be posted or I could just schedule them later. I’ll have them created and I’ll schedule them later. So, I’m going to do that and click on continue. Now, what it’s going to do, this is the background music. I can change the background music to whatever I want or I could have no background music. And of course, you can preview all the background music here. We’ve got tons of them. and then click on create and it’s going to start creating these clickshot podcast videos for us. And once these videos are ready, of course, we can start modifying them um adding customizing whatever we want. Essentially, you don’t really need to do it because the AI is so so freaking good right now. Like these videos are perfect, especially because these videos are built and created based on the blueprint of a trending video. So they are guaranteed to get you views. They are guaranteed to get you higher retention. They’re guaranteed to get the algorithm, whatever algorithm needs to push your video to more people, to newer audience. Even if you don’t have any followers on your Instagram or Tik Tok or YouTube account, even if you don’t have any followers, the algorithm will push these videos to new people. So you get visibility in your own niche, in your own demographic and your video starts getting higher views, starts getting more clicks, more engagement, more comments, likes and shares. And that in turn gives algorithm better signals to keep pushing your videos and you can get thousands if not hundreds and thousands of views in your first couple of days using Pod Shots because of this incredible feature of Blueprint. the DNA that we extract from what’s already viral, what’s already trending. And when I say viral, I’m talking about something that’s recently been trending in less than 7 to 10 days, not something that was trending 10 years ago or 2 years ago or something like that, right? So, it’s generating these videos right now. And then once these videos generated, we can start customizing and editing them. And as you can see, the video is ready today. So, what we can do is we can download the thumbnail. The thumbnail was also created or just go in and start editing the video. Now the video editor that we have comes with a timeline editor and you can preview the video, you can see short real, you can um Instagram post, you can see the YouTube version of it. You can change this video into any uh platform that you want. And then you can preview the video and see how cool the video looks, how realistic the video looks. And there’s a transition between the first guest and the second host that be included. And then you can go ahead and you know modify everything the way you prefer to do it. Now what you can do is you can upload your own uh media to it. You can generate using AI. You can add text captions. You can do uh voice over. You can change the voices. You can again change to the voice that you use. You can clone your voice again. Um, you can add different shapes, you can add different properties, elements, uh, transitions. You can select whatever clip you want and you can add transitions and animations to those clips. You can add an intro and outro credit. You can add subtitles. So, we have a lot of styles that are pre-added. So, you can pick any of these styles or you can create your own custom style and add subtitles if you want. And if you want to add another video that you recorded, you could do that as well. Could be a camera and mic or just audio. And once you’re ready, you can save it as draft. It start rendering the video. And we’ll start rendering the video. Now, once the video is rendered, the next step is if you have it already um scheduled it. In our case, we scheduled it later. So, what we can do is go to calendar and then we can schedule and we can pick the episode whichever we want the weight loss from the weight loss campaign. We can pick whatever content because the content is still rendering. It’s not showing up. And then we can pick the date and time and select whichever platform we want to publish to. And we can say schedule post and it will get scheduled and published and it will show up right here like you can see. And again if you go to the characters tab you can see all the characters that you have created. So I’ve cloned myself. I have one of my hair. The Jones two Jones that I created. The max character that we just recently created is here. And then in the analytics you can see all the engagement and everything that is already here. Everything is ready for you to um copy and see the engagement for you. Now in the integration tab, you can connect all your social profiles as many as you want. You can connect your 11 app laps as well if you want to do that. And uh that’s pretty much it. You can see all the episodes that have been created, all the campaigns that have been created. And you can start creating multiple of these videos and publishing these videos every single day on your social media platform and you’re guaranteed to get tons of views, tons of engagement and turning that engagement automatically into sales because again let me remind you one of the most powerful feature is the blueprint feature which helps you replicate the DNA of a trending video of a viral video. So your podcast are not just random podcast that of course are going to get a lot of view, but your podcast are supercharged podcast. These podcasts are going to get you tons and tons of more views. If you have any questions, feel free to reach out to our support team. We’ll be happy to help you. Wow. Wow. Wow. Who here absolutely loved what they just saw? Let me know in the chat box. Who here loves how easy it is to create a hyper realistic podcast? Let an agent do all of it for you. Let me know in the chat box. And let me tell you, because you’re on this webinar, you’ll be able to do this in an even simpler way because you’ll be able to take advantage of everything that allows you to do this in a click of a button a million times faster simply because you were smart enough to show up live. Let me know in the chat box who here loves what they just saw and wants to have access to their own pod shorts right now. There you go. See lots of just coming in now. Again, this will allow you to finally start building a big audience on social media in a fun way where people actually, you know, follow you because you’re dropping really interesting content. Now, on secret number two, I quickly want to go over how you can actually turn this into weekly podcast income, which is fairly easy now that you’ll be building a large audience. You see, with Pod Shorts, you can instantly get paid online. You know, we have Priya on day three already reaching well over 28,000 people and that’s quite common. This type of content just reaches virality really, really quickly as you’ll see happen to yourself as well. And that’s why with a podcast show, you can start creating instant income stream by either selling your affiliate offers. You can get paid for selling your own products and services or maybe coaching. get paid by brands because once your show starts getting traction, people will want to put ads into your podcast. That’s very common as well. And on top of that, you get paid to even run them for clients. There are lots of businesses that will love to be featured in a podcast or have one of their own, but have no idea how to get started. Now you’ll be able to generate 24/7 free traffic filled with highquality buyers from all these platforms that are getting billions of users and views daily. Now all it does
literally with just one show it will publish into every feed that matters. Your show will immediately generate Tik Tok traffic, Facebook traffic. On top of that, it will generate YouTube traffic, LinkedIn traffic, Instagram traffic. Everywhere where your audience is, your platform will reach them. Your podcast will reach them because that is how thought Shorts is designed. A spiderweb of generating massive traffic and engagement to build you an audience. The one thing that finally allows to sell your products and services a whole lot quicker. And you can also use it for clients. Whether it’s an other affiliate, a course creator, a coach, an agency, a beginner, small business, an e-commerce website, any type of person, you can set up a podcast for them and watch them grow or mention their name inside your podcast and watch them get a lot of traction and followers. You start controlling the traffic, making you a super valuable and actually a high asset to any type of business. Now, let’s do the math. Let’s say you just push 10 clips a day, which is completely done for you with Pod Shorts. Now, 30 days, that already is 300 clips a month. 300 podcast clips. The amount of traffic you’ll be getting from that is insane. Now, let’s say to be very conservative, each clip gets you 500 views, which is kind of the bare minimum with this type of content. Now, from there, that means you’re generating 150,000 eyeballs a month. Imagine 150,000 views. Now, this will turn into a ton of traffic, clicks, followers, engagement, leads, clients, and sales. It’s simple math, and that is what’s waiting on you. The moment you have pod shorts, you’ll be immediately seeing results by simply posting these pot shorts to socials completely done for you. And watch these views rake in a ton of engagement, sales, and followers. And when you start generating views like that, you can even get paid by platforms to create videos. You will start getting monetized simply because you’re generating those amounts of views. You start getting paid simply for uploading. Not even selling a product or service. Just for the mere fact of uploading a podcast clip and getting views, you start getting paid per view. Now, anyone can do this even if you have zero followers as we speak. Now, let me know in the chat box, do you now see how owning a show like this brings you traffic and sales every week? Whether you’re selling affiliate offers, whether you have a link in your bio to your website, to your coaching offer, whether you want to do sponsor slots where you let businesses mention their product in your podcast, let me know in the chat box. And mind you, we’re doing amazing support like Obby said, handholding training. But honestly, the agent plans out your entire calendar for you with the hottest and trending topics, making sure you have mass engagement no matter what. Even if you’re a complete beginner without any tech skills, let me know in the chat box. Comment yes if you can see how owning a podcast show like this brings you traffic and sales every single week. Because that’s exactly what’s going to happen when you have direct special access. You see, you’ve seen what is possible. Who here wants to wake up tomorrow with your show already publishing while you slept? Meaning while you slept, it has gone out and found the most viral topics that people actually want to hear more about related to your industry, related to what you have to sell. It has generated human and realistic avatars, published the content, generated views, generated engagement, and generated clicks that leads to sales. Comment me if you want that to happen to you. We’re going to show you exactly what you’re going to get and how that’s going to happen literally overnight. There we go. I see lots of me coming in. So, without further ado, let’s go ahead. I see John, Anna, Stacy, uh Melissa, Robert, Thomas, lots of me. Let’s go ahead and dive right in. Now, first of all, you’ll be unlocking right off the bat a Paw Shorts premium account. This means you’ll have the AI build out the show for you. You get a seven agent AI machine that immediately can generate five different shows up to 500 clips each. That is already more than enough than start dominating. But it gets even better. On top of that, you have the cast studio with the AI host allowing you to turn the host into an actual clone of you, yourself, or any other person. Now, where it gets even better, you’ll also have the ability to have up to four voices in every episode. It can be a two-person podcast, a threeperson podcast, or even more versatile and dynamic, a fourperson podcast. Now, these tend to do really well because they’re more opinions, more discussions, more topics, and it keeps the viewer engaged. Now, if that’s not enough, you have the AI actually find you what is about to take off. You see, you want to make sure your topics are not only related to what you have to sell your industry and your niche, but it’s also something that people want to hear regarding that topic. And that’s why the trend raider will go ahead and find the most hottest and related topics to your niche and create a massively viral podcast around it. On top of that, you have the blueprints from shows that are already working. This is what Obby showed you live on the demo. It will actually go and find these most successful podcasts out there and mimic the exact blueprint and framework that makes these shows so successful. Now, furthermore, you have the variation engine. So, per platform, it cuts up the podcast nice and easy to consume and it goes ahead and turns all that attention that you’ll be generating into income. You’ll have a hosted bio place page plus offer rotation plus clicks. Meaning if you’re selling multiple offers regarding that podcast, maybe one time you’re talking about a certain product and another podcast you’re talking about another product, your bio link will rotate across these offers. Meaning every time people go and look up the product on your profile that you’ve been talking about in the podcast, they see the right offer, allowing you to get sales effortlessly. because people that come and click from a podcast are the most pre-sold buyers. Now, furthermore, you have the voice, video, and text AI without any API keys necessary, allowing you to get started right away. You’ll have six of our most valuable launch bonuses included, meaning we’ve already taken 50 proven shows ranked, ready to be deployed, ready for you to actually scale upon. We have the first commission fast track where we show you exactly how to take your first show and instantly start generating commissions and sales for your offers. And we’re going to add you to our show owners community. This is a dedicated community of people that run AI podcast. And we’re going to show you and introduce you to that community and show you how you’ll be able to crush it as well. Now, before I continue, let me know in the chat box who here is absolutely loving everything they’re getting so far. We’re giving you exact foundation that will allow you to succeed with this no matter what. Now, we’ve already seen this across all of our users, but I can’t wait for you to see success as well. Let me know in the chat box who here is loving everything they’re getting so far. And if you are, I see lots of yeses coming in. It’s about to get even better because we’re going to make sure you have full training, 247 support, and all the updates will be immediately included into your account. Now, speaking of which, here’s why that matters. You’ll be able to go from where you are right now to generating raving fans. Even if you’ve never had social media followers before, even if you’ve never posted online before, you can open up a faceless account today, start an AI podcast, and start generating massive followers simply because of the highly viral trending content, the topics, and extremely realistic and interesting conversations that you’ll be able to publish on complete autopilot. Now, because you’re on this webinar, I see a lot of people already asking for the link. We’re going to do something phenomenal. You see, if you know us on the webinar, we always give away the biggest bang for your buck, the biggest discounts, but also all the upgrades that allow you to make an absolute home run with this. And today, we’re going to give you the entire webinar bundle at a very special discount, but only for the people on this webinar, which is you. Meaning when you grab this today, you’re not just getting the premium account. We’re also going to add in the scaling account. Now the scaling account is extremely important because this instantly allows you to have over a 100 channels which allows you to have over 100 income streams. You can see a finance channel, dog training channel, the sleep better channel, the golf mastery channel. All of them can have tens of thousands of subscribers. Now these channels are highly valuable. People love them and the topics and the conversations are so interesting. You’ll be able to tune in yourself and keep listening to them because they’re that good. Now, if that’s not enough, we’re giving you 500 episodes a month. This is on the house. Literally 7,500 clips, more than enough to dominate social media left, right, and center. Now, on top of that, you’re going to get the offers pre-installed across your niches. We’ve already taken the hottest offers for every single niche pre-installed into your account. You’ll also get studiograde models with priority rendering, so you have the most human and realistic podcast that will beat any other type of AI generated content. You have 10 different faces and voice flows that you can use at any time, plus 15 minute length podcast. Now, this is the perfect length for a podcast, and it allows people to not just watch a little 5 to 10 second clip, but they can even move on to the full episode of at least 15 minutes. This is where you’re going to shine because someone that watches a 15-minute podcast is completely sold, an active, engaged audience member, and it wants to hear more from you and wants to follow your pages. Now, we’re going to once again train you, hold your hand, and show you exactly how to do this. And quite frankly, the AI will do everything for you. It’s going to take one episode of 15 minutes, chop it into multiple clips for you, and then distribute along all these platforms. So, all these hooks will drive back to that one longer episode. This is how people in today’s day and age go viral and they never share how. Now, normally the scaling account is sold separately at $167 a year, but we’re going to include it into your bundle. Now, every time we put people on a scaling account, they see results bigger and faster. You can see right here, Marker saying, “Now, I told myself one channel was plenty.” And then my third channel, a sleep and recovery show, which is a very interesting topic that I’m even very interested in. I almost didn’t launch because it didn’t have a scaling account until he decided to make use of it. It did 212,000 views in week two and the bio link started clicking every day. He checked the dashboard from his daughter’s Rosado and had to put the phone away before he teared up. One channel would have meant that show never existed. So the scaling account allows you to have multiple channels and scale a lot faster. Now who here absolutely loves this? There we go. Lots of users coming in. I see the chat is going crazy. Now that means on top of the Pod Shorts AI premium account, you’re also getting the Pod Shorts AI scaling account. Now, in all seriousness, guys, if you just want to dominate social media and build an audience, not just keep posting for the sake of posting, but actually posting and getting something from it, then this is where it’s at. At least try this out because owning a profitable podcast in today’s day and age is one of the most smartest moves you can do. It is known that social media pushes podcast clips more than any other type of content, and it’s exactly what you’ll witness the moment you have your scaling account. Now, to make it even better, you’re also going to get the full agency. You see, there are tons of people that love to have access to this, love to have their own podcast, love to dominate social media, and they’re asking, you know, we’re looking for someone that’s different. We’re looking for someone that can manage our social media, but everybody keeps creating the same content. You come in different and say, you know what, I’m going to create you an AI podcast show around your business, and people are going to love it. And this means you’ll be able to get an agency license that can generate unlimited accounts with, you know, different podcasts al together. On top of that, white label dashboard with completely your logo. You also get 20 team seats and 20 client loggings, all paying you monthly. You can literally keep a 100% of the profits. You’ll have a full agency storefront built out for you, plus the checkout, plus the hosting completely on our account. So you have a setup agency completely for free. Now you have the client getting arsenal literally your reseller license our cl uh client review accounts done for you client contract templates and our demo showing and client getting toolkit. These are what makes it so easy to land clients because once you click on them you’ll see how effortlessly you can present this to anyone and watch them desperately want their own AI podcast account. Now, furthermore, you’ll have a recurring client getting reports that show people, hey, how it’s working, as well as the amount of views that they’re getting, which makes people, you know, desperate for keeping that account, allowing you once again to keep 100% of that profit month over month. And normally, this is sold separately at $997. Now, we’re going to include this into your bundle for next to nothing only because you were smart enough to show up live. You can even let Pod Shorts AI sell itself and you keep a 100% of the profits, which means on top of the Pod Shorts AI premium account and scaling account, you’re also unlocking the entire agency upgrade, which normally is $997 annual. Now, it gets even better because once again, since you’re smart enough to show up to the live webinar, and that’s where you always get the biggest bang for your buck, you’re also going to get access to the PODS shorts coach. Now, this makes it that you’ll have a guide telling you exactly click by click what to do to see massive results in your Pod Shorts account. You’ll have a 24/7 coach that’s trained on your actual data. If you want it to generate topics, if you want it to give you the best time to post, it will do everything for you. It has a personalized Monday action plan telling you exactly, hey, this week these are the topics we need to put out there. These are the types of content we’ll be generating. Everything in there is designed to get you more views. It has the niche analyzer, the offer optimizer, the clip doctor to pick the most viral clips out to make sure you see a surge of virality on your socials. They have a monthly state of your network report and a prompt pack given to you with 30 topics and milestone alerts. The pod coach is there to make sure you don’t have to guess. Everything is designed to get you results. Now, normally this is there for $4.97 a year, but again, you will be able to get it included into your bundle for next to nothing. You see, Bod Coach is designed, literally trained to take any user from zero to 100K plus views. You’ll be dominating any platform. You know, you see some piece of content do over 1.5 million views because people just keep sharing it. They want others to hear what they’ve hear. And that is exactly what Pod Coach is designed to do. Meaning on top of the premium account, the scaling account, and the agency upgrade, you’ll also be unlocking the coaching mode. Now, this means the moment you have access to Pod Shorts, you can guarantee yourself of being guided and led to over a 100,000 views without a doubt. Because that’s exactly once again what Pod Coach is designed to do. You’ll have everything to stand out on social media and not just post content for, you know, a few clicks or views here and there, but to build a thriving audience that follows you for your podcast. That builds an audience that is people that are ready to buy, people that listen and engage and are actively following you. And that’s so valuable in today’s day and age. No matter what type of business you run, no matter what type of industry you’re in, having your own podcast show being managed and grown for you with AI is one of the best actions you can take right now. And to make it even better, only on this webinar, and truly only for the people on this webinar, we can do this because this, you know, is a lot of expense on our behalf, we’re going to allow you to massively amplify your results with the amplifier access. This means you can publish not the just the 12 networks, but you can generate so much more traffic as we’re including hidden and faster traffic sources, allowing you to publish instantly to over 15 platforms. Your podcast will get seen no matter what. You’ll be the talk of the town online. You’ll have people from all kinds of platforms tuning in, discovering an interesting topic that they like, and seeing a real podcast that captures their attention. We’re going to give you the variation engine on every network, allowing you to go from one simple podcast and one simple post to have all these different hosts from the same podcast posted to all these platforms. I mean, look at the level of domination that you’ll be able to tap into in a matter of clicks, completely done by AI. Now, not only that, every single podcast episode will be turned into a blog post, allowing you to generate real SEO traffic for people that look up that topic, look up what has been discussed, or look up the podcast in general. They’ll actually land on a branded site that actually transcribes the podcast, takes the best highlights, and also includes your links to your offers. Now, having this on top of that completely generated on autopilot allows your podcast to grow even faster because people can share these blog posts as well. Now, you have the audiogram generator included which makes sure you have beautiful listening cards that people see while they’re watching or listening to the podcast instead of watching the clip and an omniresence playbook plus our cheat sheets. You see, with the amplifier, you’ll be showing up everywhere. It is impossible for you not to at least generate a thousand views per clip. Now, we’re going to give you our playbook and cheat sheet to take that thousand to over 10,000 views per clip. We’re going to show you exactly how it’s done. Long story short, with the amplifier alone, you are guaranteed to grow a mass following. And a mass following makes it so much easier for you to sell any product or service online. Which means on top of the premium account, the scaling account, the agency upgrade, and the coaching mode, you’re also unlocking the amplifier mode, which normally goes for 997 annual, as you’ll be able to freely post on over 15 platforms, dominating with every single podcast show. Now, we’re also going to give you access to something that is going to make sure you make commissions no matter what. You see, whether you have a product right now or not, one of our biggest success stories creators is what we call affiliate real AI. This is a designated software that makes sure you start generating affiliate sales because now that you get a lot of eyeballs from your podcast, it’s only natural you want to monetize that. Now, James Keller here did over 3.7K, $3,740 in commissions. Before, he was struggling to make at least 400 a month. Now he’s doing well over 3.7K. Combining [clears throat] affiliate real AI together with Pod Shorts is a commission mayhem. Now therefore, on top of the premium account, scaling account, AC upgrade, coaching mode, and amplifier mode, we’re going to include affiliate real AI special access just to make sure you can monetize all that traffic and actually see commissions and money being made from your podcast show. Now, I have to ask once again, who here is loving everything they’re getting so far? Let me know in the chat box because honestly there’s nobody else out there offering this level of guarantee and success simply allowing you to not just again I keep saying it have a little you know tool that can create some videos or can create some content but have something that is designed to create meaningful engagement a real followers dedicated audience that is completely done by AI. who here loves this and wants to start using this, you know, owning your own podcast show. We have, like I said before, lady, in the gardening niche. We have people that are in the aviation niche. We have people in the golf niche, in the finance niche, in the AI niche. They are crushing it with their AI podcast show, and people love watching them. Now, to make it even better, since you’ll be dominating social media, Obby said we just have to give him one of our most best and successful social media management tools. You see, you’re going to get a ton of engagement. You’ll be showing up everywhere. You’ll be getting followers everywhere. So, therefore, to manage it all, Abby decided to include AI Social’s full access. This is your self-scheduling AI social media manager. It sets up your social media campaigns. It sells schedules. It sets up the content stream. It has all the video wizards. It finds trends in addition. It creates articles. Everything you need to keep your socials managed without you having to go all over the place is done by AI socials. Now, this means on top of all the podcast shorts, now that you have an audience, it will also create additional videos alongside it to fuel your audience, your new audience even more. Now, this means on top of the premium account, the scaling account, the AC upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode, you’re getting the biggest bang for your buck, and the affiliate real AI special access, you’ll also have AI socials unlocked. Now, with this, you’re quite frankly unstoppable. My ask to you is try it for at least 14 days, and I know for a fact, even within the first 24 to 72 hours, you’ve seen more results than any other content tool you’ve used today. If you ever wanted to just generate a ton of followers, if you ever wanted to just grow your audience so fast to the point you finally have people reaching out to you, asking about your products, asking about your services, then this is it right here. Because the total value of everything you’re getting today is well over $8,89. And granted, with this, you can use it both for yourself and for other businesses. There’s so many businesses out there. One of the most in demand services is helping people grow on social media. But unfortunately, everyone always offers to say, “We’re going to, you know, generate some videos with AI. We’re going to publish on your account.” Now, you’ll be able to come in and say, “We’re going to set up your very own profitable AI podcast show.” Now, you can see right here, the demand for this is insane. You can see people are willing to pay over 500, right? We need a social media short form video strategies. Your strategy is, hey, let’s set up an AI podcast show. Have you tried that already? No. All right, let’s try it out. And if you like it, then we move forward to the monthly retainer. And here we’re looking for content creator and social media manager for long-term well over 2500. This is something you’ll always find clients in because people always want to grow on social media, but nobody is offering them their own AI podcast, making you stand on your own, allowing you to stand apart from all the competition, stand above them, and more importantly, be one of the most valuable assets in the industry. Now, beginners are seeing, and it’s not just something we’re saying, beginners like Priya right here are seeing big big results in less than 3 days with Pot Shores. Again, she had zero followers when she started, and that was her biggest fear that she’d stay there, that nobody, you know, that all the effort is for nothing. Now, day one, nobody knew her show ever existed. She hadn’t told anyone about it. And then the algorithm pushed the third clip to over 20,000 28,000 strangers, and the rest is history. From this point on, she’s averaging about 50k views back to back. And it all started with pots. Now, who here thinks that’s amazing and wants the exact same thing that happened to them? Because that’s what waiting on you on the inside. The moment you grab Paw Shorts is finally the moment you start seeing massive traction on social media. Now, outside of this special webinar, the investment for Pod Shorts will be no less than $5997 annual simply because it’s that powerful and we already have people that are happily paying close to $6,000 a year to use everything that I’ve just shared with you. Now, because you’re on this webinar, you’ll be able to snatch this up for a steal. But I want you to know, even if we offered it at only $2997, which is half off, it’s still more than worth it. It’s a way for you to finally get seen online. It’s a way for you to finally build an audience instead of just posting content into the void. And again, Pod Shorts has a builtin earning mechanism from day one. Meaning, when you start grabbing this, you actually start earning at the same time. You get paid for affiliate offers mentioned in the podcast. You get paid for your own offers if you have your own products and services you want to sell. You get paid by brands that future them in your podcast as you’ll frequently get inquiries. And we’re actually going to show you where and how to make those happen. and you get paid to run shows for clients. You have full handholding plus the pot coach to guarantee your success. Now, this will allow you to own an audience and generate sales guaranteed. And I want that to sink in because if you’ve ever used any other content tool, they are great at what they do, but they don’t help you grow an audience. And that’s where Pod Shorts differs. It takes the best of both worlds, short form content and podcasts. And that’s how Pod Shorts is born. Two proven assets combined to generate the result that is needed to grow your business. Now, we figured to offer it on the webinar at 1997 annual, but I want you to know even though that is more than worth it, you won’t have to invest anywhere near that. You see, because you were smart enough to show up here, and I know you’re going to crush it with pots, you’ll be able to use this in the entire bundle. And we drop it down all the way to just 597 annual. Now, I just want to ask real quick, who here agrees the 597 a year is a very fair investment for a system so powerful, creating such a realistic, remember up to 15inute episodes immediately chopped into multiple clips distributed to over 15 channels, dominating social media, generating traffic left, right, and center. Every day you wake up, you see more subscribers, more followers, more sales, more clicks, more leads, and more engagement across all social channels. Now, who here believes 597 once a year is more than worth for all those results? I see lots of yeses coming in. Now, because you’re on this webinar, even though that’s more than valuable or worth it, you won’t have to invest anywhere near that. You see, when you comment the word live simply because you are live here today and prove that you’re here live with us. Comment live if you want the live discount. Because when you comment live right now, we’re going to do something insane. Instead, we’re not even going to charge 597 annual, even though that’s an absolute steal like most of you already said. When you grab this right now, we’re going to drop it down to as low as 317 annual who have a viral podcast show, multiple shows, mind you, over 7,500 clips that you’ll be distributing nonstop every single month on autopilot to dominate any vertical and get your offers and links seen. And to make it the ultimate deal, this is where it gets exciting. 40 live coupons for an ultimate discount. Meaning the team is going to put the link in the chat right now and first come first serve you’re going to get a live coupon for showing up live taking it down from 317 annual to as low as 267 annual. Now this is as low as it will ever be in a lifetime but only when you grab this on this webinar. If you want this for only 267 a year allowing you to dominate social and get a return on this so incredibly fast. Remember, Priya doing 28,000 views on day three. And that’s not just her. Jolene with her gardening podcast even started generating sales within 72 hours. Make sure you click the link in the chat box right now because this is what’s going to allow you to finally build an audience of people that want to hear from you, that are excited about what you’re talking about, about your offers. Now, you can do this completely faceless. You can clone your face or do it for someone else. But only for 267. When you go to the link in the chat right now, you will be able to generate raving fans and have your entire content schedule laid out for you. Now, make sure you go to the link because these coupons literally will fly off the shelves because everybody wants to build an audience, but nobody knows how. Now, hot Shorts is the ultimate shortcut and the easiest way to do it. It combines the most viral and proven formats together, which is short form content and podcast, and puts them on socials. It is known to be the number one type of content that get pushed the most on socials, that builds the most audience, and that algorithms even favor. And because you’re on this webinar, we’re even going to extend to make sure you can publish to over 15 platforms at once, generating and guaranteeing you a ton of get
views, leads, clicks, and sales. Now, if you want that to happen to you, make sure you go to the link and the moment you’ll have part pod shorts, you’ll start seeing the very fact of an engaged audience being built in front of your own eyes. You’ll see daily leads come in, sales and conversions coming in because pots viewers are extremely hot. They love what they’re seeing. They’re more engaged. They’re listening. They’re in tune because the topic is of their interest and they see a real conversation taking place. Now, all of this for only 267. And the AI does everything for you. Even if you’re a beginner, you’re not techy, you don’t know where to start. This is exactly the reason you should grab Pod Shorts. Because one thing you should know is that when you’re able to dominate social media and actually have a decent amount of followers, actually getting people to listen to you, that’s when everything becomes so much easier. And that’s what Pod Shorts is designed to do. Make sure you go to the URL in the chat right now. Remember, it works for yourself, but also for anyone else who needs people to find them. Podcasts are the easiest way to get found online. And this is also proven if you go to the articles right here that I’ll actually show you that podcast clips are the number one way people generate views. Clips on social become topcast or top podcast discovery tool. Now these clips allow people to find you quicker than any other type of content and meaning it will also generate you more leads, generate you more sales and generate you a ton of engagement. podcast or podcasts knows exactly what type of topics to put out there that spark a ton of conversation that gets a lot of people interested in you, your brand, and your topics. Now, you can start seeing this with your own eyes for only 267 annual. Now, make sure you grab this right now because the price will go up and we have some insane bonuses that I’ll mention shortly that are only available while we are live right now. Now, a podcast show creates an instant income stream where you can sell your own affiliate offers, sell your own products and services, get paid by brands. We’re actually going to show you how easy that is and get paid to run a show for clients. Now, the link is in the chat. I see people already joining in. Congratulations, Tommy. Congratulations, Stephan. Um, Alyssa saying, “I always wanted to have my podcast show. This is a great way to get started.” Amazing. It’s not only a great way to get started. It’s one of the best ways to get started. You don’t have to invest in equipment. You don’t have to, you know, hire someone. You don’t have to go through all the trials and tribulations of research. This makes sure you can immediately get going and start seeing real results and it’s so darn realistic. You’ve seen it with your own eyes and that’s why people keep following. That’s why people love it. So, make sure you go to the link in the chat. There we go. Anthony, congratulations. John, congratulations. Stephan, congratulations. Donnie, congratulations. You guys are super quick. Now, I do want to, you know, mention something super important because this once again is only available while we’re live and you’re getting an amazing discount. And that’s why we’re going to do two special things. But first, make sure before anything else, make sure you go to the link and grab this before it’s too late. Because if you’ve been posting and you’ve been waiting and the views haven’t come this far, that’s the reason you should grab Pod Pod Shorts right now. Because Pod Shorts is designed to break this cycle and only 267 that is a steal to finally build up an audience and will also allow you to finally make use of any other tool because you have an audience that now listens to you. Furthermore, if your follower count has never moved in months, if you’re still under, you know, 2,000 followers, 3,000 followers, or you want to break through the ceilings that you might have right now, start leveraging the most viral format online. Now, this is going to make sure you start generating followers in record time. Now, furthermore, if you’ve been struggling with generating leads or sales with your current types of content, leverage podcast content and see the change with your own eyes. Now, you have a money back guarantee to try this out. So, make sure you at least grab this and see the results with your own eyes. Now, Priya once again feared having zero followers, generated 28,000 views on day three. Now, if she can do it, anyone can do it, and she’s not an anomaly. We have once again Jolene with her gardening clip. Now she has 41 clips in one month published from Pod Shorts and she’s crushing it. Now all of this for only 267 including your premium account, your scaling account, your agency upgrade, the coaching mode, making sure you have everything you need to dominate with a full action plan laid out for you. the amplifier mode, the affiliate reel special access, so you can even sell extra offers on all of your podcast using affiliate reel and AI socials unlocked to manage all of your social media platforms. There is everything you need under one roof to absolutely start dominating only for 267 when you grab it on this webinar. Now, for a couple of people, I see congratulations. I see a couple of people asking about the mega bundle done for you and that’s a good point. Let me actually go ahead and mention that right now because if you’re lucky and you know if you know our webinars we you know do this occasionally not always and some of you won’t even notice or see it but every now and then we have these special openings where you can take advantage of some of our mega bundles or done for use. Now you don’t necessarily need these to make Pod Shorts work. I do want you to understand that. Make sure you at least grab Pod Shorts because dominating with podcast is right now your best advantage to move forward and actually start seeing immense results. But if you really want to knock it out of the park, make sure when you see this box right here, and this is something that you rarely see. And if you happen to see it, you know, the Pod Shorts mega bundle, check this box right here as it will allow you to have three VIP live training calls with the founder, which is Obby himself. It’ll actually show you the different podcasts, look at your account, go over the strategy, show you the AI. This is so valuable because you can copy everything Obby is doing on the screen. On top of that, we’re going to give you a VIP live training, one of our most success storydriven trainings where every time people go through it, they turn into success stories no matter what. And we’ve updated it with brand new methods for 2026. Now, this is a dedicated live training on how to set up an AI automation agency. Businesses crave AI automation right now and you’re going to be able to capitalize on that and we’re going to show you exactly how. Furthermore, you’re going to get a VIP live training on short form content agency. You see, now that you have an amazing system that creates short form content and long form content, businesses need to grow their socials and you’ll be able to cater to that need. I’m going to show you and train you exactly how easily you can do that and get paid for it. Now, both these trainings are worth $9.97 each. You’ll be getting all of this when you check this box at way less. Now, the unlimited AC accounts for pod shorts will be included when you check this box as well. Multiple highspeed AI trendy content creation, unlimited AC access to entire AI podcast, unlimited access even to affiliate re and there are tons of affiliates out there that would love to have this. And you can resell Affiliate Real AI and actually keep 100% of the profits. And let now let’s say you have a podcast on affiliate marketing. Do you know how many affiliate marketers would listen to that? A real podcast talking about the trials and tribulations of affiliate marketing tips, tricks, all the things that are important for people to know, but also all the things that people can relate to. And in that podcast, you can mention affiliate reel, how it makes everything so much easier. And you can share a link in bio and boom, you can sell your agency access. Now you get unlimited access to AI socials as well. And same story, you can create a viral podcast and any of these topics, social media marketing, AI automation, affiliate marketing. People tune in, they listen to what’s being shared, they listen to what’s being discussed, and the links and the products you name in those podcasts start seeing sales. Now furthermore, you get access to our secret AI agent uh agency Facebook group which is only available through this as well. Now normally to get access to this group, it’s a 97 a month, but you’ll be able to get lifetime access for free when you check this box to all of this. Now, only a handful of these things are already way more worth than what it’s at right here. But if you check this box, you’re going to get the live training, the founder call trainings, the unlimited agency accounts to everything. but only for the first 50 people. Now, on top of the mega bundle, and I see people already grabbed the mega bundle. Congratulations. Super smart decision. We also have a very rare opportunity to get everything, and when I say everything, I’m talking about everything done for you, handed to you. A podcast made for you. Our team delivers three complete podcast networks. niches picked for you, cast built out for you, episodes cued for you up to 30 days and beyond, money links installed, so every episode actually turns into income. All we need is your affiliate ID. If you don’t have one, we even help you get one. And boom, you have a money-making podcast on a silver platter done for you by our team. Now, if this is something you want, then make sure at checkout to check this box right here. The pod shorts done for you. This is the complete AI podcast machine done for you. The complete AI podcast machine with three done for you show networks. Proven niches, pre-verified for demand, show names, branding, cover art, done. AI hosting cast. We built all the characters in there. Hyper realistic 90 researched episode topics. 15 episodes generated and cued. We have monetized bio pages ready for you. 90-day content rollout. Now, this is first come first serve. As you can imagine, this is, you know, our team manually going into your account, setting everything up, setting up your account, making sure it’s monetized, and making sure you’re generating traffic and sales. If you want this completely taken care of and done for you, snatch one of the done for you spots. These are so valuable, but also very rare because our team can only manage and handle so many accounts. So, if you want the done for you where the entire podcast shows built out for you, cued, posted, monetized, and immediately, you know, in three different networks, you already start seeing views, traffic, sales, and an audience being built for you. Check this box. This is one of the biggest shortcuts you can take. Now, all of this is taken care of, but only if you first get access at 267. And once again, 267 is as low as it gets. I see people asking, um, amazing. I still want the done for you. I didn’t see that. So, like I said, it is very rare. So, chances are you might not even see the done for you. If you want it done for you, make sure you first have access to the bundle deal right here because only when you have the 267 bundle deal, you are eligible to get everything done for you. And then if you’ve missed it for any reason, ask the team in the chat for the done for you link and they might be able to grab a spot for you. Now, if you just see the no order box on the order form to get the done for you, consider yourself lucky. Check that box and secure that spot for yourself. Nonetheless, you have a full 14-day money back guarantee on everything. So, you can see this work first, actually judge it from the inside out. You see the results with your own eyes, and then still decide whether you want to keep it. But I know once you have it and you see the return on investment, you see the growth, you see the sales, you know for a fact that finally this was the missing piece to not just posting content, not just going on social media, but growing an audience. Because ask yourself once again, what do people, you know, rather come back to? Just a short clip, you know, a promotional video talking about a product or whatsoever or a podcast, a sitdown on maybe a sensitive topic, an interesting topic, a futuristic topic. These are the types of content that attract real listeners, people that are engaged, people that are not just scrolling for fun, but people that actually want to learn a thing or two and they like the discussion. And how many times have you scrolled and you saw somewhat of a podcast clip about a topic that interests you and you stayed you stayed listening just a a few um I think a few days ago I was so invested in a podcast that I just came across scrolling immediately started following it I’m still watching their clips to today which was about HDS HDHD something you know I was always very fascinated about and I always you know wanted to understand how does it work how does the brain work in that way as I have a lot of friends and that podcast explained trained it so well and it also had a lot of trainings and I actually shared this podcast with a lot of friends as well and that’s how quickly it can happen. Now I’m living proof that podcast have such a strong effect. So make sure you grab pot shorts because the type of podcast you’ll be able to generate with two people, three people, four people all done by AI for only 267 at this level of realism is unheard of. If you tried to do this anywhere else, you would need a gazillion amount of tools, a ton of complexity, and you have no support and no handholding whatsoever. But when you grab Pod Shorts today, you have everything you need under one roof. An AI agent that does it all for you, plus a massive support, a dedicated built-in coach, monetization, and if you’re smart and you see the done for you, grab that and it’s all taken care of for you. And also make sure to get the mega bundle to hop on the live training where you can even ask live questions, see over the shoulder click by click and get access to all the unlimited agency accounts. Now again, you’ve seen the quality of these, the value is there, the realism is there, and this is what social media loves. This is why you’re going to see so much engagement because it looks so good. The topics are trending and it does exactly what social media expects from you, giving you more reach, more views, and imagine that 15 times over all platforms. You’re guaranteed to get views, engagement, leads, and sales whether you like it or not. Because these accounts are getting real results from it. Now, again, this is not just something we’re saying. It is all backed up by data. Why do platforms push podcast clips so heavily? It’s all because of the watch time. Two people talking holds a viewer far longer. Imagine three people talking, four people talking that go into somewhat of a discussion that go into a topic or a debate. That’s the type of content where people, you know, they side with one person over the other and they want to hear the arguments and the counterarguments. This is a dedicated audience that you’re growing because of Pod Shorts. Now right here you can see once again you know podcast top podcasts are the best discovery tools on social. Now one entry viewer this is tested one in three viewers goes on to follow the show. One in three clip viewers turns into a follower. Now you’ll be generating tens of thousands followers over and over again and every time one out of three of each of those people will turn into a dedicated follower. Now you have the best of both worlds. Short form content that is proven to be the fastest way to get seen online and podcast content that is known to attract the best type of viewers and get the most reach and engagement. This is something that is guaranteed to grow your accounts and you can snatch this up for only 267. Normally you need different integrations with different tools and you know you need to do a lot of techy work to make such a realistic podcast and you maybe get left with a 10-second or 5second clip. Now you can do podcasts for over up to 15 minutes, distribute clips onto 15 plus platforms, and it’s all handled for you. Make sure you go to the link in the chat. I’m going to quickly congratulate a ton of people that are joining in as we speak. I see Adam is in, Anony’s in, Stephan is in, Michael is in, Tony is in, Michelle is in, John is in, David is in, Randy is in. Congratulations. Uh, I got the done for you as well. Um, I see Stephan asking, “Are there still done for you spots available? I’d like one, please. I’ll ask the team. And that goes for everyone. If you want it done for you and you didn’t see it, make sure you ask the team and they might have a second chance for you. Um, I mean, I don’t blame you. The done for you is one of the best things you can grab immediately after the pop shorts. And as well as make sure not to forget the mega bundle. Now, when you have the entire package, by far, you’ve just solidified your success cemented in stone. But it all starts with getting pot shorts and only 267. You got nothing to lose and everything to gain. As you know, we’re super transparent. And on top of that, you know, you have a proven money back guarantee that is backed to the buyer. You have full protection allowing you to use this, see the results, and decide if you want to keep it. Now, we know for a fact once you look back at this very moment, you’re going to wonder, why did I even hesitate? You’re seeing more views than ever, more clicks than ever. Finally, people are interested in your products. Finally, people are following your accounts. They want to hear more about what you’re talking about. They want to hear more about the products and services that you actually go ahead and suggest in your podcast. And this is what Pod Shorts does for you. Now, make sure you snatch this up because we’re only here for a little bit longer. We’re answering a few questions in the chat, but as soon as that’s done, the entire year package will raise in price and the done for you and mega bundle will disappear. So, definitely make sure to snatch those up while they’re still available. Now, I’m going to quickly recap everything you’re getting as well as some of the insane bonuses that I haven’t even mentioned yet, and as well as congratulate all the people that are getting in. Now, by the looks of it, we only have less than a dozen coupons left to actually get this at only 267, which is once again a steal for having a premium. The scaling account, the agency upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode on its own is worth way more than 267. The affiliate real AI special access, and the AI socials access unlocked. So, let’s break down once again everything you’re getting here today. Now, I see Ree Orion just got in. Reys, congratulations to you. Now, first of all, you’re going to get the premium account, as you know, that will give you the pop short, seven agent AI machine, five complete shows, 500 viral clips, 1500 unique posts. I mean, you are going to crush it. You have C studio AI with different hosts. You can clone yourself, make your own persona, highly realistic. You have the trend radar to make sure you’re only posting viral content. Capil Sharma, congratulations with your access by the way. the variation engine to dominate multiple platforms. Now, hosted monetized bio page and offer rotation to sell any offer. Robert from New Orleans, congratulations. Now, hosted monetized bio page. You have a built-in voice and video text AI. You don’t need API keys. Keep that in mind. You don’t need credits. If that’s something that’s kept you on the fence or holding you back or something you’ve been wondering about, consider this answer. You do not need API keys. You don’t need credits. Now, this is something we only do on this webinar. So, if this is the moment you’ve been waiting for or the answer you’ve been waiting to hear, go and grab it right now because after this webinar, you will need, you know, your own API keys and such. You know, we can’t keep doing this for everyone else. So, when you grab it right now, when you grab it right now on the webinar, you won’t need any API keys. You won’t need any credits. You’re set. You can start using it. You can start using it ongoingly, non-stop. and you’ll see massive results. If you wait, miss out on this, then you come back later, you will see different bonuses. Um, no more, you know, everything’s taken care of for you. The done for you, and the mega bundle will probably not be available anymore. Only on the webinar, you get the biggest bang for your buck. I mean, the Trend Raider alone usually is 297 a year. You’re getting everything for 267. So, make sure you take advantage of this. It’s one of the best investments you can make. and you’re getting all of our launch bonuses. Dennis Perez, congratulations. You get training, 24/7 support, and updates. Now, we’re going to give you a commission fasttrack. So, we want to make sure that you feel confident that when you grab this, you’re actually going to make money of it. Now, not only are you, you know, backed by our money back guarantee, but we’re actually going to fast track your commissions. We don’t want you to sit and wait. We’re going to immediately make sure your first podcast start making you sales just like it did for Jolene, just like it did for Eric, just like it did for Mark. Now, on top of that, you have 50 proven show niches rated and ranked, ready to deploy, a viral hook vault, a commercial right license. Now, by the way, these hooks generate thousands of views quickly. Now, you have the show owners community where you’ll be able to see a like-minded individuals crushing it and it’s so easy because all these people are literally just as you. They started the podcast show using Pod Shores and they’re crushing it now. Now you have the Clip Money Master Class allowing you to see how you can clip your podcast into generating more income from social media. Because once you start posting these podcast, you actually start getting monetized by social media platforms and incentivized to post more. Meaning you don’t even have to sell a product or service. You literally get paid just to upload Pod Shorts. Emily Jones, congratulations to you. Now, the total value of this alone is over $4,000. You’re going to get all of that included in your bundle. Now, as mentioned, you get the bot co shorts coach. This allows you to have a 247 ask anything coach trained on your data. This is a dedicated coach we designed to get you to over 100,000 views in record time. It gives you personalized action plans, a niche analyzer, and an offer optimizer, a monthly state of your network report, as well as a prompt pack with 30 topics and milestone alerts whenever you hit a new milestone. Now, the pod coach promp pack is included and 30 winning episode topics for any given niche and our milestone alert system. Now, normally this coach is 997 a year. We’ve trained it with so much data to the point we tested it with brand new people, beginners, and it guided them to their first 100,000 view. So, make sure you grab this because you’ll have the Pod Shorts Coach included. If you wait and grab this later, we can’t keep handing out the Pod Shorts Coach to everyone. So, only on this webinar, you get the biggest bang for your buck. Now, it is literally less than 300 bucks, allowing you to test drive this. You have a 14-day money back guarantee, and if [clears throat] you’re smart enough, you get the done for you. You see the results happen for you, completely taken care of for you. Now, as mentioned, you’re going to get AI socials, which will manage your entire social media campaigns. It will find more trends. It will do all the social posting. It leverages your content stream. It self- schedules. It’s a smart system that posts on the right time in the right place with the right types of content. Now, furthermore, you have the scaling account which allows you to access to over 100 channels giving you 100 income streams and 100 sellable assets. You can create up to 100 podcast shows each with a ton of different episodes. You 500 episodes per month, up to 7,500 clips every single month without Phil. And remember, you don’t need API keys. You don’t need credits. This is scaling season only when you grab this on the webinar. Now, top converting offers pre-installed across all niches, studio grade models with priority rendering, 10 face and voice close, and a portfolio plus uh portfolio map plus niche blueprints and a breakout detector. The moment not notices, hey, this podcast is going to go viral. It will tell you upfront because it notices about the engagement, the speed of, you know, views, it sees all these metrics as, hey, this one is going to break through. You know, make sure you attach your best offer to it because a ton of people will see this. Now, you’re bound [clears throat] when you have the scaling account to see a ton of skill happen. That’s what it’s designed to do. Now, on top of that, you’re also going to get the amplifier, which is one of the biggest success story makers. 12 additional publishing networks, allowing you to post over 15 platforms in one click, completely done by AI. Variation engine coverage on every network. So, it varies the content accordingly with different hooks, different bodies, different posts, and people won’t be able to get around you. They will hear from you, follow you, engage with you, and like what you have to offer, and they keep coming back. It even turns every podcast into its own block with a block engine getting you free traffic from Google audiogram generator and the omniresence playbook. Now the amplifier is included in the bundle. Also at just 267 you get everything you see here. This is the biggest bang for your buck that you can get. Now we even give you our entire cheat sheet, all of our money platforms where you can start earning on and our Tik Tok viral traffic training, our YouTube lead generation app and our brand new underground traffic secrets. If you’ve been wanting to get out there and get more businesses, more people to see you and see what you have to offer, no matter if you’re selling an agency service or an affiliate offer or a BTOC offer or digital product or even coaching, this is going to allow you to become not only an expert in the space, respected, followed, and grow a mass audience. Now, you’re going to get Affiliate Relay, which creates a one-click AI affiliate website selling your affiliate offers with all the review videos done for you, content done for you. It has automated traffic built in, and this allows you to sell affiliate offers through your podcast effortlessly and sending them to a site that takes care of all the conversions. Now, with the AI podcast, everything is taken care of for you. You know, you have four-way conversations, humanlike natural conversations, podcast scripts, and conversations. You’ll turn your IDs into highquality podcast instantly. And you have the Pod Shorts agency. You can upgrade to AC license, AC white label. You have 20 team members, 20 client loginins, done for you a website, plus 5 years of free hosting, PayPal checkout included, bookings included, done for you reseller, review accounts, contract templates, automated branding, client reports, and ready-made contracts and lead magnets. You have everything you need to absolutely crush it. It’s all here, but only when you grab it right now. Remember, you have a 14-day money back guarantee. Try it out at the very least. And watch how this is going to change your success practically overnight. Now, make sure you use the coupon code. When you click this button right here, it will take you to the order form. I’ll quickly show you. And I want to congratulate Anthony once again. Congratulations. Uh, managed to get the done for you. Super stoked. Now, here’s the thing. Once again, if you’re lucky, you see these two boxes right here. The Posh Mega Bundle and the Potr done for you. Now, make sure ideally you get both, but if you have to choose one or the other, I mean, choose which one you attach the most value to. Now, for me, that will always be the done for you. But furthermore, you know, the mega bundle is something that will make sure you have the biggest value because this alone is worth a,000. This alone is worth a,000. Now, these are normally 97 a year, 97 a year, 97 a year. All of these you’re going to get for just a one time because the prices on the, you know, mega bundle and the done for you are a one time. These are not annual. These are not monthly. It’s a one time and everything takes care taken care of for you. So, when you go here, you put in your email. All right? And then make sure to put in the coupon code as well. And you’ll see if it go up here.
Give it a second. If we still have coupons available, that is. I mean, act fast. Now, if you’re seeing this, this usually or might mean, you know, coupons are starting to run out. So, make sure you go to the link. Luckily, it’s still working, but you can see it’s going slower because coupons are getting out the door. Make sure you go right now. In all seriousness, you do not want to miss out on this. You see the price has dropped down to just 267. Now grab this and if you’re lucky to see the mega bundle and done for you, grab those as well. As a matter of fact, let me show you the done for you and what it entails. Once again, I see Logan just got the done for you. Congratulations. Now you can see the done for you is a 197 one time and it’s going to hand you three done for you shows on a silver platter. Now, Obby partially oversees this. You know, he is a master at generating traffic online. And instead of, you know, using or building it yourself, the Dunf Show network, it’s picked for you from the Trend Raider in your account, done professionally built by our team. We build out the cast, build out the characters, we build out the topics, and we have three networks live this afternoon. So, if you’re someone that values speed, if you’re someone that wants to see things working quickly and judge it quickly, then this is for you. The niches are picked and these are proven niches. We’re talking about niches like finance, weight loss, relationships, side hustles, mental health, travel hacks. Now, these niches always do well and we’ve designed podcast in these niches for you, unique to you. Now, your shows arrive with personal names, personal faces, and personality. You can do it faceless or if you want us to clone or use a given face or name, we can as well. Now, these have certain characteristics. the analyst, the strategist, the educator, the motivator, you’ll see the personas and people start to attach to these personas in the podcast as well. They start relating to the motivator or they start liking, you know, the strategist more. Now, furthermore, the first quarter of your content decisions are made for you. Literally, we have set up, you know, all the 30 episodes and topics engineered already winning in the niche. You have, you know, over 225 clips cued before you even typed a single word. Meaning this is the ultimate done for you. You walk into a machine that is pumping out content for you and generating you an audience the moment you grab this. Now the money is wired in before your first post. You see the important thing here is that you make an amazing return on investment. That’s exactly what’s going to happen. Each of these podcasts are attached to one of the hottest niches. And these are niches you can pick your affiliate link from. Paste your affiliate ID right here and it will be promoted alongside all these podcasts. Now, one click stands between you and the live network. You can see your network’s going live. Know your podcast is going to come to life. You know, hundreds of thousands of people will see it. It will be published on all kinds of different platforms. Social media loves these types of content. So, we’ll push it even more and you start to see that massive traffic. If you’ve been looking for a breakthrough, then this is it right here. Linda Parker, congratulations with the done for you as well. Now, we’ll walk you through everything obviously. Now the moment you have this working for you, we come in, you know, we do what we call a handoff. The first 30 days, we teach you to read, you know, the dashboard and everything how it works, you get a VIP network activation session with our team to make sure you understand it fully. Now, all of this, including our quarterly network refresh, the show owners playbook, and our private network owners community. All of this is for a onetime 197. And that is when you upgrade to the done for you. Now again, if you want to make that a reality, first grab this at 267, which will include the premium account, the scaling account, the AC upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode, the special access of affiliate reel and AI socials. This also means even if for some reason you can’t get the done for you or the done for you is already completely sold out, still make sure you get pot shorts because it will allow you to still grow your audience with the most realistic podcast that people love to watch. Now, furthermore, the more important reason is if you’re just tired of having no idea how to build a dedicated audience. Honestly, enough is enough. Give yourself a fair chance right now to try it in a way you haven’t done so before. And that is one of the easiest ways, which is owning your own viral podcast show, which people actually look up to you for. The moment they know you own a show, you know, they start speaking to you differently. They love to, you know, be featured on it in any way or form or mentioned on it in any way or form. Now, furthermore, when you want to do this, you’ll finally stop dealing with, you know, every other content tool that’s not generating you results. On top of that, you stop dealing with not seeing any views come in. You stop dealing with not seeing any followers coming in. And you finally stop dealing with not seeing any leads or sales. Because the problem was all those tools we had so far, even though they’re great, and I love those tools, and I speak about a lot of great tools as well, we need to acknowledge the fact that tools have different assets or powers. You see, most tools can help you create videos, but you’ll be posting into the void if you don’t have an audience yet. And that’s what Obby solved here today. He did what people are crushing with right now. He did extensive research on it and notice how effective it is. And it’s not just something we’re saying. The data proves it back to back to back. A single 60-second clip from a podcast typically reaches 10,000 to 50,000 organic. This is backed by YouTube creator insider and busprout.com. Two reputable sources on this very topic. A podcast audience actually buys what they hear. They’re more invested. and people, you know, even if you have a busy day job day job or a busy life in general or you just don’t want to spend too much time on this. Literally, Maria works a night shift, has two kids now. Her content is being taken care of on her bus ride during her commute. She’s going live on three platforms using Pod Shorts, and she’s crushing it. And we see people from all ages dominating with AI podcast. And now it is your turn. you’ll be able to generate millions of views in literally the last 90 days we’ve seen accounts do over 140 grand or 14,000 views and this turns into tons of sales left right and center. So, if you want to make this happen for yourself as well, without recording anything, without going on camera, without editing or logging into different accounts over and over again, without needing a following to begin with, make sure you grab this right now because like I said before, there are two types of content. The one that builds your audience and the one that nurtures your audience. Now, when you answer the question, now which type of content will get you dedicated followers? Is it the podcast one or just the promotional video? It’s always the podcast one. This is what attracts people. This is what gets them hooked and interested listening to different perspectives, discussions, and topics. And you’ll be able to be the owner of all of that. So, make sure you grant it because platforms love it when you’re able to hook people on their platform. It help keeps people longer on there and therefore you’re going to get far more reach than the average type of content. And it’s it makes sense and it’s proven. So, with that being said, this is your last and final chance to have everything taken care of for you. The most beautiful, human, realistic podcast. And join the ranks of Priya, join the ranks of Jolene, join the ranks of Mark, Anthony, all the people that are crushing it right now, you’ll be able to sell your affiliate offers, get paid for your offers, get featured by brands, get paid to run shows for clients. But only when you grab this right now, at least try it out for 14 days, and then tell me how much you enjoyed it, the results. We’re looking forward to your success story. If you’ve been struggling with any other content tool and you’ve been looking for something that grows your views immensely fast, then this is the best investment you can make in yourself. Only 267. If you want to really knock it out of the park, this is literally the best thing you could do. Get the mega bundle and get the done for you. The link is in the chat box and I’ll see you on the inside.
-
08/29/2026 – PODshorts AI
She says, “Yes, I’m bragging. Anyone can do this.” And this type of content is designed to grow an audience, not just to put more stuff out there, but to actually build a following. And that’s what this does. Now, let me ask you a question. What if you had access to the latest AI technology that can create a viral podcast show for you? Literally plan it for you on all platforms, the right topics, the right engagement, place it in front of the right people, and make it hyper realistic. that it’s no indistinguishable from real humans. Now, if you had that, knowing how viral these formats are, knowing that social media prefers these formats, and knowing that this allows you to build your audience faster than anything else, if you could have access to these viral podcast clips in just minutes on any given topic, do you see yourself growing your business faster than ever before? Let me know in the chat box. Do you see yourself growing your business faster with an AI podcast that you can set up in any niche? Monetize, have full support in whether it’s the financial niche, the pet care niche, fitness niche, no matter what it is, you’ll be able to set this up in a matter of clicks and an AI agent will do it all for you. So, that being said, comment yes. And those of you that say yes, comment, I want this because that means Obby will come in and actually show it to you right here on this very webinar. Comment I want this in the chat right now. Who here would love to see how you’ll be able to do exactly that? Comment, I want this. I see lots of people commenting already. So, that being said, Obby, go ahead and take it away. All right, folks. Welcome to Quart. In this short demonstration video, I’m going to show you how you can use Pshots to create short form podcast videos that you can publish on social media, Instagram, Tik Tok, YouTube, Facebook, and drive tons of traffic to your affiliate links, earn commissions. But not just affiliate links, you can also promote your Shopify e-commerce store. You can promote your local business. You can promote your service based business. You can literally promote anything and everything that you like using these short form podcast video. Now the reason why we are pushing for podcast video is because people love these kind of videos. The amount of views and engagement and video retention that you get on short form podcast videos, especially on Instagram and Tik Tok, is insane because these are natural human conversation based videos where people want to watch the video, want to listen to what’s being told in the videos. And because these videos can be so pitchy, so salesy, people often click on the link. Now, how charts work? It automates the entire thing using AI agent where you don’t have to do any of the work. So once you log into dash you can see trend radar blueprints episodes characters and your calendars analytics and integration. Now what trend radar essentially does it finds trending podcasts on YouTube. So YouTube has long form podcast. We’re going to find trending long form podcast and what we’re going to do is we’re going to create a blueprint which means we’re going to replicate the hook, the tone, the idea of what makes that podcast video get tons of views. So let’s start with our campaign name for the trend. Let’s say demo one. And we’re going to do weight loss. Now this is the niche that we want to be. This is the country. is the language. Now you can pick any country, you can pick any language, right? So if you want to do Spanish, German, Portuguese, you can do all of that. And again, we can put weight loss and the keyword here and click on search trends. And what this is going to do, it’s going to go on YouTube and start searching for trending podcast in the weight loss niche where people are talking about weight loss. And then what we can do is we can create something called blueprint. Which means he’s going to analyze this video, the podcast video and see what was the hook, what was the marketing and sales hook, what was the tone, how many characters we’re talking, was it funny, serious or boring. It’s going to analyze all of that thing and then we can create our own podcast. It’s not going to copy the content. Understand? It’s only going to copy the DNA of this video. So these are all the podcast that are trending right now. So if you look at this one, it has 519 views, it has 750K views, 78K views, 210K. Now if I click on details, I can see all the detail. The engagement is really high. Recently like it’s a very new video, 13 August and it’s doing really well. Format fit is pretty decent. Niche fit is 100%. Right? So it talks about all of these details. So, what we’re going to do is click on create blueprint and we’re going to click create. Now, what this is going to do is going to go find out this video, transcribe it, understand the DNA, the the hook, the style, the marketing, the the way of speaking, the way of uh presenting the content. And then it’s going to create that DNA profile, the blueprint that you can then use to create your own podcast. And now you can use the same blueprint to create podcast not only in the weight loss niche but you can create in any niche you want. So if you see that this video is performing really really well means its hooks are doing well. It’s way of presenting information is doing well and it’s getting a lot of clicks on its link. It’s making a lot of money to the publisher. You can just copy that blueprint into any of your niche. You can take this video and then create, you know, uh, shop podcast videos about plumbing, about lawyers, about your e-commerce store, your pizza shop, pretty much anything using the same DNA. And it will get you the same amount of engagement, same amount of views. It will get you better ranking. It will get you better video retention where people actually end up watching the entire video. and it will get you better clicks on your bio page or on the link in your description resulting in more sales. As you can see the blueprint is created and now you see something similarity here. This is one of the video I created a blueprint for earlier as well about finance and this is about weight loss. If you look at the thumbnail they have similarities right anyways I just wanted to point out. If you click on details, you can again see all the details here. The host, you can see the segment structure, gold, open, hood, host, brief platform, format, all these things it has understood and created about it. Now if I go here, I can delete this or create episode or I can just go back here in episodes and start creating my episode. Now episode essentially means creating your short form podcast videos that are going to be published. So, we’re going to engage an AI agent, our creator agent to start building that and we’ll just give them some details. So, I’m going to create this campaign name called weight loss niche is also weight loss blueprint. So, I’m going to select the blueprint long form expert teaser cold opener. This is the weight loss uh blueprint that we picked. want to create videos for uh North America in English. But again, you can pick any um country, any language that you want. Duration, we want like 300 seconds. So 300 seconds is about a 5 minute long short video. Now what we can do, ideally I would like to keep it shorter. So I’m going to do like 2 minutes long. So I’m going to do 120 seconds. And there we go. And I’m going to create let’s say three videos. Let’s do that. So, we’re going to create three videos. We can have one host, two host, three host, up to four different host. And this is the monetization URL. So, I’m going to put my affiliate link here if I’m promoting a product or um I’m going to put my e-commerce website, my uh service business website, my client’s website, whatever I want the traffic to go to. When somebody watches my video and they click on the link, I want them to go to this link where I’m going to be selling my product or my service or getting, you know, form submissions, anything. The end goal is is what we’re going to do. Now, next thing we’re going to do is angles. So, AI has the agent has already created a couple of angles for us. So, we can use the invisible calorie audit. We use why your body fights back, maintenance problem. So I’m going to do like buy your body fights back. So like let’s go to hook two. If you don’t like any of these hook, you can just click on refresh and it’s going to give you new hooks as well. But these hooks have been created based on the blueprint that we created. So these are guaranteed to get you higher views or better retention which means the algorithm is going to push you more. Now there are two hosts. You can pick from the host that you have already created the characters or you can create a new character. You can create a character here or you can just go here and create a new character. Let’s say I want to use the first host as John and for the second host I want to create a new host. Now I can generate a character or I can upload my own picture. So if I upload my own picture it’s going to create a character like this my own character with my own voice. And if I create generate I can do go here call it Max. I can give some essence appearance and then I can select voice. I can pick 11 voices. I can use my own custom voice. I can clone my own voice right recording and I can use our own AI voices. Bunch of AI voices that we have. Now let’s say I want to use Noah. I can preview the voice as well and then click on confirm. That’s the voice. Gender is male. So I’m going to click on generate character and start generating character. And as you can see Max is created. So I’m going to select Max as the second H. And then I’m going to click on continue where I can see the script. Now the script is written in real time by our script writing agent. So he’s writing all the script. Again you can customize and change the script uh in whatever format you want. If you don’t like the script, you can regenerate it. But we’re just going to go ahead with this because this is really really well written script based on the blueprint, the DNA of a trending podcast that we created. Now what this did, it created a long script for a bigger podcast. And then from that long script, it created these three short scripts for the short podcast videos that we’re going to generate. So this is going to be the title. This is going to be the hook. And this is going to be the short video script that we’re going to use. So it’s created all these three scripts for us for the three video that we wanted to create. And we’re going to click on continue. And there we go. Now I can schedule all of them right now. I can manual schedule them. what date and time, how many times they need to be posted on which account they need to be posted or I can just schedule them later. I’ll have them created and I’ll schedule them later. So, I’m going to do that and click on continue. Now, what it’s going to do, this is the background music. I can change the background music to whatever I want or I can have no background music. And of course, you can preview all the background music here. We’ve got tons of them. and then click on create and it’s going to start creating these clickshot podcast videos for us. And once these videos are ready, of course, we can start modifying them um adding customizing whatever we want. Essentially, you don’t really need to do it because the AI is so so freaking good right now. Like these videos are perfect, especially because these videos are built and created based on the blueprint of a trending video. So they are guaranteed to get you views. They are guaranteed to get you higher retention. They’re guaranteed to get the algorithm, whatever algorithm needs to push your video to more people, to newer audience. Even if you don’t have any followers on your Instagram or Tik Tok or YouTube account, even if you don’t have any followers, the algorithm will push these videos to new people. So you get visibility in your own niche, in your own demographic and your video starts getting higher views, starts getting more clicks, more engagement, more comments, likes and shares and that in turn gives algorithm better signals to keep pushing your videos and you can get thousands if not hundreds and thousands of views in your first couple of days using hot shots because of this incredible feature of blueprint. the DNA that we extract from what’s already viral, what’s already trending. And when I say viral, I’m talking about something that’s recently been trending in less than 7 to 10 days, not something that was trending 10 years ago or 2 years ago or something like that, right? So, it’s generating these videos right now. And then once these videos generated, we can start customizing and editing them. And as you can see, the video is ready today. So, what we do is we download the thumbnail. The thumbnail was also created or just go in and start editing the video. Now the video editor that we have comes with a timeline editor and you can preview the video, you can see short real, you can um Instagram post, you can see the YouTube version of it. You can change this video into any uh platform that you want. And then you can preview the video and see how cool the video looks, how realistic the video looks. And there’s a transition between the first guest and the second host that be included. And then you can go ahead and you know modify everything the way you prefer to do it. Now what you can do is you can upload your own uh media to it. You can generate using AI. You can add text captions. You can do uh voice over. You can change the voices. You can again change to the voice that you use. You can clone your voice again. Um, you can add different shapes, you can add different properties, elements, uh, transitions. You can select whatever click you want and you can add transitions and animations to the scripts. You can add an intro and outro credit. You can add subtitles. So, we have a lot of styles that are pre-added. So, you can pick any of these styles or you can create your own custom style and add subtitles if you want. And if you want to add another video that you recorded, you could do that as well. Could be a camera and mic or just audio. And once you’re ready, you can save it as draft. It start rendering the video and we’ll start rendering the video. Now, once the video is rendered, the next step is if you haven’t already, um, schedule it. In our case, we schedule it later. So, what we can do is go to calendar and then we can schedule and we can pick the episode whichever we want the weight loss from the weight loss campaign. We can pick whatever content because the content is still render. It’s not showing up. And then we can pick the date and time and select whichever platform we want to publish to. You can say schedule post and it will get scheduled and published and it will show up right here like you can see. And again if you go to the characters tab you can see all the characters that you have created. So I’ve cloned myself I have one of my hair the John two John that I created. The max character that we just recently created is here. And then in the analytics you can see all the engagement and everything that is already here. Everything is ready for you to um copy and see the engagement for you. Now in the integration tab, you can connect all your social profiles as many as you want. You can connect your level apps as well if you want to do that. And uh that’s pretty much it. You can see all the episodes that have been created, all the campaigns that have been created. And you can start creating multiple of these videos and publishing these videos every single day on your social media platform and you’re guaranteed to get tons of views, tons of engagement and turning that engagement automatically into sales because again let me remind you one of the most powerful feature is the blueprint feature which helps you replicate the DNA of a trending video of a viral video. Your podcast are not just random podcast that of course are going to get a lot of view, but your podcast are supercharged podcast. These podcasts are going to get you tons and tons of more views. If you have any questions, feel free to reach out to our support team. We’ll be happy to help you. Wow. Wow. Wow. Who here absolutely loves what they just saw? Let me know in the chat box. Who here loves how easy it is to create a hyper realistic podcast? Let an agent do all of it for you. Let me know in the chat box. And let me tell you, because you’re on this webinar, you’ll be able to do this in an even simpler way because you’ll be able to take advantage of everything that allows you to do this in a click of a button a million times faster simply because you were smart enough to show up live. Let me know in the chat box who here loves what they just saw and wants to have access to their own pod shorts. Right now, there see lots of just coming in. Now again, this will allow you to finally start building a big audience on social media in a fun way where people actually, you know, follow you because you’re dropping really interesting content. Now, on secret number two, I quickly want to go over how you can actually turn this into weekly podcast income, which is fairly easy now that you’ll be building a large audience. You see, with Pod Shorts, you can instantly get paid online. You know, we have Priya on day three already reaching well over 28,000 people and that’s quite common. This type of content just reaches virality really, really quickly, as you’ll see happen to yourself as well. And that’s why with a podcast show, you can start creating instant income stream by either selling your affiliate offers. You can get paid for selling your own products and services or maybe coaching. Get paid by brands because once your show starts getting traction, people will want to put ads into your podcast. That’s very common as well. And on top of that, you get paid to even run them for clients. There are lots of businesses that will love to be featured in a podcast or have one of their own, but have no idea how to get started. Now, you’ll be able to generate 24/7 free traffic filled with highquality buyers from all these platforms that are getting billions of users and views daily. Now all it does
literally with just one show it will publish into every feed that matters. Your show will immediately generate Tik Tok traffic, Facebook traffic. On top of that it will generate YouTube traffic, LinkedIn traffic, Instagram traffic, everywhere where your audience is your platform will reach them. Your podcast will reach them because that is how thought Shorts is designed. a spiderweb of generating massive traffic and engagement to build you an audience. The one thing that finally allows to sell your products and services a whole lot quicker. And you can also use it for clients. Whether it’s an affiliate, a course creator, a coach, an agency, a beginner, small business, an e-commerce website, any type of person, you can set up a podcast for them and watch them grow or mention their name inside your podcast and watch them get a lot of traction and followers. You start controlling the traffic, making you a super valuable and actually a high asset to any type of business. Now, let’s do the math. Let’s say you just push 10 clips a day, which is completely done for you with Pod Shorts. Now, 30 days, that already is 300 clips a month. 300 podcast clips. The amount of traffic you’ll be getting from that is insane. Now, let’s say to be very conservative, each clip gets you 500 views, which is kind of the bare minimum with this type of content. Now, from there, that means you’re generating 150,000 eyeballs a month. Imagine 150,000 views. Now, this will turn into a ton of traffic, clicks, followers, engagement, leads, clients, and sales. It’s simple math, and that is what’s waiting on you. The moment you have pod shorts, you’ll be immediately seeing results by simply posting these pod shorts to socials completely done for you and watch these views rake in a ton of engagement, sales, and followers. And when you start generating views like that, you can even get paid by platforms to create videos. You will start getting monetized simply because you’re generating those amounts of views. You start getting paid simply for uploading. Not even selling a product or service. Just for the mere fact of uploading a podcast clip and getting views, you start getting paid per view. Now, anyone can do this even if you have zero followers as we speak. Now, let me know in the chat box, do you now see how owning a show like this brings you traffic and sales every week? Whether you’re selling affiliate offers, whether you have a link in your bio to your website, to your coaching offer, whether you want to do sponsor slots where you let businesses mention their product in your podcast, let me know in the chat box. And mind you, we’re doing amazing support like Obby said, handholding training, but honestly, the agent plans out your entire calendar for you with the hottest and trending topics, making sure you have mass engagement no matter what. Even if you’re a complete beginner without any tech skills, let me know in the chat box. Comment yes if you can see how owning a podcast show like this brings you traffic and sales every single week because that’s exactly what’s going to happen when you have direct special access. You see, you’ve seen what is possible. Woohoo wants to wake up tomorrow with your show already publishing while you slept. Meaning while you slept, it has gone out and found the most viral topics that people actually want to hear more about, related to your industry, related to what you have to sell. It has generated human and realistic avatars, published the content, generated views, generated engagement, and generated clicks that leads to sales. Comment me if you want that to happen to you. We’re going to show you exactly what you’re going to get and how that’s going to happen literally overnight. There we go. I see lots of me coming in. So, without further ado, let’s go ahead. I see John, Anna, Stacy, uh Melissa, Robert, Thomas, lots of me. Let’s go ahead and dive right in. Now, first of all, you’ll be unlocking right off the bat a pod shorts premium account. This means you’ll have the AI build out the show for you. You get a seven agent AI machine that immediately can generate five different shows up to 500 clips each. That is already more than enough than start dominating. But it gets even better. On top of that, you have the cast studio with the AI host allowing you to turn the host into an actual clone of you, yourself, or any other person. Now, where it gets even better, you’ll also have the ability to have up to four voices in every episode. It can be a two-person podcast, a threeperson podcast, or even more versatile and dynamic, a fourperson podcast. Now, these tend to do really well because they’re more opinions, more discussions, more topics, and it keeps the viewer engaged. Now, if that’s not enough, you’ll have the AI actually find you what is about to take off. You see, you want to make sure your topics are not only related to what you have to sell your industry and your niche, but it is also something that people want to hear regarding that topic. And that’s why the trend raider will go ahead and find the most hottest and related topics to your niche and create a massively viral podcast around it. On top of that, you have the blueprints from shows that are already working. This is what Obby showed you live on the demo. It will actually go and find these most successful podcasts out there and mimic the exact blueprint and framework that makes the show so successful. Now, furthermore, you have the variation engine. So, per platform, it cuts up the podcast nice and easy to consume and it goes ahead and turns all that attention that you’ll be generating into income. You’ll have a hosted bio place page plus offer rotation plus clicks. Meaning if you’re selling multiple offers regarding that podcast, maybe one time you’re talking about a certain product and another podcast you’re talking about another product, your bio link will rotate across these offers. Meaning every time people go and look up the product on your profile that you’ve been talking about in the podcast, they see the right offer, allowing you to get sales effortlessly. because people that come and click from a podcast are the most pre-sold buyers. Now, furthermore, you have the voice, video, and text AI without any API keys necessary, allowing you to get started right away. You’ll have six of our most valuable launch bonuses included, meaning we’ve already taken 50 proven shows ranked, ready to be deployed, ready for you to actually scale upon. We have the first commission fast track where we show you exactly how to take your first show and instantly start generating commissions and sales for your offers. And we’re going to add you to our show owners community. This is a dedicated community of people that run AI podcast. And we’re going to show you and introduce you to that community and show you how you’ll be able to crush it as well. Now, before I continue, let me know in the chat box who here is absolutely loving everything they’re getting so far. We’re giving you exact foundation that will allow you to succeed with this no matter what. Now, we’ve already seen this across all of our users, but I can’t wait for you to see success as well. Let me know in the chat box who here is loving everything they’re getting so far. And if you are, I see lots of yeses coming in. It’s about to get even better because we’re going to make sure you have full training, 247 support, and all the updates will be immediately included into your account. Now, speaking of which, here’s why that matters. You’ll be able to go from where you are right now to generating raving fans. Even if you’ve never had social media followers before, even if you’ve never posted online before, you can open up a faceless account today, start an AI podcast, and start generating massive followers simply because of the highly viral trending content, the topics, and extremely realistic and interesting conversations that you’ll be able to publish on complete autopilot. Now, because you’re on this webinar, I see a lot of people already asking for the link, we’re going to do something phenomenal. You see, if you know us on the webinar, we always give away the biggest bang for your buck, the biggest discounts, but also all the upgrades that allow you to make an absolute home run with this. And today, we’re going to give you the entire webinar bundle at a very special discount, but only for the people on this webinar, which is you. Meaning when you grab this today, you’re not just getting the premium account. We’re also going to add in the scaling account. Now the scaling account is extremely important because this instantly allows you to have over 100 channels which allows you to have over 100 income streams. You can see a finance channel, dog training channel, the sleep better channel, the golf mastery channel. All of them can have tens of thousands of subscribers. Now these channels are highly valuable. People love them and the topics and the conversations are so interesting. You’ll be able to tune in yourself and keep listening to them because they’re that good. Now, if that’s not enough, we’re giving you 500 episodes a month. This is on the house. Literally 7,500 clips, more than enough to dominate social media left, right, and center. Now, on top of that, you’re going to get the offers pre-installed across your niches. We’ve already taken the hottest offers for every single niche pre-installed into your account. You’ll also get studiograde models with priority rendering, so you have the most human and realistic podcast that will beat any other type of AI generated content. You have 10 different faces and voice flows that you can use at any time, plus 15 minute length podcast. Now, this is the perfect length for a podcast, and it allows people to not just watch a little five to 10 second clip, but they can even move on to the full episode of at least 15 minutes. This is where you’re going to shine because someone that watches a 15-minute podcast is completely sold, an active, engaged audience member, and it wants to hear more from you and wants to follow your pages. Now, we’re going to once again train you, hold your hand, and show you exactly how to do this. And quite frankly, the AI will do everything for you. It’s going to take one episode of 15 minutes, chop it into multiple clips for you, and then distribute along all these platforms. So, all these hooks will drive back to that one longer episode. This is how people in today’s day and age go viral and they never share how. Now, normally the scaling account is sold separately at $167 a year, but we were going to include it into your bundle. Now, every time we put people on a scaling account, they see results bigger and faster. You can see right here, Marker saying, “Now, I told myself one channel was plenty.” And then my third channel, a sleep and recovery show, which is a very interesting topic that I’m even very interested in. I almost didn’t launch because it didn’t have a scaling account until he decided to make use of it. It did 212,000 views in week two and the bio link started clicking every day. He checked the dashboard from his daughter’s Rosado and had to put the phone away before he teared up. One channel would have meant that show never existed. So the scaling account allows you to have multiple channels and scale a lot faster. Now who here absolutely loves this? There we go. Lots of users coming in. I see the chat is going crazy. Now that means on top of the Pod Shorts AI premium account, you’re also getting the Pod Shorts AI scaling account. Now, in all seriousness, guys, if you just want to dominate social media and build an audience, not just keep posting for the sake of posting, but actually posting and getting something from it, then this is where it’s at. At least try this out because owning a profitable podcast in today’s day and age is one of the most smartest moves you can do. It is known that social media pushes podcast clips more than any other type of content, and it’s exactly what you’ll witness the moment you have your scaling account. Now, to make it even better, you’re also going to get the full agency. You see, there are tons of people that love to have access to this, love to have their own podcast, love to dominate social media, and they’re asking, you know, we’re looking for someone that’s different. We’re looking for someone that can manage our social media, but everybody keeps creating the same content. You come in different and say, you know what, I’m going to create you an AI podcast show around your business, and people are going to love it. And this means you’ll be able to get an agency license that can generate unlimited accounts with, you know, different podcasts al together. On top of that, white label dashboard with completely your logo. You also get 20 team seats and 20 client loggings, all paying you monthly. You can literally keep a 100% of the profits. You’ll have a full agency storefront built out for you, plus the checkout, plus the hosting completely on our account. So you have a setup agency completely for free. Now you have the client getting arsenal literally your reseller license our uh client review accounts done for you client contract templates and our demo showing and client getting toolkit. These are what makes it so easy to land clients because once you click on them you’ll see how effortlessly you can present this to anyone and watch them desperately want their own AI podcast account. Now, furthermore, you’ll have a recurring client getting reports that show people, hey, how it’s working, as well as the amount of views that they’re getting, which makes people, you know, desperate for keeping that account, allowing you once again to keep 100% of that profit month over month. And normally, this is sold separately at $997. Now, we’re going to include this into your bundle for next to nothing only because you were smart enough to show up live. You can even let Paw Shorts AI sell itself and you keep a 100% of the profits. Which means on top of the Pod Shorts AI premium account and scaling account, you’re also unlocking the entire agency upgrade, which normally is 997 annual. Now, it gets even better because once again, since you’re smart enough to show up to a live webinar, that’s where you always get the biggest bang for your buck. You’re also going to get access to the POS shorts coach. Now, this makes it that you’ll have a guide telling you exactly click by click what to do to see massive results in your Pod Shorts account. You’ll have a 24/7 coach that’s trained on your actual data. If you wanted to generate topics, if you want it to give you the best time to post, it will do everything for you. It has a personalized Monday action plan telling you exactly, hey, this week these are the topics we need to put out there. These are the types of content we’ll be generating. Everything in there is designed to get you more views. It has the niche analyzer, the offer optimizer, the clip doctor to pick the most viral clips out to make sure you see a surge of virality on your socials. They have a monthly state of your network report and a prompt pack given to you with 30 topics and milestone alerts. The pod coach is there to make sure you don’t have to guess. Everything is designed to get you results. Now, normally this is there for $4.97 a year, but again, you will be able to get it included into your bundle for next to nothing. You see, Bod Coach is designed, literally trained to take any user from zero to 100K plus views. You’ll be dominating any platform. You know, you see some piece of content do over 1.5 million views because people just keep sharing it. They want others to hear what they’ve hear. And that is exactly what Pod Coach is designed to do. Meaning on top of the premium account, the scaling account, and the agency upgrade, you’ll also be unlocking the coaching mode. Now, this means the moment you have access to pots, you can guarantee yourself of being guided and led to over a 100,000 views without a doubt. Because that’s exactly once again what Pod Coach is designed to do. You’ll have everything to stand out on social media and not just post content for, you know, a few clicks or views here and there, but to build a thriving audience that follows you for your podcast. That builds an audience that is people that are ready to buy, people that listen and engage and are actively following you. And that’s so valuable in today’s day and age. No matter what type of business you run, no matter what type of industry you’re in, having your own podcast show being managed and grown for you with AI is one of the best actions you can take right now. And to make it even better, only on this webinar, and truly only for the people on this webinar, we can do this because this, you know, is a lot of expense on our behalf, we’re going to allow you to massively amplify your results with the amplifier axis. This means you can publish not the just the 12 networks, but you can generate so much more traffic as we’re including hidden and faster traffic sources, allowing you to publish instantly to over 15 platforms. Your podcast will get seen no matter what. You’ll be the talk of the town online. You’ll have people from all kinds of platforms tuning in, discovering an interesting topic that they like, and seeing a real podcast that captures their attention. We’re going to give you the variation engine on every network, allowing you to go from one simple podcast and one simple post to have all these different hooks from the same podcast posted to all these platforms. I mean, look at the level of domination that you’ll be able to tap into in a matter of clicks, completely done by AI. Now, not only that, every single podcast episode will be turned into a blog post, allowing you to generate real SEO traffic for people that look up that topic, look up what has been discussed, or look up the podcast in general, they’ll actually land on a branded site that actually transcribes the podcast, takes the best highlights, and also includes your links to your offers. Now, having this on top of that completely generated on autopilot allows your podcast to grow even faster because people can share these blog posts as well. Now, you have the audiogram generator included which makes sure you have beautiful listening cards that people see while they’re watching or listening to the podcast instead of watching the clip and an omniresence playbook plus our cheat sheets. You see, with the amplifier, you’ll be showing up everywhere. It is impossible for you not to at least generate a thousand views per clip. Now, we’re going to give you our playbook and cheat sheet to take that thousand to over 10,000 views per clip. We’re going to show you exactly how it’s done. Long story short, with the amplifier alone, you are guaranteed to grow a mass following. And a mass following makes it so much easier for you to sell any product or service online. Which means on top of the premium account, the scaling account, the agency upgrade, and the coaching mode, you’re also unlocking the amplifier mode, which normally goes for 997 annual, as you’ll be able to freely post on over 15 platforms, dominating with every single podcast show. Now, we’re also going to give you access to something that is going to make sure you make commissions no matter what. You see, whether you have a product right now or not, one of our biggest success stories creators is what we call affiliate real AI. This is a designated software that makes sure you start generating affiliate sales because now that you get a lot of eyeballs from your podcast, it’s only natural you want to monetize that. Now, James Keller here did over 3.7K, $3,740 in commissions. Before, he was struggling to make at least 400 a month. Now he’s doing well over 3.7K. Combining affiliate real AI together with Pod Shorts is a commission mayhem. Now therefore, on top of the premium account, scaling account, AC upgrade, coaching mode, and amplifier mode, we’re going to include affiliate real AI special access just to make sure you can monetize all that traffic and actually see commissions and money being made from your podcast show. Now, I have to ask once again, who here is loving everything they’re getting so far? let me know in the chat box because honestly there’s nobody else out there offering this level of guarantee and success simply allowing you to not just again I keep saying it have a little you know tool that can create some videos or can create some content but have something that is designed to create meaningful engagement a real followers dedicated audience that is completely done by AI who here loves this and wants to start using this now owning your own podcast show. We have, like I said before, lady, in the gardening niche. We have people that are in the aviation niche. We have people in the golf niche, in the finance niche, in the AI niche. They are crushing it with their AI podcast show, and people love watching them. Now, to make it even better, since you’ll be dominating social media, Obby said we just have to give them one of our most best and successful social media management tools. You see, you’re going to get a ton of engagement. You’ll be showing up everywhere. You’ll be getting followers everywhere. So therefore, to manage it all, Obby decided to include AI Social’s full access. This is your self-scheduling AI social media manager. It sets up your social media campaigns. It sells schedules. It sets up the content stream. It has all the video wizards. It finds trends. In addition, it creates articles. Everything you need to keep your socials managed without you having to go all over the place is done by AI socials. Now, this means on top of all the podcast shorts, now that you have an audience, it will also create additional videos alongside it to fuel your audience, your new audience even more. Now, this means on top of the premium account, the scaling account, the AC upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode, you’re getting the biggest bang for your buck, and the affiliate real AI special access, you’ll also have AI socials unlocked. Now, with this, you’re quite frankly unstoppable. My ask to you is try it for at least 14 days, and I know for a fact, even within the first 24 to 72 hours, you’ve seen more results than any other content tool you’ve used today. If you ever wanted to just generate a ton of followers, if you ever wanted to just grow your audience so fast to the point you finally have people reaching out to you, asking about your products, asking about your services, then this is it right here. Because the total value of everything you’re getting today is well over $8,89. And granted, with this, you can use it both for yourself and for other businesses. There’s so many businesses out there. One of the most in- demand services is helping people grow on social media. But unfortunately, everyone always offers the same. We’re going to, you know, generate some videos with AI. We’re going to publish on your account. Now, you’ll be able to come in and say, “We’re going to set up your very own profitable AI podcast show.” Now, you can see right here, the demand for this is insane. You can see people are willing to pay over 500, right? We need a social media short form video strategist. Your strategy is, hey, let’s set up an AI podcast show. Have you tried that already? No. All right, let’s try it out. And if you like it, then we move forward to the monthly retainer. Here we’re looking for a content creator and social media manager for long-term well over 2500. This is something you always find clients in because people always want to grow on social media, but nobody is offering them their own AI podcast, making you stand on your own, allowing you to stand apart from all the competition, stand above them, and more importantly, be one of the most valuable assets in the industry. Now, beginners are seeing, and it’s not just something we’re saying, beginners like Priya right here are seeing big big results in less than 3 days with Pot Shores. Again, she had zero followers when she started, and that was her biggest fear that she’d stay there, that nobody, you know, that all the effort is for nothing. Now, day one, nobody knew her show ever existed. She hadn’t told anyone about it. And then the algorithm pushed the third clip to over 20,000 28,000 strangers, and the rest is history. From this point on, she’s averaging about 50k views back to back. And it all started with pots. Now, who here thinks that’s amazing and wants the exact same thing that happened to them? Because that’s what waiting on you on the inside. The moment you grab Paw Shorts is finally the moment you start seeing massive traction on social media. Now, outside of this special webinar, the investment for Pod Shorts will be no less than $5997 annual simply because it’s that powerful and we already have people that are happily paying close to $6,000 a year to use everything that I’ve just shared with you. Now, because you’re on this webinar, you’ll be able to snatch this up for a steal. But I want you to know, even if we offered it at only $2997, which is half off, it’s still more than worth it. It’s a way for you to finally get seen online. It’s a way for you to finally build an audience instead of just posting content into the void. And again, Pod Shorts has a builtin earning mechanism from day one. Meaning, when you start grabbing this, you actually start earning at the same time. You get paid for affiliate offers mentioned in the podcast. You get paid for your own offers if you have your own products and services you want to sell. You get paid by brands that future them in your podcast as you’ll frequently get inquiries. And we’re actually going to show you where and how to make those happen. and you get paid to run shows for clients. You have full handholding plus the pot coach to guarantee your success. Now, this will allow you to own an audience and generate sales guaranteed. And I want that to sink in because if you’ve ever used any other content tool, they are great at what they do, but they don’t help you grow an audience. And that’s where Pod Shorts differs. It takes the best of both worlds, short form content and podcast. And that’s how Pod Shorts is born. Two proven assets combined to generate the result that is needed to grow your business. Now, we figured to offer it on the webinar at 1997 annual, but I want you to know even though that is more than worth it, you won’t have to invest anywhere near that. You see, because you were smart enough to show up here, and I know you’re going to crush it with pots, you’ll be able to use this in the entire bundle. And we drop it down all the way to just 597 annual. Now, I just want to ask real quick, who here agrees the 597 a year is a very fair investment for a system so powerful, creating such a realistic, remember up to 15inute episodes, immediately chopped into multiple clips, distributed to over 15 channels, dominating social media, generating traffic left, right, and center. Every day you wake up, you see more subscribers, more followers, more sales, more clicks, more leads, and more engagement across all social channels. Now, who here believes 597 once a year is more than worth for all those results? I see lots of yeses coming in. Now, because you’re on this webinar, even though that’s more than valuable or worth it, you won’t have to invest anywhere near that. You see, when you comment the word live simply because you are live here today and prove that you’re here live with us. Comment live if you want the live discount. Because when you comment live right now, we’re going to do something insane. Instead, we’re not even going to charge 597 annual even though that’s an absolute steal like most of you already said. When you grab this right now, we’re going to drop it down to as low as 317 annual who have a viral podcast show, multiple shows, mind you, over 7,500 clips that you’ll be distributing nonstop every single month on autopilot to dominate any vertical and get your offers and links seen. And to make it the ultimate deal, this is where it gets exciting. 40 live coupons for an ultimate discount. Meaning the team is going to put the link in the chat right now and first come first serve you’re going to get a live coupon for showing up live taking it down from 317 annual to as low as 267 annual. Now this is as low as it will ever be in a lifetime but only when you grab this on this webinar. If you want this for only 267 a year allowing you to dominate social and get a return on this so incredibly fast. Remember, Priya doing 28,000 views on day three. And that’s not just her. Jolene with her gardening podcast even started generating sales within 72 hours. Make sure you click the link in the chat box right now because this is what’s going to allow you to finally build an audience of people that want to hear from you, that are excited about what you’re talking about, about your offers. Now, you can do this completely faceless. You can clone your face or do it for someone else. But only for 267. When you go to the link in the chat right now, you will be able to generate raving fans and have your entire content schedule laid out for you. Now, make sure you go to the link because these coupons literally will fly off the shelves because everybody wants to build an audience, but nobody knows how. Now, hot Shorts is the ultimate shortcut and the easiest way to do it. It combines the most viral and proven formats together, which is short form content and podcast, and puts them on socials. It is known to be the number one type of content that get pushed the most on socials, that builds the most audience, and that algorithms even favor. And because you’re on this webinar, we’re even going to extend to make sure you can publish to over 15 platforms at once, generating and guaranteeing you a ton of get
views, leads, clicks, and sales. Now, if you want that to happen to you, make sure you go to the link and the moment you have pod shorts, you’ll start seeing the very fact of an engaged audience being built in front of your own eyes. You’ll see daily leads come in, sales and conversions coming in because pots viewers are extremely hot. They love what they’re seeing. They’re more engaged. They’re listening. They’re in tune because the topic is of their interest and they see a real conversation taking place. Now, all of this for only 267. And the AI does everything for you. Even if you’re a beginner, you’re not techy, you don’t know where to start. This is exactly the reason you should grab Pod Shorts. Because one thing you should know is that when you’re able to dominate social media and actually have a decent amount of followers, actually getting people to listen to you, that’s when everything becomes so much easier. And that’s what Pod Shorts is designed to do. Make sure you go to the URL in the chat right now. Remember, it works for yourself, but also for anyone else who needs people to find them. Podcasts are the easiest way to get found online. And this is also proven if you go to the articles right here that I’ll actually show you that podcast clips are the number one way people generate views. Clips on social become topcast or top podcast discovery tool. Now, these clips allow people to find you quicker than any other type of content and meaning it will also generate you more leads, generate you more sales, and generate you a ton of engagement. podcast or podcasts knows exactly what type of topics to put out there that spark a ton of conversation that gets a lot of people interested in you, your brand, and your topics. Now, you can start seeing this with your own eyes for only 267 annual. Now, make sure you grab this right now because the price will go up and we have some insane bonuses that I’ll mention shortly that are only available while we are live right now. Now, a podcast show creates an instant income stream where you can sell your own affiliate offers, sell your own products and services, get paid by brands. We’re actually going to show you how easy that is and get paid to run a show for clients. Now, the link is in the chat. I see people already joining in. Congratulations, Tommy. Congratulations, Stephan. Um, Alisa saying, “I always wanted to have my podcast show. This is a great way to get started.” Amazing. It’s not only a great way to get started, it’s one of the best ways to get started. You don’t have to invest in equipment. You don’t have to, you know, hire someone. You don’t have to go through all the trials and tribulations of research. This makes sure you can immediately get going and start seeing real results and it’s so darn realistic. You’ve seen it with your own eyes and that’s why people keep following. That’s why people love it. So, make sure you go to the link in the chat. There you go. Anthony, congratulations. John, congratulations. Stephan, congratulations. Donnie, congratulations. You guys are super quick. Now, I do want to, you know, mention something super important because this once again is only available while we’re live and you’re getting an amazing discount. And that’s why we’re going to do two special things. But first, make sure before anything else, make sure you go to the link and grab this before it’s too late. Because if you’ve been posting and you’ve been waiting and the views haven’t come this far, that’s the reason you should grab Pod Pod Shorts right now. Because Pot Shorts is designed to break this cycle and only 267 that is a steal to finally build up an audience and will also allow you to finally make use of any other tool because you have an audience that now listens to you. Furthermore, if your follower count has never moved in months, if you’re still under, you know, 2,000 followers, 3,000 followers, or you want to break through the ceilings that you might have right now, start leveraging the most viral format online. Now, this is going to make sure you start generating followers in record time. Now, furthermore, if you’ve been struggling with generating leads or sales with your current types of content, leverage podcast content and see the change with your own eyes. Now, you have a money back guarantee to try this out. So, make sure you at least grab this and see the results with your own eyes. Now, Priya once again feared having zero followers generated 28,000 views on day three. Now, if she can do it, anyone can do it, and she’s not an anomaly. We have once again Jolene with her gardening clip. Now she has 41 clips in one month published from Pod Shorts and she’s crushing it. Now all of this for only 267 including your premium account, your scaling account, your agency upgrade, the coaching mode, making sure you have everything you need to dominate with a full action plan laid out for you. the amplifier mode, the affiliate reel special access, so you can even sell extra offers on all of your podcast using affiliate reel and AI socials unlocked to manage all of your social media platforms. There is everything you need under one roof to absolutely start dominating only for 267 when you grab it on this webinar. Now, for a couple of people, I see congratulations. I see a couple of people asking about the mega bundle done for you and that’s a good point. Let me actually go ahead and mention that right now because if you’re lucky and you know if you know our webinars we you know do this occasionally not always and some of you won’t even notice or see it but every now and then we have these special openings where you can take advantage of some of our mega bundles or done for use. Now you don’t necessarily need these to make pod shorts work. I do want you to understand that. Make sure you at least grab Pod Shorts because dominating with podcast is right now your best advantage to move forward and actually start seeing immense results. But if you really want to knock it out of the park, make sure when you see this box right here, and this is something that you rarely see. And if you happen to see it, you know, the Pod Shorts mega bundle, check this box right here as it will allow you to have three VIP live training calls with the founder, which is Obby himself. It’ll actually show you the different podcasts, look at your account, go over the strategy, show you the AI. This is so valuable because you can copy everything Obby is doing on the screen. On top of that, we’re going to give you a VIP live training, one of our most success storydriven trainings where every time people go through it, they turn into success stories no matter what. And we’ve updated it with brand new methods for 2026. Now, this is a dedicated live training on how to set up an AI automation agency. Businesses crave AI automation right now and you’re going to be able to capitalize on that and we’re going to show you exactly how. Furthermore, you’re going to get a VIP live training on short form content agency. You see, now that you have an amazing system that creates short form content and long form content, businesses need to grow their socials and you’ll be able to cater to that need. I’m going to show you and train you exactly how easily you can do that and get paid for it. Now, both these trainings are worth $9.97 each. You’ll be getting all of this when you check this box at way less. Now, the unlimited AC accounts for pod shorts will be included when you check this box as well. multiple high-speed AI trendy content creation, unlimited AC access to entire AI podcast, unlimited AC access even to affiliate re and there are tons of affiliates out there that would love to have this and you can resell Affiliate Real AI and actually keep 100% of the profits and let now let’s say you have a podcast on affiliate marketing. Do you know how many affiliate marketers would listen to that? a real podcast talking about the trials and tribulations of affiliate marketing tips, tricks, all the things that are important for people to know, but also all the things that people can relate to. And in that podcast, you can mention affiliate reel, how it makes everything so much easier and you can share a link in bio and boom, you can sell your agency access. Now, you get unlimited access to AI socials as well. same story. You can create a viral podcast on any of these topics, social media marketing, AI automation, affiliate marketing. People tune in, they listen to what’s being shared, they listen to what’s being discussed, and the links and the products you name in those podcasts start seeing sales. Now, furthermore, you get access to our secret AI agent uh agency Facebook group, which is only available through this as well. Now, normally to get access to this group, it’s a 97 a month, but you’ll be able to get a lifetime access for free when you check this box to all of this. Now, only a handful of these things are already way more worth than what it’s at right here. But if you check this box, you’re going to get the live training, the founder call trainings, the unlimited AC accounts to everything, but only for the first 50 people. Now, on top of the mega bundle, and I see people already grabbed the mega bundle. Congratulations. super smart decision. We also have a very rare opportunity to get everything, and when I say everything, I’m talking about everything done for you, handed to you, a podcast made for you. Our team delivers three complete podcast networks, niches picked for you, cast built out for you, episodes cued for you up to 30 days and beyond, money links installed, so every episode actually turns into income. All we need is your affiliate ID. If you don’t have one, we even help you get one. And boom, you have a money-making podcast on a silver platter done for you by our team. Now, if this is something you want, then make sure at checkout to check this box right here. The pot shorts done for you. This is the complete AI podcast machine done for you. The complete AI podcast with three done for you show networks, proven niches, pre-verified for demand, show names, branding, cover art, done AI hosting cast. We built all the characters in their hyper realistic 90 research episode topics, 15 episodes generated and cued. We have monetized bio pages ready for you. 90-day content rollout. Now, this is first come, first serve. As you can imagine, this is, you know, our team manually going into your account, setting everything up, setting up your account, making sure it’s monetized, and making sure you’re generating traffic and sales. If you want this completely taken care of and done for you, snatch one of the done for you spots. These are so valuable, but also very rare because our team can only manage and handle so many accounts. So if you want the done for you where the entire podcast shows built out for you, cued, posted, monetized and immediately, you know, in three different networks, you already start seeing views, traffic, sales, and an audience being built for you. Check this box. This is one of the biggest shortcuts you can take. Now, all of this is taken care of, but only if you first get access at 267. And once again, 267 is as low as it gets. I see people asking, um, amazing. Uh, I still want the done for you. I didn’t see that. So, like I said, it is very rare. So, chances are you might not even see the done for you. If you want the done for you, make sure you first have access to the bundle deal right here because only when you have the 267 bundle deal, you are eligible to get everything done for you. And then if you’ve missed it for any reason, ask the team in the chat for the done for you link and they might be able to grab a spot for you. Now, if you just see the no order box on the order form to get the done for you, consider yourself lucky. Check that box and secure that spot for yourself. Nonetheless, you have a full 14-day money back guarantee on everything so you can see this work first. Actually judge it from the inside out. I mean, see the results with your own eyes and then still decide whether you want to keep it. But I know once you have it and you see the return on investment, you see the growth, you see the sales, you know for a fact that finally this was the missing piece that not just posting content, not just going on social media, but growing an audience. Because ask yourself once again, what do people, you know, rather come back to? just a short clip, you know, a promotional video talking about a product or whatsoever, or a podcast, a sitdown on maybe a sensitive topic, an interesting topic, a futuristic topic. These are the types of content that attract real listeners, people that are engaged, people that are not just scrolling for fun, but people that actually want to learn a thing or two and they like the discussion. And how many times have you scrolled and you saw somewhat of a podcast clip about a topic that interests you and you stayed you stayed listening? Just uh a few um I think a few days ago I was so invested in a podcast that I just came across scrolling. I immediately started following it. I’m still watching their clips to today which was about HDS HD something and I was always very fascinated about and I always you know wanted to understand how does it work? How does the brain work in that way is I have a lot of friends and that podcast explained it so well and I also had a lot of trainings and I actually shared this podcast with a lot of friends as well and that’s how quickly it can happen. Now I’m living proof that podcast have such a strong effect. So, make sure you grab Pod Shorts because the type of podcast you’ll be able to generate with two people, three people, four people, all done by AI for only 267 at this level of realism is unheard of. If you try to do this anywhere else, you would need a gazillion amount of tools, a ton of complexity, and you have no support and no handholding whatsoever. But when you grab Pod Shorts today, you have everything you need under one roof. an AI agent that does it all for you, plus a massive support, a dedicated built-in coach, monetization, and if you’re smart and you see the done for you, grab that and it’s all taken care of for you. And also, make sure to get the mega bundle to hop on the live training where you can even ask live questions, see over the shoulder, click by click, and get access to all the unlimited agency accounts. Now again, you’ve seen the quality of these. The value is there. The realism is there. And this is what social media loves. This is why you’re going to see so much engagement because it looks so good. The topics are trending. And it does exactly what social media expects from you, giving you more reach, more views, and imagine that 15 times over all platforms. You’re guaranteed to get views, engagement, leads, and sales whether you like it or not. because these accounts are getting real results from it. Now again, this is not just something we’re saying. It is all backed up by data. Why do platforms push podcast clips so heavily? It’s all because of the watch time. Two people talking holds a viewer far longer. Imagine three people talking, four people talking that go into somewhat of a discussion that go into a topic or a debate. That’s the type of content where people, you know, they side with one person over the other and they want to hear the arguments and the counterarguments. This is a dedicated audience that you’re growing because of Pod Shorts. Now, right here you can see once again, you know, podcast top podcasts are the best discovery tools on social. Now, one in three viewer, this is tested. One in three viewers goes on to follow the show. One in three click viewers turns into a follower. Now you’ll be generating tens of thousands follow of follow followers over and over again and every time one out of three of each of those people will turn into a dedicated follower. Now you have the best of both worlds. Short form content that is proven to be the fastest way to get seen online and podcast content that is known to attract the best type of viewers and get the most reach and engagement. This is something that is guaranteed to grow your accounts and you can snatch this up for only 267. Normally you need different integrations with different tools and you know you need to do a lot of techy work to make such a realistic podcast and you maybe get left with a 10-second or 5-second clip. Now you can do podcast for up to 15 minutes distribute clips onto 15 plus platforms and it’s all handled for you. Make sure you go to the link in the chat. I’m going to quickly congratulate a ton of people that are joining in as we speak. I see Adam is in. Anony’s in. Stephan is in. Michael is in. Cody is in. Michelle is in. John is in. David is in. Randy is in. Congratulations. Uh, I got the done for you as well. Um, I see Stephan asking, “Are there still done for you spots available? I’d like one, please. I’ll ask the team.” And that goes for everyone. If you want the done for you and you didn’t see it, make sure you ask the team and they might have a second chance for you. Um, I mean, I don’t blame you. The done for you is one of the best things you can grab immediately after the pop shorts. and as well as make sure not to forget the mega bundle. Now, when you have the entire package, by far, you’ve just solidified your success cemented in stone. But it all starts with getting pot shorts and only 267. You got nothing to lose and everything to gain. As you know, we’re super transparent. And on top of that, you know, you have a proven money back guarantee that is backed to the buyer. You have full protection allowing you to use this, see the results, and decide if you want to keep it. Now, we know for a fact once you look back at this very moment, you’re going to wonder, “Why did I even hesitate? You’re seeing more views than ever, more clicks than ever. Finally, people are interested in your products. Finally, people are following your accounts. They want to hear more about what you’re talking about. They want to hear more about the products and services that you actually go ahead and suggest in your podcast. And this is what Pod Shorts does for you. Now, make sure you snatch this up because we’re only here for a little bit longer. We’re answering a few questions in the chat, but as soon as that’s done, the entire year package will raise in price and the done for you and mega bundle will disappear. So, definitely make sure to snatch those up while they’re still available. Now, I’m going to quickly recap everything you’re getting, as well as some of the insane bonuses that I haven’t even mentioned yet, and as well as congratulate all the people that are getting in. Now, by the looks of it, we only have less than a dozen coupons left that actually get this at only 267, which is once again a steal for having a premium. the scaling account, the agency upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode on its own is worth way more than 267, the affiliate real AI special access, and the AI socials access unlocked. So, let’s break down once again everything you’re getting here today. Now, I say Reese Orion just got in. Reys, congratulations to you. Now, first of all, you’re going to get the premium account as you know that will give you the pop short, seven agent AI machine, five complete shows, 500 viral clips, 1500 unique posts. I mean, you are going to crush it. You have cast studio AI with different hosts. You can clone yourself, make your own persona, highly realistic. You have the trend raider to make sure you’re only posting viral content. Capil drama, congratulations with your access by the way. The variation engine dominate multiplatforms. Now, hosted monetized bio page and offer rotation to sell any offer. Robert from New Orleans. Congratulations. Now, hosted monetized bio page. You have a built-in voice and video text AI. You don’t need API keys. Keep that in mind. You don’t need credits. If that’s something that’s kept you on the fence or holding you back or something you’ve been wondering about, consider this answered. You do not need API keys. You don’t need credits. Now, this is something we only do on this webinar. So, if this is the moment you’ve been waiting for or the answer you’ve been waiting to hear, go and grab it right now because after this webinar, you will need, you know, your own API keys and such. You know, we can’t keep doing this for everyone else. So, when you grab it right now, when you grab it right now on the webinar, you won’t need any API keys. You won’t need any credits. You’re set. You can start using it. You can start using it ongoingly, non-stop, and you’ll see massive results. If you wait, miss out on this, then you come back later, you will see different bonuses. Um, no more, you know, everything’s taken care of for you. The done for you, the mega bundle will probably not be available anymore. Only on the webinar, you get the biggest bang for your buck. I mean, the Trend Raider alone usually is 297 a year. You’re getting everything for 267. So, make sure you take advantage of this. It’s one of the best investments you can make. And you’re getting all of our launch bonuses. Dennis Perez, congratulations. You get training, 24/7 support, and updates. Now, we’re going to give you a commission fasttrack. So, we want to make sure that you feel confident that when you grab this, you’re actually going to make money of it. Now, not only are you, you know, backed by our money back guarantee, but we’re actually going to fast track your commissions. We don’t want you to sit and wait. We’re going to immediately make sure your first podcast start making you sales just like it did for Jolene, just like it did for Eric, just like it did for Mark. Now, on top of that, you have 50 proven show niches rated and ranked, ready to deploy, a viral hook vault, a commercial right license. Now, by the way, these hooks generate thousands of views quickly. Now, you have the show owners community where you’ll be able to see a like-minded individuals crushing it and it’s so easy because all these people are literally just as you. They started the podcast show using Pod Shorts and they’re crushing it now. Now you have the clip money masterass allowing you to see how you can clip your podcast into generating more income from social media. Because once you start posting these podcast, you actually start getting monetized by social media platforms and incentivized to post more. Meaning you don’t even have to sell a product or service. You literally get paid just to upload pod shorts. Emily Jones, congratulations to you. Now, the total value of this alone is over $4,000. You’re going to get all of that included in your bundle. Now, as mentioned, you get the bot coorts coach. This allows you to have a 24/7 ask anything coach trained on your data. This is a dedicated coach we designed to get you to over 100,000 views in record time. It gives you personalized action plans, a niche analyzer, and an offer optimizer, a monthly state of your network report, as well as a prompt pack with 30 topics and milestone alerts whenever you hit a new milestone. Now, the Pod Coach prompt pack is included and 30 winning episode topics for any given niche. and our milestone alert system. Now, normally this coach is 997 a year. We’ve trained it with so much data to the point we tested it with brand new people, beginners, and it guided them to their first 100,000 view. So, make sure you grab this because you’ll have the Pod Shorts Coach included. If you wait and grab this later, we can’t keep handing out the Pod Shorts Coach to everyone. So, only on this webinar, you get the biggest bang for your buck. Now, it is literally less than 300 bucks, allowing you to test drive this. You have a 14-day money back guarantee. And if you’re smart enough, you get the done for you. You see the results happen for you, completely taken care of for you. Now, as mentioned, you’re going to get AI socials, which will manage your entire social media campaigns. It will find more trends. It will do all the social posting. It leverages your content stream. It self-schedules. It’s a smart system that posts on the right time in the right place with the right types of content. Now, furthermore, you have the scaling account which allows you to access to over 100 channels giving you 100 income streams and 100 sellable assets. You can create up to 100 podcast shows each with a ton of different episodes. You 500 episodes per month, up to 7,500 clips every single month without fill. And remember, you don’t need API keys. You don’t need credits. This is scaling season only when you grab this on the webinar. Now, top converting offers pre-installed across all niches, studio grade models with priority rendering, 10 face and voice close, and a portfolio plus uh portfolio map plus niche blueprints and a breakout detector. The moment not notices, hey, this podcast is going to go viral, it will tell you up front because it notices about the engagement, the speed of, you know, views, it sees all these metrics as, hey, this one is going to break through. You know, make sure you attach your best offer to it because a ton of people will see this. Now, you are bound when you have the scaling account to see a ton of skill happen. That’s what it’s designed to do. Now, on top of that, you’re also going to get the amplifier, which is one of the biggest success story makers. 12 additional publishing networks, allowing you to post over 15 platforms in one click, completely done by AI. Variation engine coverage on every network, so it varies the content accordingly with different hooks, different bodies, different posts, and people won’t be able to get around you. They will hear from you, follow you, engage with you, and like what you have to offer, and they keep coming back. It even turns every podcast into its own block with a block engine getting you free traffic from Google audiogram generator and the omniresence playbook. Now the amplifier is included in the bundle. Also at just 267 you get everything you see here. This is the biggest bang for your buck that you can get. Now we even give you our entire cheat sheet, all of our money platforms where you can start earning on and our Tik Tok viral traffic training, our YouTube lead generation app and our brand new underground traffic secrets. If you’ve been wanting to get out there and get more businesses, more people to see you and see what you have to offer, no matter if you’re selling an agency service or an affiliate offer or a BTOC offer or digital product or even coaching, this is going to allow you to become not only an expert in the space, respected, followed, and grow a mass audience. Now, you’re going to get Affiliate Relay, which creates a one-click AI affiliate website selling your affiliate offers with all the review videos done for you, content done for you. It has automated traffic built in, and this allows you to sell affiliate offers through your podcast effortlessly and sending them to a site that takes care of all the conversions. Now, with the AI podcast, everything is taken care of for you. You know, you have four-way conversations, humanlike natural conversations, podcast scripts, and conversations. is you’ll turn your IDs into highquality podcast instantly. And you have the Pod Shorts agency. You can upgrade to AC license, AC white label. You have 20 team members, 20 client login, done for you a website, plus 5 years of free hosting, PayPal checkout included, bookings included, done for you reseller, review accounts, contract templates, automated branding, client reports, and ready-made contracts and lead magnets. You have everything you need to absolutely crush it. It’s all here, but only when you grab it right now. Remember, you have a 14-day money back guarantee. Try it out at the very least. And watch how this is going to change your success practically overnight. Now, make sure you use the coupon code. When you click this button right here, it will take you to the order form. I’ll quickly show you. And I want to congratulate Anthony once again. Congratulations. Uh, managed to get the done for you. Super stoked. Now, here’s the thing. Once again, if you’re lucky, you see these two boxes right here. The Posh Mega Bundle and the Potchart done for you. Now, make sure ideally you get both, but if you have to choose one or the other, I mean, choose which one you attach the most value to. Now, for me, that will always be the done for you. But furthermore, you know, the mega bundle is something that will make sure you have the biggest value because this alone is worth a,000. This alone is worth a,000. Now, these are normally 97 a year, 97 a year, 97 a year. All of this you’re going to get for just a one time because the prices on the, you know, mega bumble and the done for you are a one time. These are not annual. These are not monthly. It’s a one time and everything takes care taken care of for you. So, when you go here, you put in your email. All right? And then make sure to put in the coupon code as well. And you’ll see if I go up here,
give it a second. If we still have coupons available, that is. I mean, act fast. If you’re seeing this, this usually or might mean, you know, coupons are starting to run out. So, make sure you go to the link. Luckily, it’s still working, but you can see it’s going slower because coupons are getting out the door. Make sure you go right now. In all seriousness, you do not want to miss out on this. You see the price has dropped down to just 267. Now grab this and if you’re lucky to see the mega bundle and done for you, grab those as well. As a matter of fact, let me show you the done for you and what it entails. Once again, I see Logan just got the done for you. Congratulations. Now you can see the done for you is a 197 one time and it’s going to hand you three done for you shows on a silver platter. Now, Obby person partially oversees this. You know, he is a master at generating traffic online. And instead of, you know, using or building it yourself, the Dunf Show network, it’s picked for you from the trend raider in your account, done professionally built by your team. We build out the cast, build out the characters, we build out the topics, and we have three networks live this afternoon. So, if you’re someone that values speed, if you’re someone that wants to see things working quickly and judge it quickly, then this is for you. The niches are picked and these are proven niches. We’re talking about niches like finance, weight loss, relationships, side hustles, mental health, travel hacks. Now, these niches always do well and we’ve designed podcasts in these niches for you unique to you. Now, your shows arrive with personal names, personal faces, and personality. You can do it faceless or if you want us to clone or use a given face or name, we can as well. Now, these have certain characteristics, the analyst, the strategist, the educator, the motivator. you’ll see the personas and people start to attach to these personas in the podcast as well. They start relating to the motivator or they start liking you know the strategies more. Now furthermore the first quarter of your content decisions are made for you. Literally we have set up you know all the 30 episodes and topics engineered already winning in the niche. You have you know over 225 clips cued before you even typed a single word. Meaning this is the ultimate done for you. You walk into a machine that is pumping out content for you and generating you an audience the moment you grab this. Now, the money is wired in before your first post. You see, the important thing here is that you make an amazing return on investment. That’s exactly what’s going to happen. Each of these podcasts are attached to one of the hottest niches. And these are niches you can pick your affiliate link from, paste your affiliate ID right here, and it will be promoted alongside all these podcasts. Now, one click stands between you and the live network. You can see your network’s going live. Know your podcast is going to come to life. You know, hundreds of thousands of people will see it. It will be published to all kinds of different platforms. Social media loves these types of content. So, we’ll push it even more and you start to see that massive traffic. If you’re looking for a breakthrough, then this is it right here. Linda Parker, congratulations with the done for you as well. Now, we’ll walk you through everything obviously. Now the moment you have this working for you, we come in, you know, we do what we call a handoff. The first 30 days, we teach you to read, you know, the dashboard and everything how it works, you get a VIP network activation session with our team to make sure you understand it fully. Now, all of this, including our quarterly network refresh, the show owners playbook, and our private network owners community. All of this is for a onetime 197, and that is when you upgrade to the done for you. Now again, if you want to make that a reality, first grab this at 267, which will include the premium account, the scaling account, the AC upgrade, the coaching mode, the amplifier mode, the special access of affiliate reel and AI socials. This also means even if for some reason you can’t get the done for you or the done for you is already completely sold out, still make sure you get pod shorts because it will allow you to still grow your audience with the most realistic podcast that people love to watch. Now, furthermore, the more important reason is if you’re just tired of having no idea how to build a dedicated audience. Honestly, enough is enough. Give yourself a fair chance right now to try it in a way you haven’t done so before. And that is one of the easiest ways, which is owning your own viral podcast show, which people actually look up to you for. The moment they know you own a show, you know, they start speaking to you differently. They love to, you know, be featured on it in any way or form or mentioned on it in any way or form. Now, furthermore, when you want to do this, you’ll finally stop dealing with, you know, every other content tool that’s not generating you results. On top of that, you stop dealing with not seeing any views come in. You stop dealing with not seeing any followers coming in. And you finally stop dealing with not seeing any leads or sales. Because the problem was all those tools we had so far, even though they’re great, and I love those tools, and I speak about a lot of great tools as well, we need to acknowledge the fact that tools have different assets or powers. You see, most tools can help you create videos, but you’ll be posting into the void if you don’t have an audience yet. And that’s what Obby solved here today. He did what people are crushing with right now. He did extensive research on it and notice how effective it is. And it’s not just something we’re saying. The data proves it back to back to back. A single 60-second clip from a podcast typically reaches 10,000 to 50,000 organic. This is backed by YouTube Creator Insider and Buzzprout.com. Two reputable sources on this very topic. A podcast audience actually buys what they hear. They’re more invested. and people, you know, even if you have a busy day job day job or a busy life in general or you just don’t want to spend too much time on this. Literally, Maria works a night shift, has two kids now. Her content is being taken care of on her bus ride during her commute. She’s going live on three platforms using Pod Shorts, and she’s crushing it. And we see people from all ages dominating with AI podcast. And now it is your turn. you’ll be able to generate millions of views and literally the last 90 days we’ve seen accounts do over 140 grand or 14,000 views and this turns into tons of sales left right and center. So, if you want to make this happen for yourself as well, without recording anything, without going on camera, without editing or logging into different accounts over and over again, without needing a following to begin with, make sure you grab this right now because like I said before, there are two types of content. The one that builds your audience and the one that nurtures your audience. Now, when you answer the question, now which type of content will get you dedicated followers? Is it the podcast one or just the promotional video? It’s always the podcast one. This is what attracts people. This is what gets them hooked and interested listening to different perspectives, discussions, and topics. And you’ll be able to be the owner of all of that. So, make sure you grab it because platforms love it when you’re able to hook people on their platform. It help keeps people longer on there and therefore you’re going to get far more reach than the average type of content. And it’s it makes sense and it’s proven. So, with that being said, this is your last and final chance to have everything taken care of for you. The most beautiful, human, realistic podcast. And join the ranks of Priya, join the ranks of Jolene, join the ranks of Mark, Anthony, all the people that are crushing it right now, you’ll be able to sell your affiliate offers, get paid for your offers, get featured by brands, get paid to run shows for clients. But only when you grab this right now, at least try it out for 14 days, and then tell me how much you enjoyed it, the results. We’re looking forward to your success story. If you’ve been struggling with any other content tool and you’ve been looking for something that grows your views immensely fast, then this is the best investment you can make in yourself. Only 267. If you want to really knock it out of the park, this is literally the best thing you could do. Get the mega bundle and get the done for you. The link is in the chat box and I’ll see you on the inside.
-
08/18/2026 – Alliant Webinar – SAVVY SOCIAL SECURITY PLANNING – What Baby Boomers Need to Know About Their Retirement Income
Right, it’s now two minutes after the hour. So, good evening everyone. My name is Baptiste Brunner. I’m a Texas-based, Houston, Texas based financial consultant with Alliance and I’m just a part of the team of professionals at the credit union who give regular educational webinars. Like to start off by thanking all of you for taking the time to get a better understanding of your social security today, joining me in this later hour. We find that people appreciate this time. Let us know other times that you might prefer for us to do this. I like to do them on Saturdays and the evenings as opposed to putting it right smack dab in the middle of the, you know, in the middle of the day. But hey, we’re going to talk about social security today. How to avoid some very costly mistakes and just they do happen quite often. Um, this presentation’s typically about 45 to 50 minutes long. Might try to get out of here a little bit earlier. We might skip through some things that aren’t as pertinent. Of course, as always, going to reserve time at the end for Q&A. go ahead and identify the Q&A section or the chat section. Uh you can answer you can put your questions in either. Of course, I’ll get to them whenever that time comes.
And new slide here if you haven’t been on one where we’ve had this, but please don’t throw any AI notetakers in here. That’s a big no no. This is all proprietary info. But hey, I cannot stop you at home from taking a photo with your camera of a slide that it looks to be very knowledgeable or filled with great information. So, can’t stop you there. But if you have an AI note taker in here, please pull them out. All right, my next webinar is going to be on Thursday, September 3rd, 2 central, 3 Eastern. Going to go over IRA planning strategies to help you get more from your IRA. why maybe moving from an 401k to an IRA in retirement might be a better move. Investment options, costs, professional advice, etc., etc. And then here’s another great one. If you’ve been on one for Roth conversions or social security, this is a top three webinar for me. Going through tax planning changes, going through taxes in general. Taxes will be one of the biggest hits that you have in retirement. find ways to try to go ahead and beat the system there. There’s rules out there to help you take advantage of them. That’s going to be a Saturday one. Saturday, September 19th, 10:00 while the kids are watching the cartoons. Go ahead and throw that one on. Be a quick one, too.
And of course, our team at Alliant Retirement Investment Service. We’re focused on you, our members, on helping you understand the ins and outs of investing, saving for retirement, of course, much more. Just go ahead and take a look at our website. That’s Aerys, A R I S for Reliant Retirement Investment Services, but aerys.alliancreditun.com. Throw/events in there to see all of our webinars. It’s not just me who’s putting these on. It’s our entire team of 10, 11 adviserss who do these. Um, plenty of webinars out there. Go ahead and check it out. a lot of other topics. We also have our podcast, Invest Savvy. Plethora of information to be learned there. We also have our resource center. Check it out. A lot of tools and tricks in there. Go ahead and take a photo of this slide real quick if you’d like. I won’t hold it against you. Go check out all the resources available to you. They don’t cost anything. So, a lot to be learned through there.
All right. And just to go through this too, we can help in a lot of different ways. You’re members of the credit union. We’re financial consultants with the credit union. We are happy to do financial planning for you. We’re going to offer that to you at the end of this and how that could go ahead and help you solve when do you take out social security or how to take out social security? What are your options available for you if you are married or spousal benefits, divorce benefits, death benefits or social security? We can go through that. Estate planning is another big topic for us. How to leave the best legacy? How to save money in taxes? Do you need a trust or not? Show you another deal on that in a little bit. Of course, investment management, investment selections, advanced planning, seeing if there’s other ways for you to save taxes, increase your net worth further. We can help you with all of that. There are no cost meetings. We’re just here to help.
All right. So, again, welcome and thank you for coming. So today we’re going to talk about just savvy social security planning. You know what baby boomers or the future retirees of America need to know about their retirement income. And so when your parents retired, different generations, they probably didn’t have to think too much about social security. They worked for one or two companies their entire lives. They got a pension and then you know they went down to their local office as soon as they turned 65 or maybe 62 if they retired early and they applied for benefits. They lived off of social security and their pension very comfortably and they might have even saved a couple bucks on the side, but they took their benefits for granted and they didn’t have to ask very many questions. But your generation and the generation right before you and really the generations to come, you have to take a much different approach to the social security question in a different way. and it’s a creating a problem for me. We’re seeing a lot of people claiming at the wrong time or just not really fitting into their plan. So, I’m putting up this brain teaser here before we start just to get you thinking a little bit before we dive in. So, if you haven’t yet thought about these two questions, take a second and answer them to yourself. But in life, would you rather be early or delayed or would you and then also would you rather pay a penalty or get a bonus? Seems pretty straightforward. So think to yourself, would you rather be early or delayed? And then also ask yourself, would you rather pay a penalty or get a bonus? I’ll be returning to this question later. So many people make social security claiming decisions without fully understanding all of their options. And this is the main challenge we’ll try to solve tonight. But before we do, I just want to address a couple things about this presentation. You know, first, you may be wondering, why is a financial planner, financial consultant here to talk about a government program like social security? That’s a great question. And here’s my answer. There’s a big need for social security education. The government’s not giving it to you. And boomers and future retirees, soon to be retirees are very interested in this topic as your own presence here confirms that. And many retirees also miss opportunities to coordinate social security with their broader retirement income plan. And then also you poor social security decisions can make my job as an adviser very difficult when I assist clients to develop a retirement income plan to correct for a lower you know than necessary social security benefit. But I also want to make you guys two guarantees. One, I’m just trying to make people smarter about their Social Security benefits and when to claim, and I believe you will be better prepared to make a good decision after this presentation, but two, want to assure you there’s not going to be any selling here. This is purely an educational event. So, we’re here to help. We want to take care of our members. That’s what all these webinars are for. I just felt the need to reassure you of that.
So, first a few things to know about social security. You have many claiming options. One couple could conceivably have up to 18,000 ways to claim, but we normally look at the five most useful scenarios. Your decisions also have farreaching consequences. Most decisions are irreversible after 12 months, too. And your in and your choice does impact both spouses. If you’re married, it affects you and your spouse. Also, Social Security is not bankrupt. It’s not a Ponzi scheme. It’s also not the best system ever put in place in the world, but not bankrupt, not a Ponzi scheme. Definitely could have been implemented better, but that was 100 years ago. Look, some of your friends and family probably been helped by Social Security benefits, too. And at the same time, few of your friends have expertise on social security. Because they’re claiming doesn’t mean that they know everything. And what we’re seeing is that baby boomers want to know, will social security be there for you? And you’ve been told for years that the system is going broke, but now that it’s almost your turn to collect, is that really true? And you also want to know how much you can expect to receive. And before you can retire, you’ve got to know how you’re going to support yourself. And that means doing a budget, lining up all your income sources and knowing how much you can expect to receive from each. And because the system is a relatively known quantity, it represents the foundation of that plan. And you’re also probably asking when you should apply for social security. May have heard that if you apply early, your benefit will be lower than if you apply later. But is it worth missing out on all those extra checks to have a higher benefit later on? And we’re going to shed some light on this important question today, too. But something your parents probably never asked is how it is possible to maximize benefits. And there’s absolutely nothing wrong with using the Social Security rules to your advantage. But today, we’re going to talk about five ways that you can maximize your benefits simply by knowing the rules and making smart decisions. And finally, you might be wondering if Social Security will be enough to live on in retirement. And you probably already know the answer to this, but Social Security represents about 40% of the average retirees total income. But by coordinating social security with the rest of your retirement income plan, you can pursue a comfortable, worry-free retirement. Now, most people tend to minimize the value of social security. They believe that they are likely to get something back from the system at all. They think it will be a minimal amount and not really enough to count on. But social security is far more valuable than most people realize. You know, every dollar you receive in social security is a dollar you don’t have to pull out of your 401k, IRA, bank account. And some people are worried that social security just won’t be around when they retire. And this has led to a lot of misunderstandings and irrational fears about the solveny of the social security system. But let’s look at what the social security trustees say. And every year they publish a comprehensive report showing the long range outlook for the SSA system.
So, the system was designed as a pay as you go system. Payroll taxes from current workers go into a trust fund and then are immediately paid out to current retirees. But because baby boomers have been in their peak earning years, the trust funds accumulated more than needed for current benefits. You know, right now the trust fund holds about $2.5 trillion which is invested in special issued treasury securities. And as baby boomers start retiring, these trust fund assets will gradually be drawn down. Over the next 75 years, costs will begin to exceed income, and there are enough reserves that the system will be able to pay 100% of promised benefits until 2034. After that, if nothing is done to reform the system, income will be sufficient to cover around 80 81% of promise benefits.
And although the social security system is not in imminent danger, most people agree that the earlier reforms are instituted, the less painful they will be for everyone. And here are just a few of the ideas that have been proposed. You know, one is to increase the maximum earnings subject to social security tax. Currently, only $184,500 in earnings are subject to that 6 and a4% tax paid by you. And then your employer matches you at 6 and a quarter as well. So about 12 1/2% of your pay. Another reform proposed calls for raising the normal retirement age as life expecties are increasing. Currently, full retirement age is 67 for people born in 1960 or later. Instead, another reform proposal would change the benefit formula so that future increases would just happen at a slower pace and this would affect the benefits of those future retirees. And some are talking about changing the formula for cost of living adjustments. And this could give retirees smaller benefit increases going forward, although the changes are expected to be minimal. And you can learn more about this in the Social Security website as well.
But most current reform discussions focus on preserving benefits for current retirees and those who are nearing retirement, i.e. more than likely you on this call. Although future legislative changes remain uncertain. I.e. my generation pie in the sky. We have no idea what’s going on. But after thinking about that, you might be rightfully saying, what’s a clearer way to think about social security? Well, here’s a straightforward definition. Social Security is inflationprotected income that you cannot outlive. Even after your death, your benefit could continue in the form of a survivor benefit. and we’ll go through that. But your premium or tax, it’s listed in your paycheck receipt under your FICA, which stands for, of course, the Federal Insurance Contribution Act. And given your employers have paid premium in every paycheck, so you want to be smart about how and when to collect his earned benefit. Let’s look at some of its various features, too. So, first, Social Security is one of the few sources of income that you can’t outlive. And if you’re worried about running out of personal assets in your old age, you need not have that fear of social security because it’s going to continue until you pass away. And of course, the longer you live, the more you’ll extract from the system itself. And if your benefit starts out at $2,000 per month, and if you live 10 more years, you’ll receive nearly $300,000 in lifetime benefits. If you live 20 more years, receive nearly 600k in benefits. If you live 30 more years, you’ll receive nearly a million dollars over the course of your lifetime. This course is assuming annual cost of living adjustments or colas of about 2% which is a safe average. Some years they don’t give you one, some years it’s four or five 6%.
Second, Social Security offers annual inflation adjustments. So if your benefit starts I’m sorry. So if your benefit starts out at $2,000 per month and if annual colas are 2% in 10 years you will be receiving about $2438 per month and in 20 years your benefit will be 2972 and in 30 years your check will be about 3623. There’s no way of knowing exactly what future coals will be, but 2%’s a good reasonable number to just come up with as an average based off previous historical uh indicators. Next, let’s go ahead and look at how much you can expect to receive from the system. So when your social security benefit is calculated, it will be based on how much you earned over your working career and the age at which you apply for your benefits. And like I mentioned earlier, the formula for calculating social security, it’s pretty complex. You may or may not want to follow along with this part. We might not even go through the whole thing, but some people find the formula interesting. So in a moment, I’m going to show you a couple of ways to estimate your benefit. But the general process goes like this. Social Security looks at your annual earnings over your entire lifetime, indexes them for inflation, picks the 35 highest years earnings to include in the formula. The indexed earnings are totaled and divided by 35 to come up with an average. And if you don’t have 35 years of earnings, those missing years will be filled with zeros. And if anybody’s ever gotten a zero on a quiz or a test in school, you know how much that can drag you down. And that does have that effect of lowering your social security benefits for people who have taken time out of the workforce, maybe raised children, injured, etc. However, that you could be eligible for a spousal benefit. We can always review that oneonone. But then the formula is applied to your average index monthly earnings to determine your primary insurance amount. I’m going to refer to that as the PIA from here forward, but this is the amount you’ll receive when you reach full retirement age. Your primary insurance amount is your benefit at full retirement age which could be 66 or 67 some age in between just depends on when you are born and each year from there that cost living adjustment is implied. So here’s an example of how the benefit formula would work for a baby boomer who was born in 64 and who earned a social security maximum every year since the age of 22. Average index monthly earnings would work out to be about $14,35810.
So in calculating that PIA, the first 1286, $1,286 would be multiplied by 90%. Amount between 1286 and 7749 or 6463 would then be multiplied by 32%. And the amount over 7,749 or 6609 would be multiplied by 15%. These amounts would be totaled to come up with a PIA of $4,216.90. And this is the amount the worker would receive at full retirement age. Told you guys this was complicated. Fortunately, you don’t have to figure this out for yourself. Some of you may be thinking, well, it’s good to know how they calculate benefits, but why shouldn’t I claim early at 62 instead of delaying the full retirement age or even 70? And it’s a good question. It’s also where some people start to get in trouble. That’s because your monthly benefit will be reduced if you claim early. It may also be reduced by taxes. Medicare premiums will be deducted and benefits could be withheld if you work. So if you continue to work while own social security. So what this means is that even when you maximize your claiming strategy, something I’m glad to help you with, the amount you actually receive will be smaller in reality because of taxes and parts of your Medicare coverage. And naturally, this raises a good very good question. When should you apply for benefits? And the decision of when to apply for benefits is one of the most important and most complicated. It can literally make a difference of thousands of dollars over your lifetime. It’s also important to realize that the decision of when to apply for social security depends on many factors unique to your situation. You know, these include your health status, your life expectancy, your need for income, whether or not you plan to work, and if you’re surviving spouse, whether you have personal resources. That last part about survivor needs though, which we’ll get into a minute. It also factors into the next question. For most people, Social Security benefits alone will probably not be enough to live on throughout retirement. But let’s just take a closer look how your claiming age does impact your benefit. So full retirement age is the age at which you can claim full unreduced benefits. When we say unreduced, we mean claiming it early or if you’re working still, they’re not going to be able to reduce them. And it’s used to be it used to be 65 for everyone, but now we’re seeing a higher full retirement age being phased in as a result of the 1983 amendment. So for everyone born between 1943 and 54, i.e. my parents, full retirement age is 66. For everyone born in 1960 and later, full retirement age is 67. For those born in 1955 through 1959, it’s 66 and a couple months. Just depends on what year. Closer to 55, closer to 66, closer to 59, closer to 67. Now, remember that I said earlier that your primary insurance, that PIA is the benefit you will receive at full retirement age. So, what happens if you have applied for social security before full retirement age? Well, your benefit’s going to be reduced and you’ll receive a percentage of your PIA depending on when you apply. So, if your full retirement age is 66 and you apply at age 62, you’ll receive 75% of your PIA. At 63, 80% and so on. If your full retirement age is 67 and you apply at 62, you’ll receive 70% of your PIA. And these amounts are actually prrated monthly. So you can apply at any time after the age of 62 and your benefit will be reduced by the appropriate amount. If difference between six there you’ll get a higher benefit at 62 and 2 months than you would at 62 on your birthday or at 63 and so on and so forth. On the other hand, if you apply for social security after full retirement age, you will earn delayed credits in the form of 8% for each year that you delay. So again, full retirement age 66 and you apply at 67, your benefit will be 108% of your PIA. At 68, it will be 116% and so on. But after the age of 70, you can’t earn any more delayed credits. So it doesn’t pay to wait until after age 70 to apply for Social Security. Anybody on here is 69 and coming up on 70 or already 70, apply for your benefits. If you’re 69, get ready to apply for those benefits ahead of time and just say, “I don’t want to claim it until 70, but get your check on your birthday.” Don’t let Uncle Sam hold on to your money any longer than he needs to. You’re already maxed out. No point in doing so. And I’m also guessing you’re probably not too interested in calculating by hand your your PIA and all these formulas and the reductions and credits for early or late filing or the annual cost of living adjustments that could raise your benefit in the future. There are ways you can easily find out approximately the amount of benefits you can expect to receive. You know, one, of course, you can refer to the social security statement. It’s one of the best tools you can have. Go to the ssa.gov website. If you haven’t set up an account, set up an account. You can see your benefit right on there. And it’s projection. By the way, the projection is not the actual amount yet. It’s close, but every year that you continue to work, it’s going to go up because you’re going to replace your higher earning year salary that you’re making now with one of those year one of those payments from 30 and 35 years ago. It does help. Also, you can use the retirement estimator on your social security account. This calculator taps into your specific earnings history. After you enter your personal identifying information, including your birthday, you can take it on from there. But just note that that annual statement, the retirement estimator, they don’t factor colas in. Our tools do, theirs do not. But this means your actual benefit will likely be higher than they indicate, but our calculators do adjust for cost of living adjustments. So if you know your PIA, we can help you project your future benefits. That’s a part of what we’ll do for you if you, you know, want some help with this. Also might want to try one of the three calculators on the Social Security website. Again, there’s a bunch of resources out there. We are a complimentary resource to you. The obvious advantage though to delaying benefits is that your monthly benefit will be higher. A baby boomer who has a primary insurance amount of $3,000, full retirement age of 67, they’d receive $2,100 per month if they applied at 62, but they would receive $3,720. they waited until age 70. The difference becomes even more dramatic if we multiply these amounts by the 2% annual colas. If cost of living adjustments average 2% over the next 8 years, you know, your age 70 benefit then jumps up to 4359. So there is benefit in waiting longer, but not that doesn’t mean everybody has to wait longer. Everybody’s different. You might have the same house and the same cars as your neighbor or as your friend. you think you might make the same money as them. Probably have two completely different stories still. Nobody’s the same. This is not a cookie cutter thing to approach here. Or my friend said that they did 62 and it worked out for them. I’m going to do it. Not how you approach this. But it might be hard to pass up social security checks though when you can start receiving them as early as 62. Going to get a lot more years of payments if you wait from 62. If you want to take it out at 65, but you take it out at 62, you get 36 extra payments. But if you live a long time, you’ll be very glad that you waited longer. And as you can see, the longer you live, the more income you’ll have by just waiting until a later date or until age 70 to apply. But naturally, you may be wondering, how can you maximize your benefits? Let’s just look at a couple of strategies here. First thing you can do while you still have time is improve your earnings record. So check those ear annual earning statements to make sure your earnings record is accurate. That’s one of the biggest things that you can do. Mistakes are very rare, but it’s the government. Let’s be honest, it happens. So because the earnings are on file, the social security office, more than likely there’s no issues, but they sub, you know, your employer submitted everything to the social security office. Just double check. Doesn’t hurt. Mistakes do happen, especially for the self-employed individuals whose earnings records are taken from tax returns, though. Next thing is to consider how you might be able to improve your earnings record. Well, if you don’t have those 35 years of earnings, can you work a few more years so they won’t be filled out with zeros? Remember what I said earlier about getting a zero in a quiz or homework? It really does drag you down. And if you had several years of low earnings early in your career, like everybody did, or like most people at least, you can work a few more years while you’re in these peak earning years, and you will see your benefit take off pretty well. But even if you start receiving social security, but continue to work, your earnings record will be updated. It’s just important to know that if you start receiving social security before reaching full retirement age, so if you start taking it out at 62, 63, 64 and you’re still working and you earn over $24,480.
For every dollar over $24,480 that you make, it will be withheld. They’ll withhold $1 for every two that you make above that. So, if you made $5,000 above that, you made $29,480, they’re going to withhold $2,500 of benefit from you, two for one.
And applying for benefits at the optimal time is the best way to maximize your social security benefit. And the chief reason for delaying benefits is cuz that will result in the highest lifetime benefit for you and your survivor. There is no one-izefits-all answer to this question. The important thing is to apply at the time that is optimal for you. And did you know that social security benefits can be taxable? Let’s look at a way to maximize your benefit by minimizing your taxes. Mentioned earlier, that’s going to be probably your biggest headache in in retirement. But while the earnings test isn’t truly a tax, it is a way in which the government takes back some of your income. So, we’re including in this discussion, but it is different from true taxation of benefits, which we’ll get to next. But one important consideration in deciding when to apply for benefits, is whether or not you plan to work. Now, if you apply before your term, full retirement age in 2026, again, $1 in benefits can be withheld for every $2 that you earn over $24,480. And it’s important to know that this money isn’t truly taken away. rather your benefit would just be adjusted upward once you turn full retirement age to make it as if you had applied for it later. So you get the money back, but it does hurt for that time being. Just know if you’re going to make less money in retirement, claim early, take a smaller job. You might end up having your benefit reduced because you went from making 100K to 50K working part-time and you’re on social security. It’s not always just adding those two together. something to consider. So again, this means that if some of your benefits are withheld due to the earnings test, your new benefit will be higher as if you’d start at 63 or 64 or 65 instead of at 62. Just don’t let that annual earnings test discourage you from working, though. More money you earn, more money you’ll have. Social Security doesn’t really penalize you for working. You’ll get the benefit later. You know, once the adjustment is made, you’ll end up with a higher earning benefit for the rest of your life. And of course, the earnings themselves will continue to contribute to your financial well-being. Then you get a better cost of living adjustment, too, down the road. Just to avoid the earnings test entirely, wait until your full retirement age or later to apply for benefits.
Now, on to the true tax on social security benefits. And this table shows the taxation of social security benefits based on various income levels. Income in this case means provisional income which includes adjusted gross income plus one half of the social security benefit plus any tax exempt interest. So if your provisional income is under 32k for a married couple no benefits are subject to taxation. If that provisional income is between 32 and 44,000 up to about 50% of a married couple’s benefits are then subject to tax. And if provisional income is then over 44,000 up to 85% of benefits are then subject to tax. The thresholds for a single individual are 25,000 and 34,000. But in the case of married filing separately and living with spouse, up to 85% of your social security is taxable regardless of income level being taxed on a tax and that is government work for you. But the important thing to remember here is that up to 85% of your social security benefits can be subject to tax depending on how much other income that you have. And you can minimize taxes on social security by just lowering your other income. It’s not that easy, but especially your investment income, too. But you should be aware that municipal bond interest, which is usually tax-free, it does count as income for the purpose of calculating your social security benefit. It’s part of your modified adjusted gross income. But anticipate the required minimum distributions from your IRA, which will cause you to be at a higher tax bracket. May cause some of your social security benefits to then be taxable, too. So consider drawing down your pre-tax funds, those pre-tax IAS and 401ks before you’re the age of 73 if you were born in the 50s or earlier or if you were born, you know, at 75 for those who were born in 1960 and later or just converting a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA. One of the best things that anybody can do, Roth conversion. That’s how you save money in taxes. That’s how you get tax-free income down the road, which doesn’t affect your your, you know, put jumping you in a new tax brackets for social security. But delaying claiming social security will reduce the number of years that your benefits are subject to tax. And think about how to reduce your expenses, pay down debt, adopt a simpler lifestyle, you can make do with less income, continue to manage taxes throughout retirement, not just those first few years. And as always, consult with a tax advisor and your professional consultant, financial consultant about your individual situation. But remember, if you are 65 or older and enrolled in Medicare, your Part B monthly premiums will be deducted from your Social Security check. As you can see here, if you can claim early, your Medicare Part B will always eat up a larger percentage of your benefit than if you wait until full retirement age or later to claim your Social Security benefit. Then
the when to apply question is very complex and and really requires a customized analysis. But here are a few points to remember. If you apply early, your benefit starts out at some fraction of your PIA, 75, 80%, whatever, and remains at that percentage for the rest of your life. It does not go up to 100% when you reach full retirement age. And then the cost of living adjustments then magnify the impact of early or delayed retirement because the annual cost of living adjustment is applied to either the lower or higher amount. 2% increase on $2,100 is a lot less than a 2% increase on $3,000. This causes that disparity to increase with each passing year though should you go too early. And your benefits can be taxed and further reduced by Medicare premiums. Just don’t let the earnings test discourage you from working. It’s actually helpful for many. And finally, delaying benefits may give the surviving spouse more income. And that’s an important point to consider, especially if you’re thinking something like this. I’m not going to live long, so why shouldn’t I just claim my benefit while I can? And the typical answer to this question is for couples, you should always maximize the higher earners’s benefit to protect the surviving spouse who will step into that benefit at after the higher earner passes. The higher earning spouses are therefore encouraged to delay their benefits to age 70 because that will give their spouses the highest benefit after they pass. First, we’re going to start by looking at how some spousal benefits work. One thing I want to let know here, you know, I did have a client who wanted to take it at 62. He was adamant on it because no male in his family lived past 65 because they had a terrible heart disease that was hereditary. He wanted to take it at 62. It made sense just because he knew that he was only going to live 3 to four more years. He did pass away. Made sense in his case. Not everybody really has that option of really knowing that they’re not going to live much longer, but it’s something to consider is that there’s always, you know, again, not cookie cutter. There’s always different situations here though to consider.
But social security was instituted in a much earlier era when most married women didn’t work to give, you know, it was put there to give women a measure of financial security in their older age. And the program offers spousal benefits. And it’s important to note that spousal benefits apply to either gender, including same-sex spouses, too. And the same the spousal benefit is 50% of the worker’s PIA if she applies for it at her full retirement age. So if John John here on the left, if John’s PIA is 2,000 and Jane’s PIA is 800, and if Jane applies for social security at her full retirement age, her benefit will be equal to 50% of Jon’s PIA or $1,000 a month. It’s $200 more than if her benefit based on her own work record. Now, if she goes earlier, it’s reduced by that same amount. So waiting, going earlier, you might not get as good of a spousal benefit. Again, we can help you figure out when’s the best time to take a spousal benefit, when’s the best time to retire. We’ll get into all that though, but we can help you figure that out on an individual basis if you’re still asking yourself this question. And here are the basic rules for spousal benefits. Primary worker must have filed for benefits. The lower earning spouse has to be at least 62 for a reduced benefit or full retirement age for the full spousal benefit. and spousal benefits do not earn delayed credits after FRA. So, I’m sure you have lots of questions about spousal benefits. Let’s look at some ways to maximize those.
The goal is to maximize income for both of you while alive and maximize income for the survivor after one of you passes. And it can be quite complicated. But by understanding all the considerations and doing some calculations, it is possible for married couples to come up with that right solution, that sweet spot for their needs. Looking at a couple strategies here. First thing to look at when you’re ordinating spouse benefits is this. Is the lower earning spouse’s PIA more or less than 50% of the higher earning spouse’s PIA? If the lower earning spouse’s benefit is more than 50% of the higher earning spouse’s PIA, the way to maximize lifetime benefits is in fact for both spouses to claim their benefit at 70. Now, our calculators will show that about both spouses have average or longer than average life expecties. This will then maximize benefits for both of them over their lifetime. But if the lower earning spouse’s PIA is less than 50% of the higher earning spouse’s PIA, you may want to do a hybrid strategy. And here the lower earning spouse goes ahead and claims early. And this gets income started as soon as the lower earning spouse turns 62 or whenever that spouse decides to stop working. But the higher earning spouse still claims at 70 in order to maximize that higher benefit over both lifetimes. You know, my grandma lived 12 years longer than my grandpa. That them take using this strategy benefited her greatly. But let us help you determine that right strategy. We’re here to help you with it. People at Social Security office can’t answer these questions, but do your own homework. Come to us, whatever. Just don’t do this willy-nilly and say 62 or 65 sounds great. That’s where we start seeing issues. It can be very complicated, especially with some recent rule changes. You really just need to run the numbers.
All right. Well, here’s another story, though. you know, focus on maximizing one benefit for that situation. But you might be thinking as well, you know, well, I’m widowed or I’m divorced, so how does that impact my social security claiming strategy? And it’s an interesting question. In fact, a couple people have already asked about that in the chat. And there’s a satisfying answer. If you’re widowed or divorced, you can be eligible for survivor benefits, divorce spouse survivor benefits or divorce spouse benefits. By coordinating these benefits with your own record, you may be able to increase your total benefit. But first, let’s look at the basic survivor benefit a spouse would receive and hopefully after maximizing the other spouse’s benefit. So survivor benefits can be somewhat complicated, but it’s important to understand how they work because decisions you make now can influence the amount of survivor benefit later on. And there are two factors that influence the amount of the survivor benefit. First factor is the age at which the deceased spouse claimed his own retirement. If he or she originally applied for social security before full retirement age, that survivor benefit will then be limited to his or her actual benefit of 82 and a half% of their PIA, whichever is higher in this case. But if the deceased applied at his full retirement age, survivor benefits then equal to 100% of the PIA, that full retirement benefit. If he or she applied at 70, survivor benefit will include those date delayed credits. We’ll see an example here in a second. But second factor influencing the amount of the survivor benefit is the age at which the widow claims the survivor benefit. If he or she claims it at 60 or 50 if they’re disabled, survivor benefit will equal about 71.5% of the decadence PIA. If they claim at full retirement age or later, survivor benefit will now equal 100% of the original amount. And they may of course apply at any time between age 60 and 70. And the reduction will then be prrated. But if both spouses are receiving benefits and one spouse dies, the other spouse can then switch to the higher benefit. So a hypothetical example, let’s say Joe and Julie are married, both are over full retirement age and currently receiving Social Security benefits. Joe’s benefits $3,600 a month. Julie’s benefits $1,800 a month. Joe dies, Julie’s $1,800 benefit will stop, but she’s just going to hop on Joe’s and she’ll start receiving 3,600 a month. One important note about survivor planning is the loss of one benefit. Most widows and widowers need at least twothirds of the amount of income they’re receiving as a couple. So, it’s important to plan for the loss of one spouse social security benefit. Even though it’s often the higher benefit that will be retained, death of a spouse means still it’s the loss of one social security check regardless, which means less money coming into the household. Let’s see what would happen if the deceased spouse had delayed the start of social security. So in this hypo in this hypothetical example, Joe files for social security aid at age 70. His benefits $124% of that $3,600 a month PIA for a total benefit of $4,464. Now if he dies, Julie survivor benefit will be equal to Joe’s benefit of $4,464. And survivor planning is just a very important part of savvy social security planning. So decisions that you make now can influence the surviving spouse’s standard of living later in life. I said this early before you 5 minutes before 6 your time. Maybe this is one of the bigger decisions of your life. Do not take it lightly. You can see how one decision can affect the next 30, 40 years of your life and not just yours but your spouses. Do not take this decision lightly. And here are some rules for survivor benefits. So in order for the surviving spouse to receive survivor benefits, marriage must have lasted at least 9 months unless the death is then ruled an accident. To start benefits though, survivor must be at least age 60 or 50 if they’re disabled. However, if the widow or widowerower applies before full retirement age, benefit will be reduced as it is for regular retirement benefits. Some of the same principles that go into deciding when to apply for regular retirement benefits also apply to survivor benefits. And if you remarry before age 60, you’re not going to be able to receive a survivor benefit based on your previous spouse’s earning record unless your remarage ends. Uh if your remarage ends, then you get to jump on there. But if it doesn’t, sorry. And then we also have divorce spouse survivor benefits. They are available if the marriage lasted at least 10 years. See, one person was asking about 13. You’re good. Let’s look at that a little more since many people have been divorced like myself. And it’s not a widely known or understood benefit though. So, a divorced spouse can in fact receive social security based on their expouse’s work record providing the marriage lasted at least 10 years. and the person receiving benefits currently unmarried. Now remember, men can receive divorce spouse benefits, too. If the divorce occurred more than two years ago, the expouse doesn’t need to have filed for his benefit. However, he or she must be at least 62 years old.
And here are the rules for those divorce benefits. More than one ex- spouse can receive benefits on the same worker’s record. So, if your ex-husband or ex-wife is remarried a few times, all three ex-wives can claim divorce spouse benefits as long as each marriage lasted at least 10 years. And the benefits paid to one ex- spouse do not affect those paid to the worker. So, the current spouse or the other expouse is, you know, you do not need to know where your ex- spouse’s whereabouts are. You only need to know enough identifying information. Social Security office people can look up their records. You also need to provide documentation showing the dates of the marriage and divorce. County records office has that for you. And if you’re receiving divorce spouse benefits and you remarry, your divorce spouse benefits will stop. However, you may then be eligible for spousal benefits based on your new husband, new wife’s work record, or you can just switch to your own benefit, of course, if you also qualify for social security. So, if you’re thinking right now to yourself, gee, this is really more complicated than I realized, I understand. I didn’t realize a lot of this stuff until I educated myself because it’s part of my job. But it was clear to me what an important role getting social security right plays into people’s retirement income plans. This is the money that you should be spending first. Can’t give the gift this to anybody else past your spouse. You can’t use these month funds first. Other money that you’ve saved up through your 401k, IRA, brokerage account, cash, savings, etc. that you can give away to somebody else. Spend the government money first. You’ve been paying into this for four or five decades. But this brings us back to our social security brain teaser. You may have heard the phrase behavioral finance, and it’s the study of the influence of psychology on the behavior of investors. So, for our brain teaser questions, people would usually say they’d rather be early than delayed for many things in life, and they’d rather get a bonus instead of paying a penalty. I mean, hey, that makes sense, right? But as we’ve seen in our presentation today, when it comes to social security claiming strategy, early to penalty as delayed is to bonus. The government didn’t set the phrasing up this way intentionally, but it certainly has influenced people who have only seen their claiming choices described as early verse delayed. And we don’t normally see the claiming question position as one of penalty versus bonus. But I think you can see the value of framing the question in that manner, though. And I think this little brain teaser is a good way to loop back to our original problem review what we’ve learned to review what we’ve learned also and then close the solution. So, one second before I start really jumping into it.
All right. So, this is where what we started with as our course challenge. Many people make social security claiming decisions without fully understanding all their options. Then we went through four insights designed to help us get an understanding of the problem and develop a belief in a solution that might work. So in brief, those insights were social security offers inflation protected income for life and possibly survivor benefits. Your monthly benefit can be reduced if you claim early. Couple should maximize the higher earners benefit for the surviving spouse. And if you’re widowed or divorced, you can be eligible for benefits that can increase your check. So with that understanding of the problem, that brings us to the solution. Many people benefit from a personalized social security claiming analysis to understand how and when to apply and how their monthly benefit will fit into their overall retirement income plan. And it’s important to consider social security in the context of your other retirement resources including your pensions, your IAS, your 401ks, those required minimum distributions with all that pre-tax money that you have cuz Uncle Sam wants his cut. You’ve been putting this money away for 50 years. He’s ready to get his cut finally. you haven’t paid taxes on it yet, he’s going to force you to do it at 73 or 75, make you pull money out, you might jump a tax bracket down the road. All of these resources should be coordinated to give you the income you need for the rest of your life. So, don’t be afraid to ask for help. Retirey planning is really easy when it’s a matter of stashing part of your salary into a 401k or IRA. But when the time comes for you to convert that nest egg into an income stream that you want to last for the rest of your life, you want to make sure it doesn’t run out. And social security may be the bedrock of your retirement income plan, but it has to be coordinated with all of your resources to give you the stability and security that you deserve. They’re called golden years for a reason.
Social Security personnel, they can be helpful, but they can’t make recommendations. It’s not their job to do long range social security planning cuz they don’t know and what’s going they also don’t know what’s going on with the rest of your life either. We can help you with that. We absolutely can. And look, I I hope you learned a lot today, but you’re probably still wondering. You might have a better understanding right now, but you’re still probably asking yourself questions. one being still when should I take it? Should I take it at 62? Should I delay? I’m pretty well set up. I think I can do 62, but social security is too important for guesswork. So, let us help you protect your nest egg, maximize your investment income. It’s just too important. Best way we can do that quick analysis. I’m going to send out a poll here. We offer complimentary meetings where we will make a financial plan for you. If you want to retire at 62, we can let you know if 62 works. If 62 isn’t the greatest idea, we might tell you 63, 64. But we’re here to help. So, to learn more, here’s a poll that I’m sending out right now. If you say no, that’s fine. You’re not hurting my feelings. My goal is to help out all of our members. Click yes. I’ll reach out to you tomorrow. We’ll set up a meeting. We’ll review your finances. We’ll cover everything. We’re going to do financial planning. Figure out if social security is right to take out at 62. Wait till 70. If you want to make sure that you’re going to take care of your spouse fully, let’s cover that. It’s complimentary. We’re just here to help our members. That’s why we’re the greatest credit union in the country, if not the world. All right, with that, let’s get to the fun part. Oh, before I get to questions, here’s something that’s fun that we’re doing now. We do a lot of estate planning webinars. I do a lot of estate planning. Somebody wants to leave money for their kids, want to make sure their wife’s taken care of. They want to see if a trusted or is right or a will. We can do that planning, but we also now have access to this company, Trust and Will. Uh, think of them as Turbo Tax is to doing taxes in your own. Trust and will is to doing estate planning and trust and wills. We have access to this for those who do investments with us and our clients, not our members, but those who become investment clients, they have free access to this and you’ll be able to set up your trust and set up a will through this platform. There are attorneys that are accessible through this platform as well. If you want to learn more, shoot me an email, which is on this slide. So, if you want to just jump the gun and schedule an appointment with me, there’s a QR code. If you have any questions for me, there’s my email. put your hand over that photo because that’s me 80 pounds ago, more like 40, but still terrible photo. Give me a shout in the direct number there. I’m here to help. Let’s get into your questions. There are a lot. And if everybody can answer the poll for me, just about everybody has. I like to look good when the boss looks at my numbers and sees that everybody answered the poll. Again, doesn’t offend me if you say no or not at this time. If you ever have questions to those folks, holler whenever. But if everybody can answer the poll, makes me look really good with the boss man. All right, let’s get into the thick of these.
How frequent is the cola given? Oh, question answer. But colas are given just about every year. They’re not an entitlement, though. They don’t always give them. Uh I want to say they didn’t do one in 2021 or 2022, but they did do a really big one during co Um, but on average it’s about 2%.
If I claim social security at full retirement age and I’m married filing separate, will I be taxed 85% or no tax since I live in Texas? Okay. There are some states and God bless Texas. There are some states that do tax social security from the state level. Colorado, Vermont, I want to say Oregon maybe in the mix like eight or nine. West Virginia randomly is in there. I think what we’re talking about that 50 85% zero. That’s based on the federal level, not the state level. So at the federal level, you can be taxed on up to 85% of your social security depending on how much you’re making outside of social security. If you’re living solely on social security and you’re not pulling anything out, there’s not going to be any taxes there because you’re just living off of your social security. It’s based off of that additional other provisional income.
Yeah. If the what if the surviving spouse benefits are higher than the deceased spouse, you’re just going to retain the the the higher benefit. You know, they they designed it this way. I’m well aware we live in 2026 right now, but it was designed this way because women did not make as much men back in the day and now they do. And hey, it men die first. Let’s just be honest. We die on average at 76. Women die on average at 79. They want the surviving spouse to at least have more money. They’ll get rid of one check, but at least she’s getting more money. It was designed that way. So you don’t get any additional benefit if you’re the higher earning spouse or the higher PIA and the lower social security amount passes away first unfortunately.
Okay, here’s a great one. If I get my benefit at 62 and I keep a job that provides about 30K a year, i.e. about $5,500 above that threshold. They understand that 2:1 ratio, but will it be reversed only at FRA or when I stop working, say at 64? Great question. It will be reversed at the end of the or beginning of the next year after you quit working. You’re going to claim that you made um money that year, but the next year you’re not going to be making anything anymore. Make sure to let the Social Security office know that you retired. they’ll go back to giving you, you know, your normal amount. So, it will increase because you would have been um you would have had that reduction for 2 years in this scenario. You still get two years of increases because you still paid into social security at that time frame, but you also had a reduced benefit because you went a little bit over. So, you’ll get it again around 64 65. Um but yeah, you know what? Meet with me or send me an email. I want to learn about this one a little bit more. um if you’re interested be something I can look into a little bit more for you and see if 62 is really the best route. If you’re going to keep working until 64 in your case and you can live off of that, you might just want to just push off until 64 and get that much better of a benefit. All right. I was married 13 years. We’re now divorced. I know that I can collect his social security if it turns out more than mine. However, what if I remarry him? Then what happens to that? Well, it’s if you remarry him,
never mind. That’s a personal thing. If you remarry him, then just goes right back to it. You’ll just get back to you you’ll go from divorce spouse benefit to a spousal benefit getting half of his based off of whenever you retire or whenever he retires in that case. But it’s if you wait till 67 to claim, you get half of his PI of his full PIA.
I know you said your financial advising is complimentary. Does that also apply to business income and taxes help? So, I’m not a CPA. CPAs file taxes. They do that. What I do is tax planning. How can I help you save money in taxes down the road? Not allowed to do tax preparation though because you have to go to school and for that specifically and go get your CPA license. But I do assist a lot of my clients with I have a a small business on the side of this uh aside from financial planning. So I know a lot of tax breaks and I utilize a lot of tax breaks for my business income because you can get an LLC that generates a little bit of money. See all the tax write offs come through. But I can give you some tax planning advice, some business income strategies. We can go through all of that. just I need to know as much as you’re willing to dulge because the more I know, the better the advice I can give you. As the saying goes, more the input, the better the input, the greater the output.
Again, folks, got about six people that still need to answer the poll. If you don’t mind, I appreciate it. Great turnout today. Love all the questions. Got like four more to go through. And please keep asking them if you’d like to. I will stay on here as long as I need to. My wife works for an independent school district here in Houston area. It is it true that she has to decide between social security survivor benefits and her TRS but cannot receive both. Not anymore. Um they used to have a big gosh that was I I used to be a financial adviser for the school districts. I do their 403b plans and their 401ks. Oh, I’m sorry. If you can’t see the poll, it might be behind one of your other windows. If not, if you’re looking to say no, you can just let me know in there and I won’t be hurt. But if you want to say yes and you want to meet with me and you can’t answer the poll, just use the QR code right there on the screen. You can schedule the blink with me. We’ve been having an issue with that. All right. School districts in Texas and in Florida and a couple other states, if you work for a school district, more than likely you’re not paying into social security. So, you won’t get social security. Not going to be an issue. You can still get spousal benefits though. For the few school districts in Texas that do pay into social security really didn’t help them at all because the windfall provision basically reduce their social security their TRS amount their pension to zero. So they’re paying into two federal a federal and a state pension and they’re really only to claim one. It was an absolute scam. Fortunately, Congress recently fixed that. They got rid of the windfall provision. So if you have you’re not going to get penalized for having two different government pensions, as you shouldn’t. you paid into it, you should get it back. But they got rid of that. Let’s talk more on that one because I don’t know if I know everything that’s behind that. If you scheduled a meeting with me, we’ll discover it. We’ll discuss that. But if you didn’t, send me an email or schedule a quick one with me. I want to look into this one deeper to make sure that we’re answering this question fully. If benefits were started at 62, can the benefits be repaid to SSA to reset the benefits age to 67 and 70? I’d like to know how old you are now, but if you started at 62 and it’s been less than 12 months, you can get off within 12 months and you can stop and you can get back on later and you can keep increasing your amount. I if you’re 60, if you started 62 and now you’re 65 66, I don’t think you can do a whole lot from there, but be happy to go through that one with you in a 101.
What are the new changes to the military retirees with regards social security in particular to an ex-wife and her eligibility for her? Okay, so you are the ex-wife of a veteran. You want to know about new changes to military retirees with regards to social security. There’s no change there, I don’t believe. I mean, it’s just still going to be spousal benefits based off their social security. If you’re trying to talk about military pensions, that’s another conversation to have, though. But as far as social security goes, it doesn’t matter if you’re a vet or work in the private sector or the public sector. It’s social security benefits in this case.
If both my husband and I are drawing our social security, can I get a spousal benefit and draw on my husband social security? No. So, you get to pick between whichever one’s best. Refer to that one, that example that we had earlier. If your benefits $800, if you both retired at full retirement age, your benefits $800 a month, your B your spouse’s is 2,000, you get a,000. Don’t take the lower benefit, take the higher. But you don’t get to get the spousal benefit plus your own benefit. But you can enhance your benefit if your spouse’s benefit’s great enough to where your 50% of his is better than yours. And it happens all the time. Um, but we can review that oneonone. be happy to do that with you too just to understand that one better. I know I say that a lot but you know I really don’t give people answers to things without until after I’ve met with them for 30 to 45 minutes and have a full 10,000 foot view of their situation because again better the input better the output i.e. my answers to you married more than 10 years. Okay. Yeah. Okay. That was referring to that one. Yeah. meet with me. Let’s discuss that. If if there is something that I don’t know about it, I’d love to look into it for you, too. And I have all the tools and resources to find that answer for you. As far as the U spousal benefit for veterans and social security, if I am eligible for spousal benefits and I remarry but divorce after my ex dies, am I still eligible or must be unmarried at the time of death? Yeah, that’s that’s the thing. So if you remarry, you kind of end it right there. So I mean, if your new husband or new wife has a better benefit, doesn’t matter. Then you step up. But if it’s less, could be affecting yourself right there. I’d be happy to go through that one with you, too, on a one-on-one. That’s our last question. Um, I’m going to stick on here for a little bit longer. But look, folks, again, don’t make this decision lightly. If you already have a financial adviser, go ask them. If you don’t think they’re worth anything or they they if they’ve never brought up social security planning to you, they’re not doing you a service. So, just come talk to us. It doesn’t have to be me. Most people don’t like my face. That’s fine if I’m joking. But come meet with us. There’s 10 of us. We’re here across the country. We’re here to help. I cover Texas to Virginia. Um basically the entire Gulf Coast and part of the eastern seabboard. We’re here to help our members. So, if you need any help with understanding when’s the best time to take out your funds, how do you not run out of money, how do you get your best benefit, the best use of your benefit at least from Social Security, cuz hey, 12 and a half% of your pay has been going into the system your entire career. It’s a decision you should not take lightly. So, at the very least, set up a meeting with us. It’s complimentary. Make sure that you’re making the right decision. That is why we are here to help you all. All right. Thank you. I’m glad I could help. And I do appreciate everybody that said thank you. Really do. Um, as confident as I sat sound right now. Really, I’m just like shaking my legs over here. I’m joking again. Terrible jokes. But look, any questions you have, it doesn’t even have to be about social security. We’re here to help with all of your personal finances. So, thank you very much. I appreciate it. Look, I’m I like to do this one about four times a year. Um, I if if you want to learn more about tax planning and I if you haven’t retired yet, if you haven’t moved anything over to an IRA yet, join us for IRA planning in two weeks. But please join me for the tax planning one in on September 18th. It’s on a Saturday while the grandkids or the kids are watching cartoons. Hop on with me. It’ll be beneficial. Um, I’ll be updating my retirement topics or my webinar topics in the near future, but uh, we’ll get there. We’ll be more available Friday than Florida. All right, I will reach out to you then. Thank you very much for providing your info. All right, folks. Look, have a wonderful day. Um, what is coming up? I don’t see you until September. Happy college football season. Hope your team doesn’t ruin your season by week three. Um, outside of that, have a wonderful day. Can you share those other webinars again for future? Sure, let’s do that. Close your eyes so I don’t give anybody a seizure while going through 80 slides real quick. So go. This is the website here. Aerys.alliancreditun.com/events.
That is how you see everybody’s webinar. I talk to my colleagues up in Chicago or Denver or California. As far as the Southeast goes, that’s me. I also have another buddy uh Mike who is another colleague of mine who’s here in Houston. We’re the ones basically covering everything east of the Mississippi as well as Texas and uh Nebraska and Kansas and places like that. But we’re here to help our members. Let us know what we can do. So that’s the webinar link right there. See our entire list. This is the big boy right here. I like this one. We’re going to talk about tax planning, tax planning changes. Um, I believe we’re even going to cover the additional benefits from the big beautiful bill from a couple years ago. Um, where, hey, now that you’re a senior, you get an extra tax break. Let’s take advantage of those guys. You’ve been paying taxes for four or five decades now. Let’s get you your money back and save you some money in taxes and we’ll figure that all out later. All right. Outside of that, folks, it has been a pleasure. We love doing this. Happy that we had a great turnout today. Again, for those who said yes, I will reach out to you tomorrow whenever I get the list of those who said yes. Um, and we will set up an appointment from there. Otherwise, see you then. See you for the next webinar. Have a wonderful evening. Thanks for joining today. All right, for those left, thank you very much. I’m going to sign off now since there’s no more questions coming on through. Thanks again, folks. Y’all have a wonderful day.
-
Grow These 6 Fruit Trees For YEAR ROUND HARVESTS! Never Fear FOOD SHORTAGES – Always Have Fresh Food!
What’s going on, gardeners? It’s Saturday, June 11th, and it is a scorcher here on the southeastern coast of North Carolina. Today, I’m going to show you six different types of fruit trees to grow so you are harvesting fresh, delicious fruits all year long, even throughout the winter, so you will always have a source of easy, lowmaintenance, healthy, fresh food for you and your family. At the time of filming this video, it is June of 2022, and inflation, food prices, and food shortages are out of control. Many of you have reached out to me because for the first time in many of our lifetimes, we are genuinely concerned about food shortages and prices. I am making this video for two reasons. Number one, for those concerned about current food prices and availability and are looking for a smart, affordable way to have more food security for you and your family. And two, for those of you that just want lowmaintenance sources of fresh, healthy foods all year round that taste better and are healthier and cheaper than those at grocery stores. Whether you’re watching this during the current inflation crisis or you’re watching this many years later and things are going a lot better in these fears of mostly past, this is a smart thing for all homeowners to do to have a little bit of food security in all of our lives and cut down on grocery costs. Here are the three rules of the video. Rule number one, I’m focusing on fruit trees, not vegetable gardens. Vegetable gardens require active management. Fruit trees are passively managed and are a lot lower maintenance. Fruit trees are true investments, and a single $30 fruit tree, once planted, can reward you and your family for your entire lives with annual harvests. Also, most fruits can be stored for months in proper cold storage for long-term food security. And many of these trees have varieties that you can source that have been specifically bred to store for 6 months or longer. Rule number two, I’m selecting fruit trees that grow well in hardiness zones 4 through 9 because that’s where most people in the world live. And I want to focus on providing food for those with tough winters that can lead to scarcity. If you’re in zone 10 or warmer, you probably don’t need this guide because there are plenty of tropical fruits that grow all year round and can provide you food. I want to focus on the people with tough winters where growing food is thought to be difficult if not impossible. And rule number three, this guide is a general outline that you must customize by choosing proper varieties for where you live. While you can grow, say, apples in both zone 4 and zone 9, different varieties will need to be chosen based on your growing season. Warmer zones will need more heat tolerant disease resistant selections, and colder zones need earlier maturing selections. Always remember to research varieties within a species that do best where you live. Your local county cooperative extensions website is a great place to start. Now, let’s get into it. And the first type of fruit that we are going to discuss are berries. And when I say berries, I mean strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, raspberries, and mulberries. We’re going to begin with strawberries. Now, strawberries can be grown anywhere from USDA hardiness zones 3 through 9 and ripen generally from April to June, depending on your location. And some varieties of strawberries also have a smaller fall crop. Now, I want to make this clear for every single plant that I list here moving forward. When I say zones 3 through 9, those border zones like your threes and your nines, not all varieties are going to work in those locations. That’s where you have to do your research because you may need a really cold hearty variety if you’re on a border zone or a really heat tolerant variety if you’re on the warmer border zone. Now, for me here in North Carolina, I grow day neutral varieties of strawberries which bear periodically throughout the year. And my first strawberries I start picking in the middle of April. So most of my berries have already been picked clean now that it’s June 11th. The heat of the summer is going to set in. They are going to stop producing and then once it cools back down in the late fall, I will get another fall crop. But there are also everbearing and Junebearing varieties that have either shoulder season harvests on the everbearing types or they are ready in June if you go for the June bearers as the name states. I love strawberries because they are one of the very first things you can pick in your garden every new season. Then we have our blackberries and our raspberries. Blackberries are generally hardy to zones 5 through 9 and raspberries are generally hardy from zones 3 through 9. Both are ready for picking roughly between May and September depending on where you live. Here you can clearly see my blackberries are looking pretty shot. That’s because I have been harvesting off of them since mid to early May. So they have been almost picked clean and the bugs are starting to get to them as is the heat. If you live in a place with cooler summers where they take a long time to grow, they can hang all the way until frost if you don’t harvest them and the pests don’t get them. here where our growing seasons are longer, sometimes we’re even fortunate to get a small fall harvest as well. Aside from the pests, if you just cover these with insect netting, they are a pretty much maintenance-free plant. Aside from annual pruning, blueberries, depending on the variety, are hardy anywhere from zones 2 through 9. And they’re ready for harvest anywhere from May to July, depending on where you live and what variety you’re growing. Now, I will link to a video above which is the most in-depth blueberry growing variet that I put together. So, please check that out to know varying different types of varieties for blueberries. These are my southern high bush blueberries. They’ve already been picked clean. I have harvested them because they were ready for me to eat in early May. Then over here, we have my rabbit eye variety of blueberries. These are much later than the southern high bush varieties and they are still loaded with fruit and I’m in the process of picking ripe berries. These still have about 50% of the fruit on them and they’re not ready here until about June. So hopefully you can see how you can use variety selection to your advantage to extend your growing season. And one of the easiest, lowest maintenance varieties of berries that you can grow is the mulberry. Mulberries grow from hardiness zones 4 through 9. And depending on where you live, they can be ripe as early as March all the way through August. Now, mulberries are known for their extremely low maintenance. In fact, even if you live in the oppressive conditions of Florida, there are native varieties of mulberries to Florida that are virtually pestfree, disease-free, maintenance-free, and they are known to be one of the earliest things that you can pick in your garden, and they are the first sign of spring. The second type of fruit tree you should grow for a continuous supply of food all year round are stone fruits. And when I say stone fruits, I’m specifically talking about peaches, plums, nectarines, and apricots. Now, peaches are generally hardy from zones 4 through 9 and are ready for harvest anywhere between May and September, depending on the variety in your location. Plums are hardy from zones 3 through 9 and are generally ready for harvest May through September. Nectarines are hardy from zones 5 through 9 and are generally ready for harvest May through September. And apricots are hardy in zones 4 through 8 and are generally ready sometime between June and August. Again, depending on your location and your variety selection. Now, I will say that out of all the categories that I’m mentioning in this video, stone fruits are going to be one of the most challenging to grow, especially if you live in the United States like I do because they are generally not native to the United States. So, our climate conditions are a little bit tougher on them and they are more prone to diseases and pests. So, you may have to spray them occasionally to keep them safe. The most common pest for stone fruits is generally the plum culio. So, you need to make absolute sure that you throw away any uh any fruits that have dropped to the bottom of the tree every year and discard them because that pest over winters in them. And they’re also uh prone to fungal issues. So, treating them with a natural sulfur or copper spray every year a few times is generally advisable. You can also use things like surround kale and clay spray in order to coat everything and keep the pests off. So, this little bit of extra work is totally worth it because they are so widely adaptable to so much of the land mass that we all live. And there’s so much variety there that it would just be tragic to not have at least one of them in our garden. And the third category of fruit trees that we should all be growing for year round harvests are apples and pears. Now, at first it may seem strange that I lumped apples and pears together in the same category, but I did that for a reason, and that is because here in the United States, there are native apples and pears to where we live. We have a problem here in North America because we have the latest freezes on average for any degree latitude versus any other inhabited continent on Earth. So when we import fruit trees from Asia and Europe and Africa and Australia and South America, their frosts stop earlier in the year than ours do. So a lot of times those imported fruit trees will bloom before our frosts end per degree latitude. Well, the thing about apples and pears is because you can get varieties that are adapted to North America, they flower later in the year. So those trees are less prone to late frosts and freezes, so they aren’t as much maintenance for people in the United States to maintain. Now, apples are extremely cold hearty and they can also be quite heat tolerant. Apples can grow anywhere from hardiness zones 3 through 9 and depending on the variety can ripen as early as July or as late as November. So they are one of those plants that you really want to pair with your climate. And uh generally speaking, we all associate apples with the autumn. So, it’s usually a good idea to get an apple that will ripen when the weather starts to get a little bit cooler out. The other awesome thing about apples is because they have so many different varieties that can ripen at so many different times of the year, you can grow many different early, mid-season, and later varieties and really extend your harvest. There are also very disease resistant varieties of apples out there and I suggest you buy more disease resistant cultivars. Then we have pear trees. Pear trees are generally hardy from zones 4 through 9. And depending on your location and the variety, they can ripen as early as August or as late as October. And pears are really cool because you can choose between European pears and Asian pears. And both are very different when it comes to flavor. Here I actually have an Asian pear tree. And these Asian pears are not self-fertile. So they do require cross-pollination from other varieties. And what I’ve done is I’ve grafted two different varieties onto a single tree. So I’m going to have a 3in-1 Asian pear tree. So make sure to look out for that video. One thing worth mentioning about apples and pears, whether they are apples, Asian pears, or European pairs, you have to check and make sure if the varieties are self-fertile or not. Most of them require cross-pollination, so you will need in most cases two trees that are compatible with each other and flower at similar times. So, make sure you do your research and you know how many trees you need. The fourth type of fruit tree that everybody should be growing for year round harvest is the pawpaw tree. And the thing about pawpaw trees is it’s funny that most people have never seen, tasted, or even heard of a pawpaw. Yet, it is the largest native fruit tree to the United States. Pawpaws naturally grow from southern Ontario all the way down to northern Florida, making them a no-brainer to grow here in the United States because they are virtually pest and diseasefree. However, here’s the catch with growing pawpaws. The reason why you’ve almost certainly never heard of them or tasted them or seen them is because pawpaws are almost impossible to grow commercially because they have a limited shelf life of only a few days. So the only way that you can eat them really is to grow them because they store so poorly. Now paw paws are hardy from zones 4 through 9. As I said, they grow from southern Ontario all the way to northern Florida. So, they are widely adaptable and because, like I said, they’re native to the United States, they have almost no pests and disease, making them a maintenance-free tree. However, the only thing that you need to know about pawpaws is they require cross-pollination to set fruit. So, you have to have two trees that are genetically different. So, you either need two seedlings or you need two different named varieties. And they have to be planted very close to each other, six feet apart or closer because they are not bee pollinated. They actually are pollinated by flies because their flowers smell a little bit like rotting meat. So they have to be really close together in order to get adequate pollination. The fifth type of fruit tree that everybody should be growing for year round harvests is the pimmen tree. Now there are three different types of pcimmen trees. There are American pcimmens which are hardy from zones 4 through nine and are native to the United States and therefore virtually pest and diseasefree in North America. There are Asian pimmens which are hardy from zones 7 through 11. They’re much more heat tolerant, not as cold hearty. And then there are AsianAmerican hybrids where breeders have crossed Asian and American pimmens and they are generally hardy from zones five/6 on the border of a warm five cold six to zone 9. So with the hybridized version you get the larger fruit of the Asian pimmen with more cold hardiness from the American pimmen. And some hybrid uh varieties are Nikita’s gift and Rosiana if you’re interested. Now here is the interesting thing about pimmens. Pimmens ripen after they get hit by frost. So for that reason pimmen harvest season is generally between October and December depending on where you live. However, there is something that you need to know about pimmens. Pretty much all American pcimmens that I’m aware of and most Asian pimmens are what they call aringent. And that means that you can’t eat them until they’re completely soft like a bag full of jell-o. If you were to eat them, they would uh before they’re ripe, they would be so high in tanic content that they would it would be like having a cotton ball in your mouth. It would be absolutely horrible. So, you need to wait until they’re fully ripe and they get hit with that frost. So these are one of the greatest uh fruits that you can grow for season extension. And this variety right here is actually an astringent Asian variety called Giambo. Now it’s on its third year uh second full year in ground. It set fruit this year, but it dropped them. So I won’t get any Asian pimmens off this tree this year. However, this variety of pcmen right here is an Asian pcmen called Itchy Jiro. And it’s only on its second season. first few uh first full year in ground and it’s already set some fruits and it’s already gone through its dropping spell. So I think there’s a good chance it may actually hold some if not all of these fruits. Now what’s interesting about this variety is it is a nonasting pimmen. You can eat it before it’s ripe. The con uh the tannin content is very low. So you can eat them when they’re hard like an apple if you so choose which is a great way to extend your growing season. You don’t have to wait until that frost rolls in and softens your pimmens. Now there are two things about pimmens that you must know. Uh number one most varieties of American pimmens require cross-pollination. So you need two genetically unique varieties planted nearby to cross-pollinate. Most varieties of Asian pcimmens are self-fertile and don’t need a pollinator. However, some say pollination improves the fruit. Some Asian pcmen varieties do require crosspollination. So, make sure you research the varieties that you’re interested in and make sure uh that you have the proper trees to make sure that they will set and hold fruit. The second thing about pimmens is the astringent varieties of pimmens because you have to wait until they’re completely soft to eat them. They don’t store well. So generally uh when it comes to aringent pcimmens if you want to store them for food storage you need to make things like purees or or jams and jellies or you need to dry them because they won’t store in their natural form very long. However the non-asting pimmens like these because you can eat them when they’re hard like an apple you can store these for a lot longer. They will eventually ripen in storage and get a lot softer, but because uh they don’t get as soft as an astringent pimmen ever, uh they are better for a storage variety. So, you may want to mix and match various varieties if you find out that you’re a big pcimmen fan. And the sixth variety of fruit tree that you must grow to have year round fresh fruit is citrus trees. Now, bear with me on this one. There is a very good reason why I need to include citrus trees in this video and that is because they are one of the few fruit trees that are fairly cold hearty and can take frost and freezes that also give you fresh ripe fruit all throughout late fall and the winter. It’s the winter time that is the citrus ripening season. So that is how you can get fresh year round fruit. Now, what type of citrus you grow is going to dictate when it ripens. Things like Satsumas, like my Oari Satsuma tree here, depending on the variety of Satsuma mandarins, they can ripen anywhere from October to December. Most orange trees like your navl oranges and your blood oranges like this carakara red navl orange right here and other larger fruited citruses like your grapefruits generally ripen between January and March. and that will take you all throughout the winter. However, you also have everbearing citrus trees like these uh kumquat trees down here that have the ability to flower and fruit periodically throughout the year and are not really based on a hard seasonal flower pattern like some of the larger citrus trees are. The same thing goes with lemons and limes. Lemons and limes are capable of flowering and fruing irregularly all throughout the year. This meer lemon tree right here, as you can see, is loaded up with fruit. And the fruits will hang and hold on the tree for a very long time. So, if you can’t eat them all at once, never fear. Just let them sit on the tree until you want to eat them. Of course, one of the problems with citrus trees is the overwhelming majority of good quality edible citrus is only able to be planted in ground between hardiness zones 8 through 11. So for people like me in the Carolina South, it is totally doable. But I know many of you watching this video cannot plant good quality citrus in ground. However, the reason why I am including citrus in this video is because citrus do fantastic in container culture. If you buy yourself dwarf citrus like I am here, this right here is a blood orange. I have showed you videos on this blood orange in the past and how this little tree, which only weighs maybe 30 pounds or so in this container, just loves it in here. And I overwinter it because it’s a little too cold where I live for it to be planted in ground without a lot of protection. And it does just fantastic. But it doesn’t just stop at my blood orange tree. I have purely tropical key limes and variegated pink lemons here. These are zone 10 plants. They can barely tolerate a light frost. They are purely tropical. But I’m growing them in these little containers and they fruit profusely. They do great in these containers. And I’ve showed you videos on these in the past. They make absolutely wonderful fruit. So, I’m growing my own citrus in containers as well to get what I need throughout the year because let me tell you, there is nothing better than having delicious fresh fruit picked right off of a tree during the doldrums of January. Now, I know what some of you are thinking, especially those of you that have been a part of my channel for a long time. How could I have not included fig trees in this video? Uh well, that’s because fig trees just aren’t widely adaptable. And I’m trying to make a video uh where it’s very easy for almost everybody in temperate regions to grow fruit trees in ground. And the fact of the matter is figs are really hardy to zones 8 through 10. And if you live in colder zones than that, you’re going to have to overwinter them in containers or you’re going to have to deal with dieback to the ground every single year. Yes, there are growers that are growing them in ground in zone 6, maybe even some 5B growers out there with protection. It can be done, but I’m trying to make this video as easy as possible. Uh, the citrus is pretty much mandatory because that uniquely fruits in the winter and that’s how we get our fresh winter fruits, but figs have a lot of overlap. They generally ripen August and September into early October. So, there are a lot of easier fruits to grow out there if you just want a food source that won’t be nearly as high of maintenance that will also uh store a lot better because figs don’t store well at all unless you dehydrate them. However, for those of you that are able to grow figs in ground or if you don’t mind figs in containers, I absolutely wish that every single person out there capable would grow at least one fig tree. They are my favorite fruit. And that right there are six different types of fruits that you can grow to have yearround food security. And you can sneak those trees into your backyard, place strategically along the fence line like I do, and people won’t be the wiser that you have your own source of sustainable, great quality, healthy food all year round. And for those of you in colder climates that are willing to grow citrus in containers, you really can have fresh fruit right off the tree 365 days a year. Now, these things are very smart things that we should all be thinking about regardless of our personal economic situations and and uh I truly believe that it’s in all of our best interest to have a little bit of food security around the yard because what happens if uh if if our grocery stores really do run low on food? I mean, it’s something that should always be in the back of our minds, and if we never need to use it, we never have anything to lose because worst case, you’re only going to save a bunch of money and get better quality food than what you get at the grocery store. So, it’s a win-win no matter what you do. And you’ll get a lot more sunshine and exercise planting and tending to those trees as
-
How I Killed My Intestinal Parasites (warning – gross)
Hey YouTube. This video is going to be about my experience with parasites and how I eventually beat them. Just a heads up though, this video is kind of gross. First off, let me just say that it’s estimated that about 1 billion people in the world have parasites. That’s one in every seven person, which means there’s even a chance that you might have some of these or these crawling inside you right now. But don’t worry, most parasites are completely harmless and are also asymptomatic, meaning they don’t even produce symptoms. Sometimes they will produce symptoms though and those will generally be weight loss or weight gain, cravings for carbohydrates, pain in your stomach, nausea, gas, bloating, or feeling tired. My story starts on the subtropical island Malta. While I was there, my stool suddenly changed. It became very yellow and extremely buoyant. I actually had to use an empty toilet paper roll and push it under because my stool was so buoyant that it just wouldn’t go down no matter how many times I flushed. I thought this was pretty weird, but uh I figured it was just from uh eating so much junk food. So, I basically just dismissed it. After coming home, my stool was normal again up until around 2 months later when all of a sudden my stool was changing again. First, it was like I was constipated. While I would typically go to the bathroom every day just like clockwork, suddenly it had been 3 days and I hadn’t gone to the bathroom yet. And then when it finally came out, there was a long streak of blood on it. This uh of course freaked me out. So, I went to the doctor’s office. They uh took a blood sample and also tested my feces for blood. Both results came back looking just fine. And the doctor prescribed me laxatives, which was completely unnecessary because what started happening next was that my stool was becoming more and more loose. Since my visit to the doctor didn’t help me at all, I had turned to Dr. Google to try and do my own research. I considered things like IBS or Crohn’s disease, but they didn’t really match what I was experiencing. But then I stumbled upon parasites and I read that sushi was notorious for containing parasite eggs. And lo and behold, I had sushi while I was on Malta. When my stool started becoming so weird, I immediately ordered a product from I Herb, which was an herb tincture with a combination of wormwood, black walnut, and cloves, which allegedly was very effective against intestinal parasites. That turned out to be true because the very first day that I took it, I went to the bathroom and my stool came out as a pile of diarrhea mess and it contained tiny little stringy objects and creatures.
I continued taking the herb tincture daily, but it was never as effective as that very first day that I took it. If you suspect having intestinal parasites, this is a great cheap way to test whether you have any yourself. I then tried some home remedies. The first one was a pineapple fast. I ate exclusively pineapple for 2 and 1/2 days, and this allegedly works because of an enzyme in pineapple, which is supposed to break down the parasites. This did absolutely nothing for me though, and the only thing it gave me was some serious acne. The second home remedy I tried was eating a bunch of raw pumpkin seeds. But again, this didn’t do a single thing for me. And uh actually, this might only be effective against tapeworms, which are really long worms. And it seems that I didn’t have any of these. After that, I tried a pharmaceutical drug, a so-called anti-helmthic, which is the class of drugs which are made to kill and expel parasites. The product was vermox and the active ingredient was meendazol. When I took this, this had the exact same effect as the herb tincture. The very first day I took it, my uh stool became a messy pile of diarrhea and there were again a bunch of small stringy little creatures in there. I then tried eating a bunch of raw garlic and like massive amounts of cayenne pepper powder. I even I would even put cayenne pepper powder in a glass of water and drink that just to get more in. I didn’t really expect this to work much better than the other home remedies that I tried, but this really worked. What happened was that I became unbelievably irritable for about 5 days. I’ve never been such a big [ __ ] in my life before. And uh then out came the worms. These slimy bastards were about 8 cm long and they were clear and translucent in appearance except for a few which looked as if they had been filled with the stool. It was extremely weird. Apparently, as these parasites were dying inside of me, they were releasing toxins into my body, which was what caused the irritability that I experienced earlier. I read about different parasite species online and figured out that what came out of me must have been the ascaris round worm. I also read that the most effective drug against these was the antihelmentic alendazol. So I went to the doctor and got a prescription for this. The doctor only let me get one single tablet of this because she was afraid of the side effects. And then when I finally got it, I uh took it and was really disappointed to find out that nothing happened until two days later. Two days later, I again had three more of those exact same worms come out in my stool. At this point, I had done all that I could do against these parasites and decided not to uh try any more treatments. My stool has since become way more normal, but it’s still not 100%. It seems that I do have something like IBS, Crohn’s, or a gut motility disorder. And what specifically seems to be happening is my intestinal tract is uh overactive. And that is how my story ends. As a summary, the treatments that seem to work for me was uh the herb tincture, the vermox or medbendazol, the raw garlic and cayenne pepper powder, and the albendazole. That was it for this video. So, I hope this helps you out if you suspect that you’re dealing with the intestinal parasites. And if not, I hope it was an interesting video. Bye.
-
08/20/2026 – Alliant Webinar – Reinvesting Retirement
Welcome everyone. We’re going to give it a few minutes here to allow people to join, but we’ll get started as soon as we possibly can. Still see people trickling in here.
I’m going to go ahead and uh link a few webinar materials in the chat for today that were also included in the 1-hour reminder email in the event that you’d like to participate in the exercise.
Still feel see a few trickling in here. We’ll give it another minute and then we’ll get started.
Again, thank you for joining. We’re just giving it a little bit of time here to allow people to join.
All
right. I think we could probably go ahead and get started. So, hello everyone. Thanks for joining today’s Alliant employee or excuse me for joining today’s uh webinar presentation uh presented by Alliant Retirement and Investment Services in partnership with Alliant Credit Union. We will have a live question and answer session at the end of today’s presentation. I also want to mention that the 1-hour reminder email for today’s event included links to the materials or resources that are referenced in this presentation today. And I encourage you to open those links to have the materials with you for today’s event. They will also be linked in the follow-up email that will go out after today’s event. And I’ll also include them in the Zoom chat here if you prefer to access them in that manner. Please submit your questions regarding today’s topic reinventing retirement or about Alliant Retirement and Investment Services in the chat or the Q&A. The presentation today is recorded and a link will be provided later by email for on demand viewing. Our speaker today is Michael Marx. Mike is a certified financial planner and has 30 years of experience in the industry. Mike is also passionate about helping individuals and families navigate an everchanging economic and financial landscape. He enjoys educating clients on investments, financial planning, and the impact that economic events can have on everyday life. Mike believes financial planning doesn’t have to be intimidating, and that some of the greatest value he provides comes from helping clients answer questions they might not have even thought to ask. Outside of work, Mike lives in Houston with his wife Amy and their boxer, Lily. He’s active in his church, volunteers with the local nonprofit, Sihope, enjoys sports like bach botchi, curling, softball, and loves to find ways to connect with and serve his community. Please make sure to adjust your volume to an appropriate level as settings vary by user. Now, let’s start our presentation on reinventing retirement.
Welcome everyone to today’s presentation. My name is Michael Marx. I’m one of the financial consultants with Alliant Retirement and Investment Services. I hope today’s information provides helpful context as you think through your retirement planning options. It’s also important to acknowledge that there is no single perfect retirement planning strategy. Every option comes with its own advantages and limitations and no one approach works for everyone. At Alliant Retirement and Investment Services, we understand that each family’s situation is unique. In this presentation, we’ll share key insights to help you make informed decisions about retirement. You’ll be seeing information about how to approach retirement planning step by step, including ways to save through your employer sponsored plan and strategies for finding additional dollars to contribute. We’ll also walk through how to estimate your cost of retirement, how social security may factor into your overall income, and why time can play such an important role in building long-term savings. Additionally, we’ll cover some investment basics, including different types of investments and the importance of diversification before finishing with practical steps you can take to get started.
Our team at Alliant Retirement and Investment Services is focused on helping you understand the ins and outs of investing, saving for retirement, and much more. Take a look at our website ais.allantiantcreditun.com
to see our list of weekly webinars, our podcast, Investsavvy, our blog, and other financial resources.
If questions arise about retirement planning, social security, retirement income rollovers, or investment planning, our team can help you evaluate those considerations within the context of your financial goals and circumstances.
Some brief housekeeping. This webinar is for educational purposes only and not a specific recommendation. Securities and advisory services offered through LPL Financial, a registered investment adviser and broker dealer. Products are not insured by FDIC, NCUA, or any government agency. Not a bank or credit union guarantee, not a bank or credit union deposits or obligations, and some may lose value.
Today, we’ll be covering the basics of retirement planning and investing. We’ll start with talking about features and benefits of 401k plans. Then we’ll talk about finding the money to save or to increase your current contribution. We’ll briefly cover some rules of thumb as to how much you should be paying for your retirement. Next, we’ll take a look at how social security benefits will factor into your retirement income. We’ll then spend some time on time. Time can play an important role in long-term retirement saving. though outcomes will depend on contributions, investment performance, taxes, fees, and personal circumstances. We’ll then move on to the basics of investing, the types of investments you have to choose from, and the importance of diversification in your investing strategy. Finally, it’ll be time to make your purchase by enrolling in your plan. The important thing to remember about retirement planning is that it is an ongoing process. And today is just the beginning. Reinventing retirement is about building a solid foundation, getting started with a plan that can help you get to where you want to be in the future.
Let’s go ahead and start with talking about the features and benefits of 401k plans.
I’m sure you will agree that most purchasing decisions are driven by a goal to get the best deal possible for yourself. So, what is the best retirement deal possible? What do you want to do in retirement? Retirement is going to mean something different for everybody here. In fact, a recent survey by CNBC found that the next generation of retirees, only 11% plan on not working in any capacity. For many people, the freedom to explore new challenges during retirement is the best deal possible.
Let’s think about paying for your purchase. How many of you are currently contributing to your retirement savings plan? That’s great. The average US household saves $1,135 per month. Now, how many of you are ready to increase your contribution right now to help those retirement dreams become real? What keeps you from saving more? Well, that’s one of the things we’re going to talk about today. We’re going to look for ways to help you save more for your retirement and we’ll explore all the reasons why saving now is one of the best things you can do for your future.
You know, purchasing your retirement is not all that different from purchasing a car or a home or any other big ticket item. You do really well when you know what you’re looking for, when you have a goal, when you have the right tools, and when you have a plan to make it happen.
Because your retirement will be the largest purchase of your lifetime. It’s going to require a very special kind of payment plan. Your 401k is a key benefit offered by your employer, and it offers you one of the easiest ways to save for your retirement future. We’ll start off with an overview of the features and benefits that can help you get the best retirement deal for yourself. Automatic payroll contributions. The first valuable benefit is automatic payroll deductions. Your 401k plan allows you to save money each pay period up to the annual limit set by the IRS. And by the way, later in this presentation, we’ll talk about the new increased annual limits that went into effect this year. Your contribution is automatically deducted from your paycheck before you even see it and deposited into a separate trust account for your benefit. Out of sight, out of mind. What you don’t have, you won’t spend. You will also be following a great savings principle. Pay yourself first. You’re in control. The second valuable benefit is that you’re in control of your money. And what I mean by that is that it’s portable. Should you leave your company for any reason, you have the option to leave your vested account balance in your current plan, or you can take it with you. Your money can be rolled over into an IRA or your new employer’s 401k plan if offered. However, you need to know that there are strict rules when taking money out of your retirement plan. For instance, if you decide to take money out and spend it and you are under age 59 and a half, you’ll be subject to a 10% IRS penalty in addition to current income taxes. You’ll want to check with your plan administrator to make sure you understand all of your options. The third valuable benefit is pre-tax savings power. When you make a contribution to your 401k, federal and any state income taxes would have been due on this money or deferred until you take that money out. This means that 100% of your money goes to work for you right away. Participating in your 401k lowers your tax bill, too. Here’s how it works.
Today’s retirement shoppers are Amanda and Jake. each earn $25,000 per year and both save 6% of their pay, $1,500 each year for retirement. Amanda saves through her 401k, so her contribution goes directly into her pre-tax account. Jake saves on his own, so he cashes his paycheck and puts away after tax money in a savings account at his bank. By saving through her 401k, Amanda gets a better tax deal. She lowers her taxable income, which means she pays less tax. In this example, that translates into an annual tax savings of $225. Actually, she’s only out of pocket. $1,275 in order to save $1,500. That’s $1,500US 225 equals your 1275. Does everyone see how that works?
the payment plan. By saving through your 401k, you also benefit from tax deferred growth. As your retirement account grows, you pay no taxes on any earnings until you begin to withdraw your money. This powerful feature is known as tax deferred compounding. Investments with earnings that are tax deferred have the potential to grow faster when they are not being hit by taxes each year. Tax deferred compounding can give a significant boost to your retirement account balance. Let’s return to Amanda and Jake to see what happens to their money after it gets deposited in their accounts.
Here you see the growth on their account balances, each earning a hypothetical rate of return of 8% over a 40-year period. The big difference is that Jake is paying taxes on his earnings along the way and Amanda is deferring taxes until retirement. Now, here are two important questions for you to consider. Which balances do you think would potentially provide you with the most income during retirement? And which balance do you think would potentially last longer during retirement? Raise your hand if you voted for Amanda’s balance.
Let’s take a look at the difference tax deferred compounding can make in terms of Amanda’s retirement income. Assuming that upon retiring, both Amanda and Jake decide to divide up their account balance into 20 equal withdrawals. They plan to take one withdrawal each year over a 20-year period. Why 20? That’s because most people can expect to live another 20 years on average during retirement. As you can see from our hypothetical example, even after paying taxes on each withdrawal, Amanda has almost $2,600 more each year for pursuing her retirement dreams. Does everyone see how this works?
The important concept here is that if an employer match is available, contributing enough to receive the full match may help increase retirement savings subject to plan rules and your personal situation.
Finding the money to save. Well, now that we’re sold on the benefits of a 401k plan, let’s take a look at coming up with the money to contribute. or better yet to increase your contribution. Let’s face it, there are a lot of obstacles to saving for retirement. Couples who work or single parents with young children know that child care can be expensive. Perhaps you’re saving for your teenager’s college expenses or planning a major purchase such as a new home or a car. Maybe you’re supporting an aging parent. Many people struggle just to make ends meet. It may seem impossible to find money to save for retirement,
but the truth is you can. With the right tools, you can discover a number of small savings that can really add up over time. One of the best things you can do for your finances is to track your daily spending. Find out where all your dollars are going. A video rental or lunch out may not seem to cost much, but the expenses add up over time. Keep a spending journal for several weeks and evaluate your spending habits. You might be surprised at what you discover. When you see how you’re spending your money each month, you can start to make a budget. A budget will help you define how much money you have available to spend in any one category each month.
Here’s a sample spending journal. It’s also on page five in your workbook. How many of these entries sound familiar? Keeping a spending journal is half the battle. Once you become aware of your little ways you spend money without thinking, you can begin to take action. Shopping without a list can result in buying more than you need. That daily coffee and bagel can add up to $15 a week or $60 a month that could be going toward your retirement savings. Look at how changing just a few spending habits can add up. Going without some of these items over the course of a month can add up to a substantial increase in your monthly contribution. And if you invest the money you saved for 25 years, you can see how you could potentially get a better retirement deal for yourself. Here are a few small saving ideas you could try. You may want to make a note of these and add a few of your own.
Start with a few small sacrifices. Leave the debit card at home. Maybe shop for clothes on sale. Take your lunch to work. Shop for groceries with coupons and a list. Avoid beverages at restaurants or water instead. Plus, in addition to the small nuggets you can find, there may be a few larger expenses you can trim. Think about your major financial expenses, your mortgage, credit cards, car insurance. There may be ways you could find to save on even one of them. Take a look at these examples. You might refinance your mortgage at a lower rate. Consider consolidating your credit card debt at the lowest rate available. Investigate a lower car insurance rate. Or if you’re in a market to buy a car, buy a used one. So, you see, the truth is you really can afford to save more for your retirement. To summarize, even a little extra a month can add up. The first step is to become aware of how you’re spending your hard-earned money by using a spending journal, making saving for the kind of retirement you want a priority, and living within a budget. Plus, you could try to find smarter ways to handle large expenses. Often there’s a less expensive way if you do a little investigating. Remember our great principle of saving? Pay yourself first. Well, it’s a good bit of advice. Take the money you’d normally spend on impulse items and have it deducted from your paycheck. Then you won’t have it to spend on unnecessary items. You can do it. Finding extra money doesn’t mean giving up everything, but it may mean becoming more aware of your finances and living within a budget. Now you know how it’s possible to save more. But you may be wondering, how much is enough? What is the price of my retirement? The price of your retirement.
With the many factors to consider, it can be overwhelming to try and figure the exact amount of money you’ll need for your future, especially when you’re trying to figure out how much you’ll need to save in addition to any social security or pension benefits you’re expecting. On pages six and seven of your workbook, you’ll find a general worksheet which will help guide you through the process of determining what you will need for retirement and how much you should be saving to get there. Make a goal to work through this calculation on your own at some point in the near future. It will help you clearly see the valuable role that your 401k can play in funding your retirement future. It’s also a good idea to file your worksheet away for reference and revisit the calculation annually as your personal circumstances change.
For now, here’s a simple rule of thumb that many financial adviserss use to help you determine a starting point. If you’re in your 20s, you may want to think about saving 7% of your salary as a starting point. If you’re you’re in your 30s, if you’re in your 40s, if you’re in your 50s, you may be able to save more or you may be unable to save this much. Regardless, the important thing is to start saving as much as you can right now. The best way to get started is to save through your 401k plan with convenient payroll deductions. You may want to make a note of these figures for use later when you fill out your enrollment form. Now, to further emphasize why it’s important to start saving as much as you can right now, let’s turn our attention to Social Security benefits.
Social Security.
How many people here think Social Security will take care of all of your retirement income needs? How many people here think Social Security will take care of at least half of your retirement income needs? Well, the truth is many people have a false sense of what Social Security is about. And that’s okay. One thing to keep in mind about reinventing retirement is that it’s about staying informed. After all, knowledge is retirement power.
Social Security is intended to provide only a minimum level of retirement income to go forward covering the basic necessities, food, shelter, and clothing. It was never intended to be your only source of retirement income. The rest will be up to you. Here’s a rough estimate of what a 35year-old and a 62y old today might expect in social security benefits based on current pay. People are living longer, healthier lives. In fact, it’s estimated that the number of people aged 65 and older were nearly double by the year 2030. Based on the 2025 trustees report, if no changes are made, the combined social security trust fund projection indicates reserves could be depleted in year 2034 with continuing income sufficient to pay only 81% of the scheduled benefits at the time.
So because of of this full retirement age has gradually increased for later birth years and it’s age 67 for those born in 1960 or later. If you were born after 1937 this means that you don’t get your full benefit until later than you may have thought. Also, for those seeking early retirement at age 62, which is the earliest age you can start receiving benefits, face a continuing reduction in the percentage of social security benefits they can draw. You can refer later to the chart on page nine of your planning guide to get an idea of what you can expect. For now, let’s take a look at an example of a person who was born in 1960.
Let’s assume that the average annual pay for our child of the 60s is $35,000. Beginning at their full retirement age of 67, they can generally expect a monthly social security benefit of about $1,253.
Now, this replaces about 43% of what their monthly pay was before they retired. But like many people, our person would like to retire early. How would retiring at age
six monthly benefit of $1,253 would be reduced by another 33%. They will be giving up $414 per month. Another way of looking at this, by retiring earlier, their social security benefit will now only replace about 30% of what their monthly income was before they retire. Does everyone see this? So, if you think of the best retirement deal for you involves retiring early, this is some information you’d want to keep in mind.
For most of us who want to retire early, or even those of us who want to retire on time, the reality is this. We’ll need to save as early as we can and as much as we can through our 401k. When it comes to social security, reinventing retirement is about three things. Staying informed, make a note of the Social Security website. It’s the best way to stay up to date on what’s happening. They’ve got some interactive calculators to help you figure out what your benefit may be when you retire. Taking responsibility for your own financial security, and planning for retirement now, no matter what your age is. But why is starting to save as early as you can so important? Because it’s about time.
Many people feel that retirement is a long time away and that there’s plenty of time to get going on a serious savings plan. But don’t underestimate the power of time. Time greatly improves your chances of having enough money at retirement. The earlier you start saving, the better retirement deal you can get.
The rule of 72 is one of the easiest ways to find out what an impact time can have on your savings. It simply calculates the number of years it’ll take to double your money. Here’s how it works. Take the rate of return you expect to receive on your investment, divide it into 72. The result is the number of years it will take for your investment to double. This means that in nine years, a $5,000 investment earning a hypothetical rate of 8% would double in value to 10,000. The sooner you start saving, the more doubling period you will have in your remaining working career. Let’s see how our math is today. Can anyone tell me how long it will take for an investment earning a hypothetical rate of 6% to double? How about 12%? Does everyone see how this works?
Assuming a hypothetical annual investment return of 8%. We can use the rule of 72 to show how time affects the potential growth of an initial investment of $2,500. As you can see, starting early, in this case, age 22, get you the best retirement deal. Your investment doubles every 9 years. And by your full retirement age of 67, your money will have doubled five times. And now your initial investment of $2500 now equals 80,000. But if you wait until age 31, you miss out on one doubling period and your 2500 has only grown to 40,000 by age 67. And if you wait until age 40, you’ll miss out on two doubling periods and your $2500 has only grown to 20,000. The moral of the story is this. Waiting costs you real money. The longer you wait, the more money it costs you. Not only that, but there’s another thing to consider when thinking about time.
Inflation eats away at your money’s purchasing power and may not buy as much retirement in the future as it does today. After you retire, you’ll probably be living on a fixed income. Unfortunately, the cost of basic necessities will continue to rise. Here’s a chart that can help you reinvent retirement by keeping inflation in perspective.
Not only does inflation affect your buying power, it also has an impact on investment returns. Certain cash type investments may not always keep pace with inflation. Over the same time, inflation is average about 3%. That means that the real return on cash type investments, their return after adjusting for inflation is less than 1%.
So what can you do to help manage inflation? One thing you can do is consider increasing your contribution each year. In addition, you may also want to consider investments in your retirement savings account that have the potential to beat inflation. And speaking of investments, we’re now ready to take a look at investing basics. Investing basics.
Asset allocation is the process you go through in deciding how to divide up or allocate your investment dollars among the various types of investments called asset classes offered through your 401k plan. Now that you’re ready to invest in your retirement future, it’s important to get a feel for this process. Asset allocation can be an important factor in long-term investment outcomes. This guide will take you through the asset allocation process by introducing you to some of the common types of investments, educating you about the importance of diversification, making you aware of your feelings about risk, reviewing some of the general asset allocation models to help you visualize your own personal retirement strategy.
through your 401k plan. You’re creating an investment strategy to help you accomplish the financial goals you set for yourself in retirement. Your investment strategy will depend on many factors such as the number of years you have until you’ll need your money. Your ability to handle occasional and unpredictable changes in the value of your investments, also known as your risk tolerance, your current lifestyle and financial situation, the kind of lifestyle and experiences you wish to pursue during retirement. your life expectancy, your investment return objectives. The first step in choosing the right investment strategy for yourself is understanding the investment choices offered by your plan and the risks and growth potential connected with each.
Generally speaking, most retirement plans offer these three general types of investments for you to choose from: stocks, bonds, and cash equivalents. Here’s a look at how they fall in terms of most risky to least risky. One thing to keep in mind about choosing your investments, the greater the risk, the greater the chance for a higher return over the long haul. With less risky investments, you should expect a lower return over time.
Stocks. The first type of investment we will look at is a stock investment. By investing in stocks, you’re actually buying shares of ownership in a corporation. Stocks have the highest potential growth over the long haul, but also carry a higher degree of risk. Their unpredictable movement up and down in value is called volatility. Historically, over long stretches of time, stocks have a greater rate of return than other types of investments. Bonds are actually loaning money to an organization such as a corporation or the government in exchange for interest payments. They’re also called fixed income investments. Bonds actually pay either fixed or variable interest rates. Principal may fluctuate up and down, sometimes widely, but ordinarily will not vary as much as stocks. Finally, stable assets or cash. By investing in stable assets, also called cash equivalents, your goal is to maintain a steady or stable principal value whose generally does not fluctuate. Examples include money markets, US treasury bills, and some investment contracts offered by insurance companies or banks.
Mutual funds make up the majority of investment options within most 401k plans. They can be made up of any mix of stocks, bonds, and stable assets.
Your money is pulled together with the money of other investors who have the same or mutual investment goal.
Each mutual fund has a team of professional managers who perform the day-to-day tasks involved in researching, buying, and selling the investments on behalf of of the fund.
Here’s some big picture perspective regarding the historical performance of our three investment types from January 2010 through December 2025. The S&P 500 delivered an average annual return of about 14.1%. Bonds delivered an average annual return of about 2.7%. Stable assets delivered an average annual return of about 1.4%. And also note that inflation has averaged about 2.58% a year. One important point to remember, past performance is absolutely no guarantee of future results. You’ll
see that disclaimer everywhere when talking about historical returns for any investment. But history does reflect the power of time. Keep in mind that investing for retirement is a long-term proposition. The longer you’re in the game, the chances are more likely that you can expect a higher return by taking greater risk.
Now, I’d like to spend some time talking about diversification. Diversification means spending your money amongst several different types of investments in order to balance out the risk. It’s a fancy word, but a simple idea. Generally speaking, if your dollars are invested in many types of investments and market conditions cause one of your investments to not do well, all of your money won’t be affected. Diversification can also help with another kind of risk. Inflation risk is the chance that your investments won’t grow enough over time to keep up with the rising cost of living. What can you do about inflation risk? Well, you may want to consider investments in your retirement savings account that have the potential to beat inflation, such as stocks and bonds. Mutual funds can help provide you with diversification. Let’s take stocks funds for example. Investors who choose to make regular 401k contributions to a stock fund increase their shares of ownership in a variety of companies that fit that fund’s objective. Money may be invested in several companies depending on a combination of factors such as the company’s size, earnings history, length of time it’s been in business, type of product or service, specific industry, and geographical location. Because the fund spreads its investments across a variety of companies, it could potentially lower the impact if one company does not perform well
of diversification in your investment strategy. How many of you enjoy a lifesaver now and then? Well, Clarence Crane invented lifesavers in the early 1900s. He manufactured only one flavor of lifesavers, peppermint. But in 1913, Crane was approached by Edward J. Noble. Noble suggested that offering different flavors of lifesavers would attract more customers. Now, Crane wasn’t interested in the concept, but agreed to sell Lifesavers business to Noble for $2,900.
Noble went on to develop a billiondoll business manufacturing
different flavored lifesavers. By diversifying his product, he appealed to more people and protected his business from the risk of one flavor losing popularity. Diversification works with investments, too. Spread the risk to help protect your potential rewards.
Now, what I’d like to do is to take a few minutes and have us get a general understanding of how we feel about risk. By considering how long you have to invest and determining how much risk you can handle, you begin to create your own personal investment strategy for your retirement future. In your asset allocation guide, you’ll find a brief questionnaire. Let’s all take a pen or pencil and work through this now.
done. Okay, let’s rate ourselves. Five to seven points. Conservative. You’re an investor who seeks stability and safety for your money. Now, remember, not having enough money when you retire is a big risk, too. Keep in mind, your time horizon and impact inflation can have on those investments.
8 to N points moderate. You want your money to grow but are more concerned about protecting it. You are cautious but may be willing to diversify to spread out some of your risk depending on your time horizon. 10 to 11 points moderate growth. You are an investor who likes to balance lower risk investments with higher risk investments. Evaluate your situation at least annually to make sure this balance contains the right mix of lower risk and higher risk investments appropriate for your situation. 12 to 13 points. Growth. You want to increase your savings and are somewhat comfortable writing the ups and downs of the stock market in exchange for the possibility of higher returns over the long term. Now, you may have more time on your side until you retire. 14 to 15 points aggressive growth. You want to maximize the long-term growth of your retirement savings. You are comfortable taking substantial investment risk in exchange for potentially higher returns. Evaluate your situation at least annually. Stay focused on your time horizon and modify your investment strategy as your situation changes.
Remember, these are just some general guidelines to help you understand how you feel about risk. When making your investment selections, make sure you keep in mind all of the following. Your attitude toward risk, the amount of risk you can handle to get the returns you need, your time horizon, how long until you will need to start taking money out of your retirement plan, your investment goal, the amount of money you will need in order to pursue the lifestyle and experiences you wish for in retirement. Now, let’s take a look at page two of the asset allocation guide to help you choose your investment strategy. Find the asset allocation model that best matches your investor type and circle it. Now, remember, these are just general examples. You may wish to use your models as a starting point to further fine-tune your own individual investment mix.
Congratulations. You now have a solid understanding of retirement planning and investing basics. You’re ready to make your purchase. But first, let’s do a quick review of where we’re at. You know about the features and benefits of your 401k payment plan, which includes portability. You can take it with you. Automatic payroll deductions, pre-tax savings, tax deferred compounding. You have some great ideas for finding the money to save or increasing your contribution. You have a general idea of the cost of your retirement and how much you’ll need to start saving today. You have a better understanding of what
you can expect from social security. You know about the effects of time and inflation on your retirement planning. You understand your investment choices and the importance of diversification in your investment strategy. You have a general understanding about your feelings toward risk
enrolling in your plan.
When it comes time to determine your contribution, let’s just focus on a starting point. You can review our general rules of thumb. In your 20s, save 7% of your salary. In your 30s, save 10%. In your 40s, save 15%. In your 50s, save 20. If there’s a company match, consider contributing at least enough to receive the maximum your company’s offered. or consider starting with something conservative, say 5% of your current salary. If you’re already contributing, think about increasing your contribution today by 1 or 2%. As soon as you can, be sure to complete the worksheet guide on pages six and seven of the planning guide to get a more complete picture of your savings need.
You’ll also want to be aware of something else. In June of 2001, President Bush signed into law the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001, which created a number of enhanced 401k Plan Savings Opportunities that went into effect in 2002. Relief is the acronym for restoring earnings to lift individuals and empower families. Consider these figures a goal worth striving for.
Also, 401k savers who will be age 50 or older by the end of the year are allowed to contribute an extra amount over and above the new annual limits. So, if you’re over age 50 and find yourself needing to play a little catchup with your retirement savings, here’s what it can mean for you for 2026. an extra 8,000. 2027, those future increments will reflect a cost of living adjustment. Now, for employees age 60 to 63, you can save even more. Now, these contribution limits shown on the slide are subject to the IRS rules and plan provisions.
If questions arise about retirement planning, social security, retirement income, rollovers, or investment planning, our team can help you evaluate those considerations within the context of your financial goals and circumstances. Thank you so much for attending. We’re a full-ervice investment firm. That means planning and investments. Our role is to provide you education and when appropriate discuss planning and investment considerations based on your individual circumstances and applicable standards of conduct. If you have any questions about how the concepts discussed today may relate to your situation, we’d be happy to continue the conversation and more importantly how this impacts your retirement goals.
All right, thank you. So, let’s go ahead and get started with our live Q&A session here. If you do have any questions for Mike about retirement options, Alliant Credit Union, or his role as a financial consultant, please submit them in the chat or the Q&A tabs. We did get a couple of questions to start here and we’ll go ahead and throw those at you here, Mike. Uh, first question we got, how at risk are our 401ks with all companies investing heavily in the AI buildout? That’s that’s a great question. That’s a pretty strong opening question, too, whomever asked that. Um, so
that’s a tough one. So, so let me kind of give you some context. The the short answer to your question is there is some risk to that. Uh the belief is so so I’ve heard some comparisons to the.com bubble. So I’ve been doing this over 30 years. So I was around in the ‘9s. Everybody was buying.com. We were talking about hey that’s not a great idea. We’re not so much saying that now. Um and and and let me give you the main difference between those two and I think this will help answer the question. I’ll give you some context for that. So back in the 90s uh it was a really low entry point, right? So these companies were just startups. There was no money. They didn’t have any money. So they were able to come in and that was driving the price which drove the bubble. What’s different now is the companies that are investing. It’s not all the companies but it’s the big companies right of your mag 7 of them are investing the huge amounts that we see all the time. The other two that really are but aren’t out of that mag seven are Apple and Tesla. And they’re still investing, but they’re still in they’re investing in different ways because their business model isn’t that same function as like a like an Amazon or a Meta or or something like that. Um, you know, or an Alphabet. So, with that said, so here’s the caution and and I think it’s a great question because there’s there’s two parts to this. This was a concern even earlier in the year. If you remember, if you’re watching the market, a lot of these stock companies uh were investing in that and then the concern was is this driving the price up? Because when you’re building data centers, etc., instead of an expenditure, it becomes an asset on your book, right? So then your valuation start pushing a stock price up. So the question starts happening where people are like, hey, we’re in they’re investing these hundreds of billions of dollars for a future profit. are they really worth what they’re saying right now? How long will it take before we start seeing a return? And then you started seeing some of those sell-offs and that stock price come down because they’re looking at the valuation. Now, with that said, prior to that question, people were buying, you know, a lot of that and they were also buying the S&P. Well, if you look at the S&P 500, and for those of you who are not familiar with the S&P 500, at least how it’s structured, it’s the 500 largest US companies. So, in theory, you buy the S&P 500, you’re invested in 500 US companies. There’s a lot of diversification. We’ll go back to that lifesavers, right? There’s a lot of different flavors in there. But the reality of it is it’s weighted. It’s not equal weighted. So, the larger the company, the more impact it has. So, if you just look at the top five companies in the S&P right now, they account for about 30% of that movement. So, there’s already somewhat of a concentration. So you have two two things to consider and I would say the answer is somewhere in between. You’re going heavy in there for that run and they’ve seen that. We saw some of that pullback in the first part first quarter and then pretty much since March um or April you would see some of those runs and that’s where most of the market made their money and that’s where a lot of the big mag sevens were making their money as well. So to answer your question, there is a risk. If you avoid the risk altogether, you might miss out on that. And I think this is very different because if um if Google or Alphabet, so call it Google, if Alphabet, they’re investing all that money in there, right? But they’re still a very profitable company. When you look at Microsoft, when you look at Tesla, when you look at Apple, they’re still profitable companies. So that is the difference. If you are close to your retirement, then I would probably be more concerned about maybe concentrated positions and impact without protecting your downside. But that is a fundamental basis of all financial planning and that’s one of the reasons why you work with an adviser. Um, I hope that answers your question. Um, if not, just give me a call and and I can expand on that a little bit. Appreciate it, Mike. Um, next question we have here. Uh, can I roll over my traditional 401k tax deferred to a Roth before I am 59 12 years of age and I am no longer working for that employer? The uh the answer to thank you for that question. The answer to that is yes, you can. The question that you might not know needed to be asked, right, which is what I always say, uh, is should you? and and if you should it’s it’s how over how many years should that be done. One of the things that we do for the members here uh is part of our financial planning our wealth planning we look at Roth conversions as a part of that we look at the impact on your tax savings um currently in the future and its impact on something like Medicare as well. So, what I would say is if you haven’t, we could take a look at that. Go ahead and schedule some time and we’ll take a look at it and see how much over what time and what tax impact, good or bad, it could have on you and figured out if it’s actually even in your best interest to do something like that. But yes, you can.
Question we got here, um, how do I go about estimating the amount of income that I’ll actually need in retirement?
Oh, that’s actually a good way of going about it. It’s uh it’s the income gap. So, when most people do their planning, right, they always think about it. I need this number. I think most of the big firms do that. I need to hit a number. I need 1.46 million at retirement to have a comfortable retirement. I think Voya does it in Orange Money and things like that. Um the way you go about it from a very highle structure is that you would go through and you look at your expenses. So, we can help you with a budget worksheet if you need that. ARIRS has that. Um, and you would do two two numbers on there is what I always ask members. And this is one of those not huge homework. Take five to 10 minutes and do this. Run your expenditures. And even if you have that, still use the budget worksheet because there might be some things that you’ve forgotten about. So, it’s a good reminder to confirm. And then that second number that you would still put in that same thing is you would say, okay, when I retire, what do I expect that that expenditure to be or that that expense to be in today’s dollars? And for example, you’re working 40 hours or 50 hours depending on your field. Um, I might only spend $2,000 on travel because I just don’t take a whole lot of time off. But that is a goal for me in retirement. So that $2,000 now might be $10,000 when I retire or more. Right? So looking at those cash flows and then what you would do and this is part of I think it’s page six and seven in the worksheet on that. Um then you’ll look at at what your uh guaranteed income is like social security if you’re fortunate enough to have a pension if you have any annuities or anything like that. That’s all guaranteed income. And then whatever that shortfall is is then that’s called the income gap. And then you use the assets to generate income. Now, I will caution that as well as the risk tolerance questionnaire, I um when you’re doing these calculations and you’re using any type of calculator, I believe I actually wrote it down. It was slide 49 that says the S&P 500 from January 1st, 2010 to December 31st, 2025 average a little over 14% a year. So, if you’re looking at it, most people would say that’s what I want. that’s exactly what I need. But the cautionary tale to that and I thought it was interesting that those dates are chosen if you go back 10 years prior. So that would be I had to write that down. January two January 1st, 2000 to December 31st, 2009. Right before that, I know we’re not live. I mean, we’re live, but we’re not in person. So, I usually have people take guesses on this, but I cover this in in in person. The average return for the S&P over that 10-year period was a negative 2.7% per year for 10 years. So, those cycles do happen. They’re not very common, but they do usually happen within a generation. It happened in the early 2000s. It happened in the 70s, and it happened in the 30s. So when you think about retirement from a 20 to 30year time frame, there is a chance that you can run a down cycle like that. So always be cautious in the numbers that you use when you forecast the return that will ultimately generate your income. That is one of the things we do um and is part of our wealth planning for the employees and the members and non-members is that we do what’s called a stress test. So, we look at the what happens if I retire at the wrong time because I know when I want to retire, but maybe the market or the economy didn’t get that memo. So, just a word of caution on that. But that’s that’s the general structure on how you generate your income. Great. It’s a great segue into the next question, which is the last question that’s been asked here. Uh, what percentage of the current Social Security amounts are you using for retirement planning? Is it 100% 81% or somewhere in between? So,
we use it as 100% of whatever the forecast is, whatever Social Security says yours will be. If you don’t if you don’t have an account with Social Security, you really should get your ID, get your login. Um, there are quick quick calculators in there that you can punch in some numbers, but if you actually have an account, they actually have all your reportable income and they can give you a pretty good idea what your forecast is. We still use it as 100. I personally use it as a 100% from for me. Um, I know some people have those concerns about social security and the potential 20 to 25% pay cut if it does run out. Um, so so let me give you the context of this because I think this is important. Um
um so so if anyone has a if anyone has family or is in politics, my apologies because this is kind of tongue and cheek, but an elected politician, right, an elected official, their first job is to get reelected and to keep their party in power, right, in office. So shoring up social security isn’t that difficult. And I know the big thing is, hey, you know, in less than 10 years, we’re going to be defunct. Well, that’s true. If nothing is done, but small things can be done to shore this up. Things like just changing the social security tax, not putting a cap on it. They could up it 1%. It would make a huge difference and most people wouldn’t even notice on their paycheck because it’s pre-taxed. Um, they could change the years, which they probably should, right? When when social security came out in uh like the early 30s, I think 34, 35, somewhere around there, the average life expectancy for a man was 59 years old and for a woman it was 63. So if you made it to 65 and you were good for you, but you know, you’re living on borrowed time at this point, you know, and I’m going to jokingly say this. One of my clients told me this like like I don’t buy green bananas at this point, right? So, so I want to know this stuff now. We’re now you’re living 20 to 30 years past that. So, do they need to start social security later? Probably. Are they going to push it all the way? Probably not. But, you know, they’re already doing it now to where full retirement age is age 67. Um, but I would tell you we could do a couple of things on our planning because this is very spec specific and very customizable. If there is a concern on your end, we can say what happens if there’s if I only get 80% of my social security. what happens from there. How does that impact my portfolio? That’s just part of the stress test. That would be one of the inputs that we could absolutely do with the stress test and see how that works for you. We’re kind of running up against time here. We did get one last quick question in here. So, I’ll let you quickly answer this before we wrap up. Uh, what are Michael’s fees to review a question, for example, like converting 401k to Roth and the pros and cons involved? Um, my fees are about $1,000 a question and then No, I’m just joking. Hey, so Aerys as a whole, we are cognizant of of costs, right? And we are that division of the credit union. We’re we’re the wealth management side. So there are as far as the conversions and things that’s that’s just something we do. There are a lot of different types of products that have no fees to it. Um, we do the traditional money management, right? Where there’s manage money or it’s a percentage of assets. We want to make sure that it is in your best interest. What I would say is always caution on the cheapest, right? I jokingly say this, but I very much mean this. If if if I had a major surgery, I wouldn’t go out and look for the cheapest doctor to perform that surgery. What I would tell you is our costs are often lower than most of the firms out there. We are certainly competitive. Um, but everything is very transparent in how we do things. Uh but you know at the end of the day if you’re saying hey look I want to lower cost and we can look at some things that just have some of the lower costs. I don’t know if they’re necessarily the best products but but you can compare that right um we’re pretty transparent on how we do things. Yes we are fiduciary. Great. We’re fiduciaries. I’m actually a CFP.
Thank you for addressing that. So it looks like that wraps up all the questions we have had asked today. So, this is going to conclude our Q&A session. If you do have any additional questions or would like to schedule some time with Mike, please reach out to him. We will include his contact information in the follow-up email. We hope everybody has a great day and thank you for participating today. Have a great one. Thank you so much. See you on future webinars. Take care. Bye now. Be safe.